Meldas 60 60s руководство по эксплуатации

  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Mitsubishi Electric Manuals
  4. Control Unit
  5. MELDAS 60 Series
  6. Parameter manual

Cnc

  • Bookmarks

Quick Links

loading

Related Manuals for Mitsubishi Electric MELDAS 60 Series

Summary of Contents for Mitsubishi Electric MELDAS 60 Series

  • Page 3
    MELDAS is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. Other company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective companies.
  • Page 5
    PREFACE This manual is the alarm/parameter guide required to use the MELDAS60/60S Series. This manual is prepared on the assumption that your machine is provided with all of the MELDAS60/60S Series functions. Confirm the functions available for your NC before proceeding to operation by referring to the specification issued by the machine manufacturer.
  • Page 7
    Precautions for Safety Always read the specifications issued by the machine maker, this manual, related manuals and attached documents before installation, operation, programming, maintenance or inspection to ensure correct use. Understand this numerical controller, safety items and cautions before using the unit. This manual ranks the safety precautions into «DANGER», «WARNING»…
  • Page 8
    [Continued] CAUTION 3. Items related to maintenance Do not replace the battery while the power is ON. Do not short-circuit, charge, heat, incinerate or disassemble the battery. Dispose of the spent battery according to local laws. 4. Items related to servo parameters and spindle parameters With the MDS-C1 Series, only the serial encoder is compatible as the motor end detector.
  • Page 9
    This symbol mark is according to the directive 2006/66/EC Article 20 Information for end- users and Annex II. Your MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC product is designed and manufactured with high quality materials and components which can be recycled and/or reused. This symbol means that batteries and accumulators, at their end-of-life, should be disposed of separately from your household waste.
  • Page 11
    CONTENTS EXPLANATION OF ALARMS 1. List of Alarms ……………………….1 1.1 Operation Alarms ……………………..1 1.2 Stop Codes……………………….9 1.3 Servo/Spindle Alarms…………………….14 1.4 MCP Alarm ……………………….24 1.5 System Alarms ………………………27 1.6 Absolute Position Detection System Alarms………………32 1.7 Messages During Emergency Stop………………..35 1.8 Auxiliary Axis Alarms……………………..37 1.9 Computer Link Errors …………………….44 1.10 User PLC Alarms……………………..45 1.11 Network Service Errors ……………………46…
  • Page 12
    EXPLANATION OF PARAMETERS 1. Screen Configuration ……………………..1 1.1 Screen Transition Charts ……………………1 2. Machining Parameters……………………..3 2.1 Process Parameters……………………..3 2.2 Control Parameters ……………………..10 2.3 Axis Parameters ……………………..12 2.4 Barrier Data ……………………….14 2.5 Tool Measurement Parameters………………….16 3. I/O Parameters……………………….17 3.1 Base Parameters……………………..17 3.2 I/O Device Parameters ……………………18 3.3 Computer Link Parameters ……………………20 4.
  • Page 13
    I EXPLANATION OF ALARMS…
  • Page 15
    1. List of Alarms 1.1 Operation Alarms 1. List of Alarms 1.1 Operation Alarms (The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.) Alarms occurring due to incorrect operation by the operator M01 OPERATION ERROR during NC operation and those by machine trouble are displayed.
  • Page 16
    1. List of Alarms 1.1 Operation Alarms Error No. Details Remedy 0006 H/W STRK END (H/W stroke end) • Move the machine manually. The stroke end function has activated • Check for broken wires in the stroke end (the input signal is «OFF») and one of the signal wire.
  • Page 17
    1. List of Alarms 1.1 Operation Alarms Error No. Details Remedy 0050 Chopping axis zero point return • Reset or turn the chopping signal OFF, incomplete and then carry out zero point return. The chopping axis has not completed zero point return before entering the chopping mode.
  • Page 18
    1. List of Alarms 1.1 Operation Alarms Error No. Details Remedy 0105 SPINDLE STP (Spindle stop) • Rotate the spindle. The spindle stopped during the • If the workpiece is not being cut‚ start dry synchronous feed command. run. • Check for a broken wire in the spindle encoder cable.
  • Page 19
    1. List of Alarms 1.1 Operation Alarms Error No. Details Remedy 0115 RESETTING • When rewinding the tape‚ wait for the The automatic start button was pressed winding to end‚ or press the reset button during resetting or tape rewinding. to stop the winding‚…
  • Page 20
    1. List of Alarms 1.1 Operation Alarms Error No. Details Remedy 0126 Program restart machine lock • Release the machine lock before Machine lock was applied on the return resuming operations. axis while manually returning to the restart position. 0150 Chopping override zero •…
  • Page 21
    1. List of Alarms 1.1 Operation Alarms Error No. Details Remedy 1030 Synchronization mismatch • Correct the program so that the M codes Different M codes were commanded in match. the two systems as the synchronization • Correct the program so that the same M codes.
  • Page 22
    1. List of Alarms 1.1 Operation Alarms Error No. Details Remedy 1036 Synchronous control designation disable • Set the R435 register to 0. The synchronous control operation method selection (R435 register) was set when the mode was not the C axis mode.
  • Page 23
    1. List of Alarms 1.2 Stop Codes 1.2 Stop Codes These codes indicate a status that caused the controller to stop for some reason. (The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.) This indicates the state where automatic operation cannot be T01 CAN’T CYCLE ST started when attempting to start it from the stop state.
  • Page 24
    1. List of Alarms 1.2 Stop Codes Error No. Details Remedy 0108 OP MODE DUPL (Operation mode • Check for a short circuit in the mode duplicated) selection signal wire (memory‚ tape‚ Two or more automatic operation modes MDl). are selected. •…
  • Page 25
    1. List of Alarms 1.2 Stop Codes The feed hold state been entered due to a condition in the T02 FEED HOLD automatic operation. Error No. Details Remedy 0201 H/W STRK END (H/W stroke end axis) • Manually move the axis away from the An axis is at the stroke end.
  • Page 26
    1. List of Alarms 1.2 Stop Codes This indicates that automatic operation stopped after executing T03 BLOCK STOP one block of the program. Error No. Details Remedy 0301 SNGL BLK ON (Single block on) • Automatic operation can be resumed by The SINGLE BLOCK switch on the turning the CYCLE START switch ON.
  • Page 27
    1. List of Alarms 1.2 Stop Codes This indicates the operation state when an alarm did not occur T10 FIN WAIT during automatic operation‚ and nothing seems to have happened. Error No. Details The error number is displayed while each of the completion wait modes listed in the table below is ON.
  • Page 28
    1. List of Alarms 1.3 Servo spindle Alarms 1.3 Servo/Spindle Alarms This section describes alarms occurred by the errors in the servo system such as the drive unit‚ motor and encoder, etc. The alarm message‚ alarm No. and axis name will display on the alarm message screen. The axis where the alarm occurred and the alarm No.
  • Page 29
    1. List of Alarms 1.3 Servo spindle Alarms Alarm No. Name Meaning Machine side Initial communication with the linear scale or the ball screw end detector: Initial detector failed. communication error Machine side CPU initial error was detected in the linear scale or in the ball screw detector: end detector.
  • Page 30
    1. List of Alarms 1.3 Servo spindle Alarms Alarm No. Name Meaning Motor side detector: A data error was detected in the motor end detector or in the linear Data error scale of a linear servo system. Motor side detector: An internal memory error was detected in the linear scale of a linear Memory error servo system.
  • Page 31
    1. List of Alarms 1.3 Servo spindle Alarms Alarm No. Name Meaning Detector selection An error was detected in the motor switching signals that were unit switching error received from the detector selection unit, while controlling one drive unit and two motors. Detector selection An error was detected in the communication with the detector unit communication…
  • Page 32
    1. List of Alarms 1.3 Servo spindle Alarms Alarm No. Name Meaning Excessive error 2 A difference between the actual and theoretical motor positions during servo OFF exceeded the setting value. Excessive error 3 When an excessive error 1 occurred, detection of the motor current failed.
  • Page 33
    1. List of Alarms 1.3 Servo spindle Alarms Alarm No. Name Meaning Over regeneration Over-regeneration detection level became over 100%. The regenerative resistor is overloaded. Regenerative Thermal protection function of the regenerative resistor, has started resistor overheat its operation. Overvoltage PN bus voltage in main circuit exceeded the allowable value.
  • Page 34
    1. List of Alarms 1.3 Servo spindle Alarms Alarm No. Name Meaning Detector converting An error was detected in the communication with the serial output unit 2: linear scale of the unit MDS-B-HR in a servo system. In a spindle Communication system, an error was detected in the communication with error…
  • Page 35
    1. List of Alarms 1.3 Servo spindle Alarms Alarm No. Details Remedy No servo option is found. Check that all the related parameters are 2304 The SHG control is an optional function. specified correctly. sv057:SHGC sv058:SHGCsp No servo option is found. Check that all the related parameters are 2305 The adaptive filtering is an optional…
  • Page 36
    1. List of Alarms 1.3 Servo spindle Alarms ΔΔΔΔ S51 PARAMETER ERROR Servo : Axis name Axis name Spindle : “S”, “T”, “M”, “N” Alarm No. (parameter No.) Warning appears if a parameter set outside the tolerable range is set. Illegal settings will be ignored.
  • Page 37
    1. List of Alarms 1.3 Servo spindle Alarms Alarm No. Name Meaning Absolute position An error was detected in the revolution counter of the absolute detector: position detector. The absolute position data cannot be Revolution counter compensated. error Battery voltage The battery voltage that is supplied to the absolute position detector drop dropped.
  • Page 38
    1. List of Alarms 1.4 MCP Alarm 1.4 MCP Alarm An error has occurred in the drive unit and other interfaces. (The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen.) Y02 SYSTEM ALARM An error occurred in the data transmitted between the MCP and drive unit after the power was turned ON.
  • Page 39
    1. List of Alarms 1.4 MCP Alarm Y06 mcp_no ERROR There are differences in the MCP and axis parameters when the NC power is turned ON. Error No. Details Remedy There is a skipped number in the channels. Check the values set for the following 0001 parameters.
  • Page 40
    1. List of Alarms 1.4 MCP Alarm Y90 SP. NON SIGNAL Z open B open A open (Alarm No.) Alarm No. phase phase phase × × No.1 spindle × × No.2 spindle × × × × × × × × Alarm No.
  • Page 41
    1. List of Alarms 1.5 System Alarms 1.5 System Alarms The following messages are displayed with the register at the time when the error occurred if the system stops due to a system error. Message Details Remedy Parity error RAM error •…
  • Page 42
    1. List of Alarms 1.5 System Alarms Z31 DATA SERVER ERROR ↑ Warning No. Warning No. Explanation 0001 Socket open error (socket) 0002 Socket bind error (bind) 0003 Connection wait queue error (listen) 0004 Connection request acceptance error (accept) 0005 Data receive error (socket error) 0006 Data receive error (data shortage or disconnection)
  • Page 43
    1. List of Alarms 1.5 System Alarms The bold characters are the messages displayed on the screen. Message Details Remedy This occurs when the parameters • If the same alarm is output by the same EE ROM were not correctly written into the operation, the cause is an H/W fault.
  • Page 44
    1. List of Alarms 1.5 System Alarms Message Details Remedy Acceleration and deceleration time • Increase the value specified as the #1206 TIME G1bF parameter. constants are too large. CONSTANT • Decrease the value specified as the (This alarm is output at the same #1207 G1btL parameter.
  • Page 45
    1. List of Alarms 1.5 System Alarms Note 2: RIO communication interrupt If communication between the control unit and remote I/O unit fails, the alarm and remote I/O unit number are displayed. (a)(b) Board connection remote I/O ↓ ↓ communication interrupted station Z55 RIO NOT CONNECT Remote I/O 1st system communication interrupted station…
  • Page 46
    1. List of Alarms 1.6 Absolute Position Detection System Alarms 1.6 Absolute Position Detection System Alarms Z70 ABS. ILLEGAL This error is displayed if the absolute position data is lost in the absolute position detection system. (Error No.) (Axis name) Alarm reset Zero point when…
  • Page 47
    1. List of Alarms 1.6 Absolute Position Detection System Alarms Z71 DETECTOR ERROR This alarm is displayed if an error is found in (Error No.) (Axis name) the detector for the absolute position detection system. Alarm reset Zero point when Servo Error No.
  • Page 48
    1. List of Alarms 1.6 Absolute Position Detection System Alarms Z72 COMPARE ERROR This alarm is displayed if an error is detected when (Alarm No.) (Axis name) comparing the detector’s absolute position and controller coordinate values in the absolute position system.
  • Page 49
    1. List of Alarms 1.7 Messages During Emergency Stop 1.7 Messages During Emergency Stop EMG EMERGENCY ∗∗∗∗ Error items Refer to the explanations for details. Error No. Details Remedy The user PLC has entered the emergency • Investigate and remove the cause of the stop state during the sequence process.
  • Page 50
    1. List of Alarms 1.7 Messages During Emergency Stop Error No. Details Remedy MELSEC is held in error and reset states. • Check the MELSEC states. LINK The contents of MELSEC-specific code • Check the MELSEC states. area in buffer memory have been destroyed.
  • Page 51
    1. List of Alarms 1.8 Auxiliary Axis Alarms 1.8 Auxiliary Axis Alarms Display example S01 AUX SERVO ALM Axis No. 1 to 4 Alarm information (Follows MR-J2-CT alarm information) (1) S01 AUX SERVO ALM Alarm Details Remedy information PCB error 1 An error occurred in the •…
  • Page 52
    1. List of Alarms 1.8 Auxiliary Axis Alarms (2) S02 AUX SERVO ALM Alarm Details Remedy information PCB error 1 An error occurred in the • Replace servo amplifier. 0011 (drive circuit error) amplifier’s internal PCB. Software An error occurred in the •…
  • Page 53
    1. List of Alarms 1.8 Auxiliary Axis Alarms Alarm Details Remedy information Overvoltage The voltage of the converter in • Wire correctly. 0033 the servo amplifier was 400V or • Replace the servo amplifier. more. • For the internal regenerative resistor, replace the amplifier.
  • Page 54
    1. List of Alarms 1.8 Auxiliary Axis Alarms (4) S52 AUX SERVO WRN Alarm Details Remedy information Battery voltage The absolute position detection • Mount a battery. 0092 drop battery voltage dropped. • Replace the battery and initialize the absolute position. Over-regeneration The regeneration power may •…
  • Page 55
    1. List of Alarms 1.8 Auxiliary Axis Alarms (7) Z73 AUX SYSTEM WRN Alarm Details Cause Remedy information Absolute position Battery voltage drop. • Check the battery and detector 0001 Detector cable wire breakage or cable. The zero point does not memory battery voltage warning looseness.
  • Page 56
    1. List of Alarms 1.8 Auxiliary Axis Alarms (9) M01 AUX OPER. ALM Alarm Details Cause Remedy information No operation mode The operation mode is not • Correctly designate the operation 0101 designated, or the operation mode. mode was changed during axis movement.
  • Page 57
    1. List of Alarms 1.8 Auxiliary Axis Alarms AUXILIARY AXIS MCP ALARMS Y02 AUX SYSTEM ALM An error occurred in the data transmitted between the MCP and auxiliary axis amplifier after the power was turned ON. Error No. Details Remedy Background error The software or hardware may be 0050…
  • Page 58
    1. List of Alarms 1.9 Computer Link Errors 1.9 Computer Link Errors Error Error Message Details Remedy 1) Set a greater timeout value in the Communication ends with timeout. input/output device parameter. DNC ERROR CNC has a 248-byte receive buffer. 2) Recheck the HOST software as to The time during which CNC receives whether or not the HOST transmits…
  • Page 59
    1. List of Alarms 1.10 User PLC Alarms 1.10 User PLC Alarms Sub-status Message Details Remedy The ladder is not a GPPW ladder or Download the ladder of the No PLC PLC4B ladder. format selected with the (Note) Emergency stop (EMG) will PLC environment selection be applied.
  • Page 60
    1. List of Alarms 1.11 Network Service Errors 1.11 Network Service Errors Message Details Remedy N001 • There is an error in the modem • Check the connection between the NC Modem init err connection when the power is turned and modem, connection port and modem power.
  • Page 61
    2. Operation Messages on Setting And Display Unit 2.1 Operation Errors 2. Operation Messages on Setting And Display Unit If a setting operation error occurs on any setting and display unit screen‚ the error No. EOO and a message describing the details of the error will display in the line above the data setting area or the menu display area.
  • Page 62
    2. Operation Messages on Setting And Display Unit 2.1 Operation Errors Error No. Error message Details ∆ • The setting data exceeded the setting range. DATA OVER • The compensation data specification exceeded the range when inputting the tool offset data on tape‚ so that block could not be input.
  • Page 63
    2. Operation Messages on Setting And Display Unit 2.1 Operation Errors Error No. Error message Details × • The PLC timer cannot be set from the screen when the program is valid. (When machine parameter bit selection #6449 bit 1 is set ACCEPTABLE to 1.) •…
  • Page 64
    2. Operation Messages on Setting And Display Unit 2.1 Operation Errors Error No. Error message Details ∆ • The input/output operations were forcibly stopped by reset‚ etc. RESET END (including EMG). × PHYSICAL ERR • The input/output parameter setting or input/output unit side setting was incorrect.
  • Page 65
    2. Operation Messages on Setting And Display Unit 2.1 Operation Errors Error No. Error message Details × • A parity H error was detected during data input‚ etc. PARITY H ERR • Check the paper tape or input device. This error may occur if the paper tape is dirtied with oil‚…
  • Page 66
    2. Operation Messages on Setting And Display Unit 2.1 Operation Errors Error No. Error message Details × • When inputting the tool offset data onto tape‚ an offset type DATA MEMORY exceeding the specifications range was designated‚ and that block could not be input. If the INPUT key is pressed again in the input screen‚…
  • Page 67
    2. Operation Messages on Setting And Display Unit 2.1 Operation Errors Error No. Error message Details × A classification number is displayed after the message for E60. IOP ERR Refer to the section shown in parentheses‚ and remedy the problem. E60 lOP ERROR — 2 (Port already being used) E60 lOP ERROR — 4 (E09 TIME OUT) E60 lOP ERROR — 5 (E08 PHYSICAL ERR)
  • Page 68
    2. Operation Messages on Setting And Display Unit 2.1 Operation Errors Error No. Error message Details ∆ • The «EIA code» data set for I/O parameter is of an unusable I/O PARAM ERR code. • The unusable codes are those used as the EIA standard codes and the even hole codes.
  • Page 69
    2. Operation Messages on Setting And Display Unit 2.1 Operation Errors Error No. Error message Details • The sensor signal was already ON when the tool measurement TLM ILL. SIGNAL mode (TLM) signal was validated. • After the tool measurement mode (TLM) signal was validated, the sensor signal turned ON when there was no axis movement.
  • Page 70
    2. Operation Messages on Setting And Display Unit 2.1 Operation Errors Error No. Error message Details × • When inputting the tool offset data‚ the data format was not INPUT DATA ERR correct‚ so that block could not be input. •…
  • Page 71
    2. Operation Messages on Setting And Display Unit 2.1 Operation Errors Error No. Error message Details × • The analog output unit is not mounted. E201 UNIT NOT EQUIP • Confirm the remote l/O unit. • Prepare a unit having analog output. •…
  • Page 72
    2. Operation Messages on Setting And Display Unit 2.2 Operation Messages 2.2 Operator Messages The following messages indicate the status of the setting and display functions‚ and are not operation errors. They are mainly used to show that operation is normal‚ and serve as guides for the following operations.
  • Page 73
    2. Operation Messages on Setting And Display Unit 2.2 Operation Messages 2.2.2 MDI/Editing Related Message Message details MDI NO SETTING • Only display of MDI data (no execution) • The MDI data setting has been completed (execution is now MDI SETTING COMPLETE possible).
  • Page 74
    2. Operation Messages on Setting And Display Unit 2.2 Operation Messages 2.2.3 Data Input/Output Related Message Message details DATA IN EXECUTION • Data is being read without error from the paper tape. DATA WRITING IN PROGRESS • Data has been entered normally and the input data is being written to the ROM.
  • Page 75
    2. Operation Messages on Setting And Display Unit 2.2 Operation Messages 2.2.4 S-analog Output Adjustment Related Message Message details ADJUST EXECUTION • Analog output adjustment is being executed without error. • Analog output adjustment has completed without error. ADJUST COMPLETE 2.2.5 Auxiliary Axis Message Message details…
  • Page 76
    2. Operation Messages on Setting And Display Unit 2.2 Operation Messages 2.2.7 Others Message Message details DATA PROTECTING • The data protection key is valid‚ and the various data cannot be set or erased‚ etc. • Waiting for the key input of standard parameter setting (Y/N). BASE PARA.
  • Page 77
    3. Program Error 3. Program Error (The bold characters are the message displayed in the screen.) These alarms occur during automatic operation‚ and the causes of these alarms are mainly program errors which occur‚ for instance‚ when mistakes have been made in the preparation of the machining programs or when programs which conform to the specification have not been prepared.
  • Page 78
    3. Program Error Error No. Details Remedy P 34 G-CODE ERROR • Check and correct the G code address in the A G code not listed in the specifications program. has been used. An illegal G code was commanded during the coordinate rotation command (G68).
  • Page 79
    3. Program Error Error No. Details Remedy P 70 ARC ERROR • Check the numerical values of the addresses • There is an error in the arc start and end that specify the start and end points, arc points as well as in the arc center. center as well as the radius in the program.
  • Page 80
    3. Program Error Error No. Details Remedy P112 PLANE CHG (CC) • Issue the plane selection command after the • A plane selection command (G17‚ G18‚ tool radius compensation command or nose G19) has been issued when the tool R compensation command has been radius compensation command (G41‚…
  • Page 81
    3. Program Error Error No. Details Remedy P134 G96 Clamp Err. Press the reset key and carry out the remedy The constant surface speed control below. command (G96) was issued without • Check the program. commanding the spindle speed clamp •…
  • Page 82
    3. Program Error Error No. Details Remedy P155 F-CYC ERR (CC) • The radius compensation mode is A fixed cycle command has been issued established when a fixed cycle command is in the radius compensation mode. executed and so the radius compensation cancel command (G40) should be issued.
  • Page 83
    3. Program Error Error No. Details Remedy P178 LIFE DATA OVER • Review the No. of registrations. The The No. of registration groups‚ total No. maximum No. of registrations is shown of registered tools or the No. of below. registrations per group exceeded the System System 1 System 2…
  • Page 84
    3. Program Error Error No. Details Remedy P184 NO PTC/THD CMD • Check the pitch or the number of threads per The pitch or the number of threads per inch. inch is illegal in the tap cycle of the hole drilling fixed cycle command.
  • Page 85
    3. Program Error Error No. Details Remedy • Check the specification. P210 NO PAT CYC SPC • A fixed cycle for compound lathe II (G74 to G76) command was input although it was undefined in the specification. • In 1-part system, 2-part system synchronous thread cutting command was issued.
  • Page 86
    3. Program Error Error No. Details Remedy • Correct the program. P243 VARIABLE ERR. An invalid variable has been specified in the left or right side of an operation expression. P252 PAT.&COOD-ROT • Reconsider the program. A coordinate rotation related command (G68, G69) was issued during figure rotation.
  • Page 87
    3. Program Error Error No. Details Remedy P283 DIVIDE BY ZERO • Reconsider the program and correct it so that The denominator of the division is zero. the denominator for division in the formula is not zero. • Reconsider the program. P290 IF SNT.
  • Page 88
    3. Program Error Error No. Details Remedy • Check the specifications. P370 NO OPOS MR SPC The facing turret mirror image specifications are not provided. • Check the program. P371 MIRR ILLEGAL Facing turret mirror image was • Check the parameters. commanded to an axis for which external mirror image or parameter mirror image is valid.
  • Page 89
    3. Program Error Error No. Details Remedy P393 INC ERR (GEOMT) • Specify this block by an absolute value. The second geometric block was specified by an incremental value. P394 NO G01 (GEOMT) • Specify the G01 command. The second geometric block contains no linear command.
  • Page 90
    3. Program Error Error No. Details Remedy P435 G27/M ERROR • An M code command cannot be issued in a An M command was issued G27 command block and so the G27 simultaneously in the G27 command command and M code command must be block.
  • Page 91
    3. Program Error Error No. Details Remedy • Check the machining program, parameters P482 MILL ILL. AXIS • A rotary axis was commanded during the and PLC I/F signal. milling mode. • Milling was executed even though an illegal value was set for the milling axis •…
  • Page 92
    3. Program Error Error No. Details Remedy P485 MILL ILL. MODAL • Check the program. • The milling mode was turned ON during • Before issuing G12.1, issue G40 or G97. nose R compensation or constant surface • Before issuing G12.1, issue a T command. speed control.
  • Page 93
    3. Program Error Error No. Details Remedy P511 SYNC CODE ERR • Check the program. • Two or more synchronization M codes were commanded in the same block. • The synchronization M code and «!» code were commanded in the same block. •…
  • Page 94
    3. Program Error Error No. Details Remedy P610 ILLEGAL PARA. • Check whether #1549 Iv0vR1 to #1553 • The parameter setting is not correct. Iv0vR5 are set in descending order (in order • G114.1 was commanded when the of large values). spindle synchronization with PLC I/F •…
  • Page 95
    II EXPLANATION OF PARAMETERS…
  • Page 97
    1. Screen Configuration 1.1 Screen Transition Charts 1. Screen Configuration 1.1 Screen Transition Charts When the function selection key is pressed‚ the following menu appears: MENU TOOL menu is displayed after the power is turned on. To display PARAM menu‚ use menu key on the TOOL screen.
  • Page 98
    1. Screen Configuration 1.1 Screen Transition Charts Press the menu key to display the setup selection screen. SETUP If the setup parameter menu opening option is specified in this screen, the setup parameters can be set up and displayed. Parameter menu display (No.1 to 4) Setup MENU Process…
  • Page 99
    2. Machining Parameters 2.1 Process Parameters 2. Machining Parameters 2.1 Process Parameters <WRK COUNT> (No. of workpieces machined) Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8001 WRK COUNT M Set the M code that counts the No. of workpiece 0 to 99 repeated machining.
  • Page 100
    2. Machining Parameters 2.1 Process Parameters <FIXED C.> (Fixed cycle) Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8012 G73 n Set the return amount for G73 (step cycle). 0 to 99999.999 (mm) (For M system only) 8013 G83 n Set the return amount for G83 (deep hole drilling 0 to 99999.999 (mm) cycle).
  • Page 101
    2. Machining Parameters 2.1 Process Parameters <PRECISION> (High precision control) Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8019 R COMP Set up a compensation coefficient for reducing a 0 to 99 (%) control error in the reduction of a corner roundness and arch radius. Indicates a maximum control error (mm) in parentheses.
  • Page 102
    2. Machining Parameters 2.1 Process Parameters <PRECISION> (High precision control) Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8025 SPLINE ON Specify whether to enable the spline function. (for M system only) 0: Disable the spline function. 1: Enable the spline function. 8026 CANCEL ANG. When the angle made by blocks exceeds the set 0 to 180 (°) (for M system only)
  • Page 103
    2. Machining Parameters 2.1 Process Parameters <C axis normal line> Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8041 C-rot.R This is valid with normal line control type II. 0.000 to 99999.999 Set the length from the center of the normal line (mm) control axis to the end of the tool.
  • Page 104
    2. Machining Parameters 2.1 Process Parameters < Scale factor> Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8072 SCALING P Set the scale factor for reduction or magnification 0 to 99.999999 (for M system only) for the machining program for which the G50 or G51 command is issued.
  • Page 105
    2. Machining Parameters 2.1 Process Parameters <Deep hole drilling cycle> Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8083 G83S modeM Set the M command code for changing to the small 1 to 99999999 (for M system only) diameter deep hole drilling cycle mode. 8084 G83S Clearanse Set the clearance amount for the G83 small 0 to 999.999 (mm)
  • Page 106
    2. Machining Parameters 2.2 Control Parameters 2.2 Control Parameters Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8101 MACRO SINGLE Select the control of the blocks where the user macro command continues. 0: Do not stop while macro block continues. 1: Stop every block during signal block operation.
  • Page 107
    2. Machining Parameters 2.2 Control Parameters Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8109 HOST LINK Specify whether to enable computer link B instead of the RS-232C port. 0: Disable computer link B to enable normal RS-232C communication. 1: Enable computer link B to disable normal RS-232C communication.
  • Page 108
    2. Machining Parameters 2.3 Axis Parameters 2.3 Axis Parameters Set up the parameter required for each axis. Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8201 AX. RELEASE Select the function to remove the control axis from the control target. 0: Control as normal. 1: Remove from control target.
  • Page 109
    2. Machining Parameters 2.3 Axis Parameters Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8210 OT INSIDE The stored stoke limit function to be set in #8204 and #8205 prevents the machine from moving to the inside or outside of the specified range. 0: Inhibits outside area (select stored stroke limit II.) 1: Inhibits inside area…
  • Page 110
    2. Machining Parameters 2.4 Barrier Data 2.4 Barrier Data Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8300 P0 Set the reference X-coordinates of the chuck and ±99999.999 (mm) (For L system only) the tail stock barrier. Set the center coordinate (Radius value) of workpiece by the basic machine coordinate system.
  • Page 111
    2. Machining Parameters 2.4 Barrier Data Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8317 DELIV. AX. NAME When the right chuck and tailstock barrier is A/B/.. (For L system only) movable, set the name of the delivery axis. (axis address) When using the 2-system method and the delivery 1A/1B/..
  • Page 112
    2. Machining Parameters 2.5 Tool Measurement Parameters 2.5 Tool Measurement Parameters Set up the parameter of the tool (touch tool sensor), etc, used for measurement. Item Contents Setup range (unit) 8701 Tool length Set the length to the end of the touch tool. ±99999.999 (mm) 8702 Tool Dia Set the spherical diameter of the touch tool end.
  • Page 113
    3. I/O Parameters 3.1 Base Parameters 3. I/O Parameters Pressing the menu key displays the I/O BASE PARAM screen. PARA There are basically two types of input/output parameters which must be set when inputting‚ outputting or referring to data‚ or when performing tape operation. One type is the parameters related to the input/output device.
  • Page 114
    3. I/O Parameters 3.2 I/O Device Parameters 3.2 I/O Device Parameters Parameters for up to five types of input/output devices can be set in DEV <0> to <4>. Item Contents Setup range (unit) 9101 DEVICE NAME Set the device name corresponding to the device Use alphabet characters‚…
  • Page 115
    3. I/O Parameters 3.2 I/O Device Parameters Item Contents Setup range (unit) 9113 EIA OUTPUT In data output mode, select the ISO or EIA code for 0: ISO code output data output. 1: EIA code output In data input mode, the ISO and EIA codes are identified automatically.
  • Page 116
    3. I/O Parameters 3.3 Computer Link Parameters 3.3 Computer Link Parameters Item Contents Setup range (unit) 9601 BAUD RATE Specify the rate at which data is transferred. 0: 19200 (bps) 1: 9600 2: 4800 3: 2400 4: 1200 8: 38400 9602 STOP BIT Specify stop bit length used in start-stop mode.
  • Page 117
    3. I/O Parameters 3.3 Computer Link Parameters Item Contents Setup range (unit) 9609 LINK PARAM. 1 Bit 1: DC1 output after NAK or SYN 0: Don’t output the Specify whether to output the DC1 code after the DC1 code. NAK or SYN code is output. 1: Output the DC1 code.
  • Page 118
    4. Setup Parameters 4. Setup Parameters SETUP Pressing the menu key displays the OPEN SETUP PARAM screen. The system’s basic parameters are normally hidden as setup parameters to prevent mistaken operations and to simplify the display. The setup parameters can be displayed and set by making a declaration to open the setup parameters on this screen.
  • Page 119
    5. Base Specifications Parameters 5. Base Specifications Parameters After setting up the parameter (PR) listed in the table, turn OFF the NC power. To validate the parameter, turn ON the power again. (SETUP PARAM 1. 1/15) Items Details Setting range (unit) 1001 SYS_ON System…
  • Page 120
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1016 iout Inch output Specify whether the machine system (ball screw 0: Metric unit (PR) pitch‚ position detection unit) is an inch unit system system or metric unit system. 1: Inch unit system 1017 Rotational Specify whether the axis is a rotary axis or linear…
  • Page 121
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1023 crsadr Command Set the address for issuing a command to this axis A to Z (PR) address during cross machining control. (Setting is cleared during cross when 0 is set) machining 1024 crsinc…
  • Page 122
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1037 cmdtyp Command Specify the program G code series and 1 to 8 type compensation type. cmdtyp G code series Compensation type System 1 (for M) Type A (one compensation amount for one compen- sation number) System 2 (for M) Type B (shape and wear…
  • Page 123
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1043 lang Select Specify the display language. 0 to 3 language 11 to 22 displayed 0: Japanese display (Standard) 1: English display (Standard) 2: Third language displayed (Note) (Option) 3: Fourth language displayed (Note) (Option) 11: Display in German (Option) 12: Display in French…
  • Page 124
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Tool compensation amount (Tool length compensation amount‚ tool wear compensation amount and tool tip compensation amount) Workpiece coordinate offset #8004 SPEED #8027 Toler-1 #8056 G74 RETRACT #8005 ZONE r #8028 Toler-2 #8057 G76 LAST-D #8006 ZONE d #8029 FairingL #8075 SpiralEndErr #8009 DSC.
  • Page 125
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1050 MemPrg Definition of 0 to 3 (PR) program save Setting area Machining program MDI data (Machining program) : System common Machining program save area is shared by systems. : System independent Machining programs can be registered for each system.
  • Page 126
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1060 SETUP Activate Execute the functions required for initializing the setup system. processing 1: Execute one-touch setup #(1060) Data( 1)( INPUT «BASE PARA. SET? (Y/N)» is displayed. To initialize the parameters. To retain the current parameters.
  • Page 127
    5. Base Specifications Parameters (SETUP PARAM 1. 3/15) Items Details Setting range (unit) 1061 intabs Manual Defines whether to update the absolute value data 0: Do not update (PR) during automatic handle interrupt. (shift coordinates updating This parameter is valid only when #1145 l_abs is set the amount of the to 1.
  • Page 128
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1065 JOG_H Set up an improved JOG response type. 0 to 4 response 0: Conventional specification type The system is started and stopped by signal via ladder without reference to external input signals.
  • Page 129
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1069 no_dsp Axis with no Set up an axis that displays no counter. This option is 0: Displays the (PR) counter valid on the counter display screen (relative value counter display screen).
  • Page 130
    5. Base Specifications Parameters (SETUP PARAM 1. 4/15) Items Details Setting range (unit) 1073 I_Absm Initial Specify the absolute value/incremental value 0: Incremental value absolute mode for when the power is turned ON or reset. command mode value 1: Absolute value command mode 1074 l_Sync Initial…
  • Page 131
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1081 Gmac_P Give priority Specify the G code priority relationship during the to G code macro call with the G command. parameter 0: G code used in system is priority. 1: Registered G code for call out is priority. 1082 Geomet Geometric Specify whether to use the geometric I or IB…
  • Page 132
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1090 Lin_RT Linear rotary Specify how to handle a command for the rotary axis axis that exceeds 360°. 0: For absolute value commands that exceed 360°‚ the value will be converted into a remainder of 360°…
  • Page 133
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1095 T0tfof TF output Select how to handle TF for T00 command. 0: TF is output. 1: TF is not output 1096 T_Ltyp Tool life Specify the tool life management type. 1: Life management (for L management…
  • Page 134
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1100 Tmove Tool wear Specify the period to perform tool length offset and 0 to 2 compen- wear compensation. sation 0: Compensate when T command is executed. 1: Superimpose and compensate with the movement command in the block where the T command is located.
  • Page 135
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1105 T_Sel2 Tool selection Select the tool selection method for when #1103 method 2 T_Life is set to 1. 0: Select in order of registered No. from the tools used in the same group. 1: Select the tool with the longest remaining life from tools used in the same group and the unused tools.
  • Page 136
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1114 mcrint Macro Select whether to clear statements other than 0/1/2 argument specified arguments by macro call. Also, select initialization whether to clear local variables by power-ON and resetting. 0: Delete non-specified arguments by macro call.
  • Page 137
    5. Base Specifications Parameters (SETUP PARAM 1. 5/15) Items Details Setting range (unit) 1121 edlk_c Edit lock C Specify whether to prohibit editing of program Nos. 0: Editing possible 9000 to 9999. 1: Editing prohibited Note: If #1122 is set to 1 or 2, 1 will be set in #1121 when the power is turned ON.
  • Page 138
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1128 RstVCI Clear Specify how to handle the common variables when variables by resetting. resetting 0: Common variables do not change after resetting. 1: The following common variables are cleared by resetting: During variable 100 group specifications: #100 to #149 are cleared.
  • Page 139
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1133 ofsmem Select how to Select the number stored by previous setup when set up tool selecting the tool wear compensation screen. wear 0: Does not display the number when selecting compensa- the screen.
  • Page 140
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1139 edtype Edit type Set up an edit type. 0/1/2/3/4 selection 0: Screen edit type (M50 or equivalent operation) 1: Screen edit type (The screen of EDIT or MDI is changed automatically according to the selected operation mode.) 2: Word edit type (The screen of EDIT or MDI is changed automatically according to the selected…
  • Page 141
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1148 I_G611 Initial high The modal state when the power is turned ON is set to precision the high accuracy control mode. 0: OFF 1: ON 1149 cireft Specify whether to enable deceleration at the arc deceleration entrance or exit.
  • Page 142
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1154 pdoor Door interlock Specify whether to control door interlock II (PR) II (for each independently for each of the two systems. When door system) interlock II is controlled for each system of the two systems, system 1 is connected to SV1 (channel 1) of the base I/O unit and system 2 is connected to SV2 (channel 2) of the base I/O unit.
  • Page 143
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1155 DOOR_m Signal input Set up a fixed device number (X??) for door interlock 000 to 100 device 1 for II signal input. (Hexadecimal) door A device number from X01 to XFF can be set up. interlock II Device number 000 is invalid.
  • Page 144
    5. Base Specifications Parameters (SETUP PARAM 1. 6/15) Items Details Setting range (unit) 1169 system System name Set the name of each system. A max. of four name This must be set only when using two systems. alphabetic characters This name is displayed on the screen only when the or numerals.
  • Page 145
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1181 G96_ax Constant Specify the axis to be targeted for constant surface 0 to 8 surface speed control. speed 0: Program specification will be invalidated‚ and control the axis will always be fixed to the 1st axis. 1: 1st axis specification 2: 2nd axis specification 3: 3rd axis specification…
  • Page 146
    5. Base Specifications Parameters (SETUP PARAM 1. 7/15) Items Details Setting range (unit) 1193 inpos The setting is selected with «#1306 InpsTyp Deceleration check specification type». 0: Deceleration check method 1 1: Validate in-position check Deceleration Specify the deceleration check method for G0. check method 0: Command deceleration check 1: In-position check…
  • Page 147
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1201 G1_acc Validate Set up acceleration and deceleration types when a 0: Acceleration and acceleration liner interpolation command is issued. deceleration with (PR) 0: Acceleration and deceleration (conventional) time constant deceleration with time constant 1: Acceleration and with inclination…
  • Page 148
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1209 cirdcc Specify the deceleration speed at the arc entrance or 1 to 999999 (mm/min) decelerati exit. on speed 1210 RstGmd Modal G Specify whether to initialize each G code group modal Specify a hexadecimal code reset and the H and D codes when the system is reset.
  • Page 149
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) (Continued from the previous page) Specify a hexadecimal L system number. Group 1 Move G modal Group 2 Flat selection modal Group 3 Absolute/increment command modal Group 4 Barrier check modal Group 5 Feed G modal Group 6 Inch/metric modal Group 7 Nose R compensation modal…
  • Page 150
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1214 macaxy Side 2 of Specify the length of the actual base axis ±9999.999 (For L inclination corresponding to the inclined axis in the triangle system angle made up of the inclination angle. only) 1215 macaxx Side 3 of…
  • Page 151
    5. Base Specifications Parameters (SETUP PARAM 1. 8/15) Items Details Setting range (unit) 1217 aux01 Not used 1218 aux02 Parameter Specify a parameter input/output format. (bit3) input/output 0: Type I format 1: Type II (related to #1218 aux02/bit5) aux02 Tool number Specify the R register that contains the tool number (bit4) selection…
  • Page 152
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1220 aux04 Tool life check Specify the life check standard applicable when the (bit 0) timing use count is incremented in tool life management II. (For L selection 0: Determine that the tool life is over when the (Default: 0) system incremented use count exceeds the life count.
  • Page 153
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1221 aux05 Current value B Select the type of counter to be displayed on the (bit7) valid POSITION screen. 0: Displays a relative value (value that includes tool length offset amount, tool radius compensation amount and workpiece coordinate offset amount) 1: Displays current value B (value that does not…
  • Page 154
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) aux06 Servo Specify whether to enable the waveform display (bit2) waveform function. (Applicable only to M64 D version series) display 0: Disable the waveform display function. 1: Enable the waveform display function. aux06 Enable/disable Specify whether to enable the setup parameter lock…
  • Page 155
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 0: Disable the synchronous tap I-point → R-point aux07 Synchronous (bit2) tap R-point in-position check. 1: Enable the synchronous tap I-point → R-point in-position check in-position check. (Applicable only to M64 D version series) Note: This parameter is valid only when 1 (in-position check is valid) is set in bit 3 of #1223 aux07 (synchronous tap in-position check…
  • Page 156
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1225 aux09 PLC Interface Set this to change to the PLC Interface Diagnosis (bit0) Diagnosis screen. screen 0: 40-character compatible screen changeover 1: 80-character compatible screen aux09 Enable/disable Specify whether to enable spindle rotation speed (bit7) spindle clamp by the spindle rotation speed clamp command…
  • Page 157
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) aux10 Arbitrary Specify whether to enable the arbitrary allocation (bit5) allocation of parameter for the origin dog and H/W OT. dog signal 0: Disable arbitrary allocation. (Fixed device) 1: Enable arbitrary allocation. (Device specified by the parameter) aux10 Setup and…
  • Page 158
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) aux11 Measures Select a condition where a relieving operation (bit2) against tool completes after measurement with tools. setter chattering 0: Sensor signals has stopped for 500 ms or longer. 1: 100 μs or longer has passed after sensor signals stopped.
  • Page 159
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) aux11 Switch the set up the range of tool life data to be input or compared. (bit7) range of tool life 0: Inputs or compares all of the data output. data to be input 1: Inputs or compares part of the data output (For M system 1) Tool life management I data to be input or…
  • Page 160
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) aux12 Protection with Set up this option to protect a manual value (bit7) manual value command. command 0: Does not protect the manual value command (same as before). 1: Protects the manual value command. 1229 set01 Subprogram 0: Specifies the user macro interrupt of macro…
  • Page 161
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) set01 Grid display Select a grid type to be displayed on the servo monitor screen during dog type reference point (bit6) selection return. 0: Selects the distance between dog OFF and zero point (including a grid mask amount).
  • Page 162
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1232 set04 Switch load Select whether to detect the load with the load monitor’s load detection, excluding during (bit0) monitor acceleration/ deceleration. 0: Detect also during acceleration/deceleration. (Conventional) 1: Do not detect during acceleration/deceleration.
  • Page 163
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1237 set09 External Set up this function to use the external workpiece (PR) (bit0) workpiece offset coordinates by shifting them to the Z axis. 0: Does not reverse the sign of external workpiece offsets (Z shift) (same as before).
  • Page 164
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1238 set10 Switch G36 If a G code system containing the G36 (automatic (PR) (bit0) function tool length measurement X) function is selected, select whether to use G36 for the automatic tool length measurement or arc thread cutting (CCW) function.
  • Page 165
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) set11 Door interlock Select whether to validate the spindle clamp speed (bit5) spindle speed changeover function by the PLC signal. clamp valid 0: Invalid 1: Valid set11 External Designate the method for setting the external (bit6) deceleration deceleration speed.
  • Page 166
    5. Base Specifications Parameters (SETUP PARAM 1. 9/15) Items Details Setting range (unit) 1265 ext01 Command Select the command format for the fixed cycle for (PR) (bit0) format 1 compound lathe. 0: Conventional format 1: MELDAS special format (1 block command method) ext01 Command Select the command format for the lathe fixed cycle.
  • Page 167
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) ext07 Address Specify the address that specifies the fixed cycle (bit1) specifying fixed repetition count. (Applicable only to M65 and M66) (Default: 0) cycle repetition 0: Address L only count (For M 1: Addresses K and L system only) If addresses K and L are specified simultaneously,…
  • Page 168
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) ext07 Nose R Specify whether to apply nose R compensation to (bit6) compensation shapes in a rough cutting cycle. (Default: 0) (For L system 0: Conventional specifications only) If nose R compensation is enabled for the final shaping program, the shape obtained after applying nose R compensation to the final shaping program is used as the rough…
  • Page 169
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) ext08 Tap cycle Select the tap cycle. (bit4) selection 0: Pecking tap cycle 1: Deep hole tap cycle ext08 Deep hole tap Select whether to validate override on the pulling (bit5) cycle override operation during synchronized tapping with the selection…
  • Page 170
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1274 ext10 Word range Select whether to check that the operation (PR) (bit7) check expression of the word date in the program is enclosed in brackets ( [ ] ) when the machine program is executed.
  • Page 171
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1280 ext16 I/F per axis Set the handling of the following PLC I/F for axes (PR) (bit0) during cross interchanged with cross machining control. • Mirror image machining • Manual/automatic interlock control •…
  • Page 172
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1280 ext16 Cross Select whether to cancel the cross machining (PR) (bit1) machining control when reset is applied. control cancel 0: Cancel cross machining control with reset. with reset 1: Do not cancel cross machining control with reset ext16 Interchange…
  • Page 173
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1281 ext17 Zero point (Zero point setting operation) (PR) (bit0) return The «Operation error 1036» will occur regardless of operation this parameter, and regardless of manual or changeover automatic operation. parameter (High-speed zero point return) 0: <During manual operation>…
  • Page 174
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1285 ext21 Multi-system 0: When a machining program is newly (PR) (bit0) program registered, it is registered as a program for generation and the selected system. operation 1: When a program is newly registered, a system common program No.
  • Page 175
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) ext23 Counter display 0: Display the command value that does not (bit3) expanded consider the tool length offset amount or function workpiece coordinate offset amount. selection 1: The counter display expanded function is validated.
  • Page 176
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) ext23 Absolute (M system) (bit7) coordinate 0: Display the actual position including tool display radius compensation. [Special display 1: Display the machining position in terms of a unit compatible] program command excluding tool radius compensation.
  • Page 177
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1299 ext35 Not used. (PR) 1300 ext36 Multiple spindle Select multiple spindle control I or II. (PR) (bit0) control II 0: Multiple spindle control I 1: Multiple spindle control II (select from ladder) ext36 Spindle Select the spindle synchronization command…
  • Page 178
    5. Base Specifications Parameters (SETUP PARAM 1. 10/15) Items Details Setting range (unit) 1301 nrfchk Origin Select the high-speed check method of the origin 0 to 2 neighboring neighboring signal. check method 0: Do not check positions near the origin at high speeds.
  • Page 179
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1311 WtMmax Maximum Set the maximum value for the M code. When «0» is 0, 100 to 99999999 value for set, the synchronization M code will be invalid. synchroniza- tion M code 1312 T_base Tool life When the T code command is issued while…
  • Page 180
    5. Base Specifications Parameters (SETUP PARAM 1. 11/15) Items Details Setting range (unit) 1501 polyax Rotational Specify the number of the rotational tool axis (servo 0 to controlled axis (For L tool axis axis) used for polygon machining (G51.2). Set 0 number system number…
  • Page 181
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1512 DOORPs Signal input Specify the fixed device number (X??) for door 000 to 100 device 2 for interlock II signal input for each system. (hexadecimal) door interlock (Specify the same value as that of #1155.) II: for each Related parameter: #1154 pdoor (Door interlock II for system…
  • Page 182
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1522 C_axis Normal line Set the number of the axis for normal line control. 0: Normal line control (PR) control axis Designate a rotary axis. disabled 1 to 6: Axis No. (number of control axes) 1523 C_feed…
  • Page 183
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1534 SnG44.1 Spindle No. for Set the selected spindle No. for the G44.1 0: 2nd spindle G44.1 command. 1: 1st spindle command 2: 2nd spindle 3: 3rd spindle #1199 #1534 Selected spindle 4: 4th spindle 0:G43.1 Not used.
  • Page 184
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1555 Iv0rd3 Involute Set the override value at the curvature radius Iv0vR3 1 to 100 (%) interpolation for executing involute interpolation with the override 3 high-speed high-accuracy II mode. Note: If the override value is not set (setting value: 0), the setting will be invalid, and the override will be 100%.
  • Page 185
    5. Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 1572 Cirorp Arc command Fluctuation of the speed at the arc and linear or arc and arc joints will be eliminated during the overlap high-speed high-accuracy II mode. 0: Do not overlap arc command blocks. 1: Overlap arc command blocks.
  • Page 186
    5. Base Specifications Parameters (SETUP PARAM 1. 14/15) Items Details Setting range (unit) 1901 station addr Set up a station address number (the NC is the n-th 1 to 7 (PR) slave station). 1902 Din size Set up the size of the data to be transferred from the 0 to 32 (PR) PC to the NC (from the master station to the slave…
  • Page 187
    5. Base Specifications Parameters (SETUP PARAM 1. 15/15) Items Details Setting range (unit) 1925 EtherNet Start of service Start or stop the Ethernet communication function. 0: Stop 1: Start 1926 IP IP address Specify the NC IP address Set these parameters address in accordance with the network rules in the…
  • Page 188
    6. Axis Specifications Parameters 6.1 Axis Specifications Parameters 6. Axis Specifications Parameters 6.1 Axis Specifications Parameters After setting up the parameter (PR) listed in the table, turn OFF the NC power. To validate the parameter, turn ON the power again. (SETUP PARAM 2.
  • Page 189
    6. Axis Specifications Parameters 6.1 Axis Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) (Continued from the previous page) <Combination of acceleration and deceleration patterns and bit patterns> Rapid traverse R3(bit3) -(bit2) R1(bit1) LR(bit0) Cutting feed C3(bit7) -(bit6) C1(bit5) LC(bit4) Step Linear acceleration/ deceleration…
  • Page 190
    6. Axis Specifications Parameters 6.1 Axis Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 2004 G0tL G0 time constant Set up a linear control time constant for rapid traverse 1 to 4000 (ms) (linear) acceleration and deceleration. The time constant is validated when LR (rapid traverse feed with linear acceleration or deceleration) or F (acceleration or deceleration by software) is selected in acceleration or deceleration mode «#2003…
  • Page 191
    6. Axis Specifications Parameters 6.1 Axis Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 2007 G1tL G1 time Set up a linear control time constant for cutting 1 to 4000 (ms) constant acceleration and deceleration. (linear) The time constant is validated when LC (cutting feed with linear acceleration and deceleration) or F (acceleration and deceleration by software) is selected in acceleration or deceleration mode «#2003…
  • Page 192
    6. Axis Specifications Parameters 6.1 Axis Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 2010 fwd_g Feed Set up a feed forward gain for pre-interpolation 0 to 100 (%) forward acceleration and deceleration. gain The larger the set value, the smaller the theoretical control error will be.
  • Page 193
    6. Axis Specifications Parameters 6.1 Axis Specifications Parameters (SETUP PARAM 2. 2/8) Items Details Setting range (unit) 2013 0T — Soft limit I — Set up a soft limit area with reference to the zero point ±99999.999 (mm) 2014 0T + soft limit I + of the basic mechanical coordinates.
  • Page 194
    6. Axis Specifications Parameters 6.1 Axis Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 2019 revnum Return steps Set up the steps required for reference point return 0 to max. number of for each axis. NC axes 0: Does not execute reference point return. 1 to max.
  • Page 195
    6. Axis Specifications Parameters 6.2 Zero Point Return Parameters 6.2 Zero Point Return Parameters After setting up the parameter (PR) listed in the table, turn OFF the NC power. To validate the parameter, turn ON the power again. (SETUP PARAM 2. 3/8) Items Details Setting range (unit)
  • Page 196
    6. Axis Specifications Parameters 6.2 Zero Point Return Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 2030 dir (-) Reference Set which side of the near-point dog the reference 0: Positive direction (PR) point direction point is at during reference point return. 1: Negative direction <For dog type reference point return>…
  • Page 197
    6. Axis Specifications Parameters 6.2 Zero Point Return Parameters (SETUP PARAM 2. 4/8) Items Details Setting range (unit) 2037 G53ofs Reference Set up the position of the first, second, third, and fourth ±999999.999 (mm) 2038 point #1 to #4 reference points from the zero point of the basic #2_rfp 2039 mechanical coordinates.
  • Page 198
    6. Axis Specifications Parameters 6.3 Absolute Position Parameters 6.3 Absolute Position Parameters (SETUP PARAM 2. 5/8) Items Details Setting range (unit) 2049 type Absolute Specify the absolute position zero point alignment 0 to 9 (PR) position method. detection 0: Not absolute position detection method 1: Stopper method (push with mechanical stopper) 2: Origin point alignment method (align with…
  • Page 199
    6. Axis Specifications Parameters 6.3 Absolute Position Parameters Items Details Setting range (unit) 2057 nrefp Near zero Set the width where the near-reference-point signal is 0 to 32.767 (mm) point + output. (Positive direction width) When set to 0‚ the width is equivalent to the grid width setting.
  • Page 200
    6. Axis Specifications Parameters 6.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2 6.4 Axis Specification Parameters 2 (SETUP PARAM 2. 6/8) Items Details Setting range (unit) ±99999.999 (mm) 2061 OT_1B- Soft limit IB- Set up the coordinates of the lower limit of the inhibited area of stored stroke limit IB.
  • Page 201
    6. Axis Specifications Parameters 6.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2 Items Details Setting range (unit) 2066 rapid3 Speed 3 Specify the speed applicable to the speed area for 0 to 999999 2-stage or 3-stage acceleration/deceleration. If the (mm/min) following conditions are not satisfied, inclination 0: No setting constant acceleration/deceleration is used for operation.
  • Page 202
    6. Axis Specifications Parameters 6.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2 Items Details Setting range (unit) 2071 s_axis Inclined axis Select the axis subjected to inclined-axis control or the 0 to 2 (For L selection base axis corresponding to the inclined axis. system 0: Axis not subjected to inclined-axis control only)
  • Page 203
    6. Axis Specifications Parameters 6.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2 (SETUP PARAM 2. 7/8) Items Details Setting range (unit) 2073 zrn_dog Origin dog Under the standard specifications, the origin dog signal 00 to FF (HEX) is assigned to a fixed device. When it is desired to assign the origin dog signal to a position other than the fixed device, specify the input device in this parameter.
  • Page 204
    6. Axis Specifications Parameters 6.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2 Items Details Setting range (unit) 2076 index_x Index table Specify the index table indexing axis. indexing 0: Normal axis axis 1: Index table indexing axis Note: This parameter is valid only for the NC axis. The parameter is invalid if specified for the PLC axis.
  • Page 205
    6. Axis Specifications Parameters 6.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2 Items Details Setting range (unit) 2083 rot_2 Linear type The linear type rotary axis II is validated. rotary axis II 0: Invalidate linear type rotary axis II. 1: Validate linear type rotary axis II. Note that this is valid only when the power is turned ON, and the rotary axis parameters must be validated.
  • Page 206
    6. Axis Specifications Parameters 6.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2 (SETUP PARAM 2. 8/8) Items Details Setting range (unit) 2086 exdcax External Set the upper limit of the feedrate for each axis when 1 to 999999 (mm/min) deceleration the external deceleration signal is valid. speed This parameter is valid when the #1239 set11/bit6 external deceleration axis compliance valid is set to…
  • Page 207
    6. Axis Specifications Parameters 6.4 Axis Specifications Parameters 2 Items Details Setting range (unit) 2095 plG1t1 G1 time Set the G1 time constant (primary delay) for 1 to 5000 (ms) constant for superimposition control. superimposi- (Equivalent to #2008 G1t1 (G1 time constant (primary tion control delay).) (primary…
  • Page 208
    7. Servo Parameters 7. Servo Parameters The parameters can be changed from any screen. The valid servo parameters will differ according to the motor type. The setting values and meanings may also differ. Follow the correspondence table given below, and set the correct parameters. Refer to each Instruction Manual or the following manuals for details on each motor.
  • Page 209
    7. Servo Parameters Corresponding model MDS-C1-Vx MDS-C1-Vx Parameter MDS-B-SVJ2 (High-gain) (Standard) (MDS-B-Vx4) (MDS-B-Vx) Servo function selection 2 SV033 Servo function selection 3 SV034 Servo function selection 4 SV035 Regenerative resistor type SV036 Load inertia scale SV037 Notch filter frequency 1 SV038 Lost motion compensation timing SV039…
  • Page 210
    7. Servo Parameters 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 (1) Details for servo parameters For parameters marked with a (PR) in the table, turn the NC power OFF after setting. After the power is turned ON again, the parameter is validated. CAUTION In the explanation on bits, set all bits not used, including blank bits, to “0”.
  • Page 211
    7. Servo Parameters 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Items Details Setting range 2209 SV009 Current loop q Set the gain of current loop. 1 to 20480 axis lead As this setting is determined by the motor’s electrical compensation characteristics, the setting is fixed for each type of motor.
  • Page 212
    7. Servo Parameters 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Items Details Setting range 2216 SV016 Lost motion Set this when the protrusion (that occurs due to the LMC1 compensation non-sensitive band by friction, torsion, backlash, etc) at quadrant change is too large. This compensates the torque at quadrant change. This is valid only when the lost motion compensation (SV027 (SSF1/lmc)) is selected.
  • Page 213
    7. Servo Parameters 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Items Details Setting range 2217 SV017 Servo (PR) SPEC specification selection vdir Meaning when «0» is set Meaning when «1» is set Deceleration control stop Dynamic brake stop (SVJ2 standard) mc Contactor control output invalid Contactor control output valid HA053N to HA33N motor HA053N to HA33N motor vdir…
  • Page 214
    7. Servo Parameters 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Items Details Setting range 2223 SV023 Excessive Set the excessive error detection width when servo ON. 0 to 32767 error (mm) <Standard setting value> detection Rapid traverse rate width during (mm/min) servo ON OD1=OD2= /2 (mm) 60*PGN1 When «0»…
  • Page 215
    7. Servo Parameters 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Items Details Setting range 2225 SV025 Motor/ (PR) MTYP Detector type mtyp Explanation Set the motor type. Set- 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x ting HA40N HA-FF43 HA43N mtyp HA80N HA-FF63 HA83N HA100N HA103N HA200N HA93N HA-FF053 HA053N HA-FF13 HA13N…
  • Page 216
    7. Servo Parameters 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Items Details Setting range (Continued from the previous page) Explanation Set the speed detector type. Set to «2». Set the position detector type. Set to «2». 2226 SV026 Excessive Set the excessive error detection width when servo ON. 0 to 32767 error For the standard setting, refer to the explanation of…
  • Page 217
    7. Servo Parameters 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Items Details Setting range 2230 SV030 Voltage When 100% is set, the voltage equivalent to the logical 0 to 200 dead time non-energized time will be compensated. compensa- Adjust in increments of 10% from the default value 100%. tion If increased too much, vibration or vibration noise may be generated.
  • Page 218
    7. Servo Parameters 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Items Details Setting range 2233 SV033 Servo SSF2 function selection 2 fhz2 Meaning when «0» is set Meaning when «1» is set Set the filter depth for Notch filter (SV038: FHz1). The control is stabilized by making the filter shallower. Value Depth Infntly…
  • Page 219
    7. Servo Parameters 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Items Details Setting range 2234 SV034 Servo SSF3 function selection 3 daf2 daf1 dac2 dac1 Meaning when «0» is set Meaning when «1» is set NC servo monitor MAX current display data changeover Set- MAX current 1 MAX current 2 ting Max.
  • Page 220
    7. Servo Parameters 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Items Details Setting range 2235 SV035 Servo cl2n clG1 SSF4 function selection 4 Meaning when «0» is set Meaning when «1» is set Collision detection method 1 Set the collision detection level during cutting feed (G1). clG1 The G1 collision detection level=SV060*clG1.
  • Page 221
    7. Servo Parameters 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Items Details Setting range 2236 SV036 Regenera- rtyp (PR) PTYP tive resistor type emgx Explanation Always set to «0(0000) «. Set the external emergency stop function. (Setting is prohibited for values with no description.) Set- emgx Explanation ting…
  • Page 222
    7. Servo Parameters 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Items Details Setting range 2237 SV037 JL Load inertia Set «the motor inertia + motor axis conversion load 0 to 5000 scale inertia» in respect to the motor inertia. Jl+Jm SV037 (JL) = *100 Jm: Motor inertia Jl: Motor axis conversion load inertia 2238 SV038 Notch filter…
  • Page 223
    7. Servo Parameters 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Items Details Setting range 2249 SV049 Position loop Set the position loop gain during the spindle 1 to 200 PGN1sp gain 1 in synchronous control (synchronous tapping, (rad/s) spindle synchronous control with spindle/C axis). synchronous Set the same value as the value of the spindle control parameter, position loop gain in synchronous…
  • Page 224
    7. Servo Parameters 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Items Details Setting range 2261 SV061 D/A output Input the data number you wish to output to D/A 0 to 102 DA1NO channel 1 output channel. data No. 2262 SV062 D/A output DA2NO channel 2 data No.
  • Page 225
    7. Servo Parameters 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 (2) Initial setting value (a) HC**/HC**R series Motor 102* 152* 202* 352* Drive unit capacity SV001 SV002 SV003 PGN1 SV004 PGN2 SV005 VGN1 SV006 SV007 SV008 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 SV009 8192 4096 8192…
  • Page 226
    7. Servo Parameters 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Motor 102* 152* 202* 352* Drive unit capacity SV033 SSF2 SV034 SSF3 SV035 SSF4 SV036 PTYP SV037 SV038 FHz1 SV039 LMCD SV040 LMCT SV041 LMC2 SV042 OVS2 SV043 OBS1 SV044 OBS2 SV045 TRUB SV046 SV047 SV048 EMGrt SV049…
  • Page 227
    7. Servo Parameters 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Motor 203* 103R 153R 203R Drive unit capacity SV001 SV002 SV003 PGN1 SV004 PGN2 SV005 VGN1 SV006 SV007 SV008 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 SV009 4096 4096 4096 2048 8192 8192 8192 SV010 4096 4096 4096…
  • Page 228
    7. Servo Parameters 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Motor 203* 103R 153R 203R Drive unit capacity SV033 SSF2 SV034 SSF3 SV035 SSF4 SV036 PTYP SV037 SV038 FHz1 SV039 LMCD SV040 LMCT SV041 LMC2 SV042 OVS2 SV043 OBS1 SV044 OBS2 SV045 TRUB SV046 SV047 SV048 EMGrt SV049…
  • Page 229
    7. Servo Parameters 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 (b) HA**N series Motor 100N 200N* 053N 103N* Drive unit capacity SV001 SV002 SV003 PGN1 SV004 PGN2 SV005 VGN1 SV006 SV007 SV008 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 SV009 2048 2048 2048 2048…
  • Page 230
    7. Servo Parameters 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 Motor 100N 200N* 053N 103N* Drive unit capacity SV033 SSF2 SV034 SSF3 SV035 SSF4 SV036 PTYP SV037 SV038 FHz1 SV039 LMCD SV040 LMCT SV041 LMC2 SV042 OVS2 SV043 OBS1 SV044 OBS2 SV045 TRUB SV046 SV047 SV048 EMGrt SV049…
  • Page 231
    7. Servo Parameters 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 (c) HC-SF series HC-SF HC-SF HC-SF HC-SF HC-SF HC-SF HC-SF HC-SF HC-SF HC-SF Motor Drive unit capacity SV001 SV002 SV003 PGN1 SV004 PGN2 SV005 VGN1 SV006 SV007 SV008 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364…
  • Page 232
    7. Servo Parameters 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 HC-SF HC-SF HC-SF HC-SF HC-SF HC-SF HC-SF HC-SF HC-SF HC-SF Motor Drive unit capacity SV033 SSF2 SV034 SSF3 SV035 SSF4 SV036 PTYP SV037 SV038 FHz1 SV039 LMCD SV040 LMCT SV041 LMC2 SV042 OVS2 SV043 OBS1 SV044 OBS2 SV045…
  • Page 233
    7. Servo Parameters 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 (d) HC-RF/HA-FF series HC-RF HC-RF HC-RF HA-FF HA-FF HA-FF HA-FF HA-FF HA-FF Motor Drive unit capacity SV001 SV002 SV003 PGN1 SV004 PGN2 SV005 VGN1 SV006 SV007 SV008 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 SV009 8192…
  • Page 234
    7. Servo Parameters 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 HC-RF HC-RF HC-RF HA-FF HA-FF HA-FF HA-FF HA-FF HA-FF Motor Drive unit capacity SV033 SSF2 SV034 SSF3 SV035 SSF4 SV036 PTYP SV037 SV038 FHz1 SV039 LMCD SV040 LMCT SV041 LMC2 SV042 OVS2 SV043 OBS1 SV044 OBS2 SV045 TRUB…
  • Page 235
    7. Servo Parameters 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 (e) HC-MF series HC-MF HC-MF HC-MF HC-MF HC-MF Motor Drive unit capacity SV001 SV002 SV003 PGN1 SV004 PGN2 SV005 VGN1 SV006 SV007 SV008 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 SV009 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 SV010 4096 4096 4096…
  • Page 236
    7. Servo Parameters 7.1 MDS-B-SVJ2 HC-MF HC-MF HC-MF HC-MF HC-MF Motor Drive unit capacity SV033 SSF2 SV034 SSF3 SV035 SSF4 SV036 PTYP SV037 SV038 FHz1 SV039 LMCD SV040 LMCT SV041 LMC2 SV042 OVS2 SV043 OBS1 SV044 OBS2 SV045 TRUB SV046 SV047 SV048 EMGrt…
  • Page 237
    7. Servo Parameters 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx High-gain (MDS-B-Vx4 Compatible) 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx High-gain (MDS-B-Vx4 Compatible) (1) Details for servo parameters For parameters marked with a (PR) in the table, turn the NC power OFF after setting. After the power is turned ON again, the parameter is validated. CAUTION In the explanation on bits, set all bits not used, including blank bits, to “0”.
  • Page 238
    7. Servo Parameters 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx High-gain (MDS-B-Vx4 Compatible) Items Details Setting range 2207 SV007 Speed loop Set this when the limit cycle occurs in the full-closed 0 to 32767 delay loop, or overshooting occurs in positioning. compensation Select the control method with SV027 (SSF1)/bit1, 0 (vcnt).
  • Page 239
    7. Servo Parameters 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx High-gain (MDS-B-Vx4 Compatible) Items Details Setting range 2215 SV015 Acceleration When a relative error in the synchronous control is large, 0 to 999(%) rate feed apply this parameter to the axis that is delaying. The forward gain standard setting value is «0».
  • Page 240
    7. Servo Parameters 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx High-gain (MDS-B-Vx4 Compatible) Items Details Setting range 2217 SV017 Servo drvall drvup mpt3 (PR) SPEC specification selection vdir fdir seqh dfbx fdir2 Meaning when «0» is set Meaning when «1» is set Speed feedback forward Speed feedback reverse 0 fdir2 polarity…
  • Page 241
    7. Servo Parameters 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx High-gain (MDS-B-Vx4 Compatible) Items Details Setting range 2218 SV018 Ball screw Set the ball screw pitch. Set to “360” for the rotary axis. 1 to 32767 (PR) pitch (mm/rev) 2219 SV019 Position In the case of the semi-closed loop control 1 to 9999 (PR) RNG1…
  • Page 242
    7. Servo Parameters 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx High-gain (MDS-B-Vx4 Compatible) Items Details Setting range 2223 SV023 Excessive Set the excessive error detection width when servo ON. 0 to 32767 error (mm) <Standard setting value> detection Rapid traverse rate width during (mm/min) servo ON OD1=OD2= /2 (mm) 60*PGN1…
  • Page 243
    7. Servo Parameters 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx High-gain (MDS-B-Vx4 Compatible) Items Details Setting range 2225 SV025 Motor (PR) MTYP /Detector type mtyp Explanation Set the motor type. Set this along with SV017 (SPEC)/spm. 1) When SV017/spm=0 (Normal drive unit) Set- 4x 5x 6x 7x ting HA40N HA50L…
  • Page 244
    7. Servo Parameters 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx High-gain (MDS-B-Vx4 Compatible) Items Details Setting range (Continued from the previous page) Explanation 2) When SV017/spm=1 (S type drive unit) Set- ting HC353 HC452 HC453 HC702 Set the detector type. Set the position detector type for «pen», and the speed detector type for «ent».
  • Page 245
    7. Servo Parameters 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx High-gain (MDS-B-Vx4 Compatible) Items Details Setting range 2226 SV026 Excessive Set the excessive error detection width when servo ON. 0 to 32767 error For the standard setting, refer to the explanation of (mm) detection SV023 (OD1). width during When «0»…
  • Page 246
    7. Servo Parameters 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx High-gain (MDS-B-Vx4 Compatible) Items Details Setting range 2230 The higher order 8bits and lower order 8bits are used for different functions. 0 to 32767 “The setting value of SV030” = (Icx*256) + IVC SV030 Voltage dead When 100% is set, the voltage equivalent to the 0 to 255 time compensa-…
  • Page 247
    7. Servo Parameters 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx High-gain (MDS-B-Vx4 Compatible) Items Details Setting range 2233 SV033 Servo SSF2 function selection 2 nfd2 nfd1 Meaning when «0» is set Meaning when «1» is set 0 zck Z phase check valid (Alarm 42) Z phase check invalid Set the filter depth for Notch filter 1 (SV038).
  • Page 248
    7. Servo Parameters 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx High-gain (MDS-B-Vx4 Compatible) Items Details Setting range 2234 SV034 Servo ovsn SSF3 function selection 3 mohn has2 has1 Meaning when «0» is set Meaning when «1» is set Setting for normal use HAS control 1 valid 0 has1 (Except for HC) (HC: High acceleration rate…
  • Page 249
    7. Servo Parameters 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx High-gain (MDS-B-Vx4 Compatible) Items Details Setting range 2235 SV035 Servo clG1 cl2n clet cltq SSF4 function selection 4 ckab Meaning when «0» is set Meaning when «1» is set Td creation time setting Set to “0”. (For machine tool builder adjustment) Set to «1»…
  • Page 250
    7. Servo Parameters 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx High-gain (MDS-B-Vx4 Compatible) Items Details Setting range 2236 SV036 Power rtyp (PR) PTYP supply type ptyp Explanation When the CN4 connector of the drive unit and the power supply are connected, setting below is necessary. To validate the external emergency stop function, add 40h.
  • Page 251
    7. Servo Parameters 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx High-gain (MDS-B-Vx4 Compatible) Items Details Setting range 2239 SV039 Lost motion Set this when the lost motion compensation timing 0 to 2000 LMCD compensation doest not match. (ms) timing Adjust by increasing the value by 10 at a time. 2240 The higher order 8bits and lower order 8bits are used for different functions.
  • Page 252
    7. Servo Parameters 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx High-gain (MDS-B-Vx4 Compatible) Items Details Setting range 2249 SV049 Position loop Set the position loop gain during the spindle 1 to 200 PGN1sp gain 1 in synchronous control (synchronous tapping, (rad/s) spindle synchronous control with spindle/C axis). synchronous Set the same value as the value of the spindle control…
  • Page 253
    7. Servo Parameters 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx High-gain (MDS-B-Vx4 Compatible) Items Details Setting range 2254 When SV035 (SSF4)/ bitF (ckab)=0 -1 to 32767 (mm) SV054 Overrun Set the overrun detection width in the full-closed loop detection width control. in closed loop If the gap between the motor end detector and the control linear scale (machine end detector) exceeds the value set by this parameter, it is judged to be overrun…
  • Page 254
    7. Servo Parameters 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx High-gain (MDS-B-Vx4 Compatible) Items Details Setting range 2259 SV059 Collision Set the torque estimating gain when using the -32768 to 32767 TCNV detection collision detection function. torque After setting as SV035/bitF(clt)=1 and performing estimating gain acceleration/deceleration, set the value displayed in MPOS of the NC servo monitor screen.
  • Page 255
    7. Servo Parameters 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx High-gain (MDS-B-Vx4 Compatible) (2) Initial setting value (a) HC**/HC**R series Motor Drive unit capacity SV001 SV002 SV003 PGN1 SV004 PGN2 SV005 VGN1 SV006 VGN2 SV007 SV008 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 SV009 4096…
  • Page 256
    7. Servo Parameters 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx High-gain (MDS-B-Vx4 Compatible) Motor Drive unit capacity SV033 SSF2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV034 SSF3 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 SV035 SSF4 0000 0000 0040 0040 0040…
  • Page 257
    7. Servo Parameters 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx High-gain (MDS-B-Vx4 Compatible) Motor Drive unit capacity SV001 SV002 SV003 PGN1 SV004 PGN2 SV005 VGN1 SV006 VGN2 SV007 SV008 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 SV009 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096…
  • Page 258
    7. Servo Parameters 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx High-gain (MDS-B-Vx4 Compatible) Motor Drive unit capacity SV033 SSF2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV034 SSF3 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 SV035 SSF4 0000 0000 0040 0040 0040 0040 0040…
  • Page 259
    7. Servo Parameters 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx High-gain (MDS-B-Vx4 Compatible) Motor 103R 153R 203R 353R Drive unit capacity SV001 SV002 SV003 PGN1 SV004 PGN2 SV005 VGN1 SV006 VGN2 SV007 SV008 1364 1364 1364 1364 SV009 4096 4096 4096 4096 SV010 4096 4096 4096 4096 SV011…
  • Page 260
    7. Servo Parameters 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx High-gain (MDS-B-Vx4 Compatible) Motor 103R 153R 203R 353R Drive unit capacity SV033 SSF2 0200 0200 0200 0200 SV034 SSF3 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV035 SSF4 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV036 PTYP 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV037 SV038 FHz1…
  • Page 261
    7. Servo Parameters 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx High-gain (MDS-B-Vx4 Compatible) (b) HA**N series Motor 100N 200N 300N 700N 900N Drive unit capacity SV001 SV002 SV003 PGN1 SV004 PGN2 SV005 VGN1 SV006 VGN2 SV007 SV008 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 SV009 4096 4096 4096…
  • Page 262
    7. Servo Parameters 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx High-gain (MDS-B-Vx4 Compatible) Motor 100N 200N 300N 700N 900N Drive unit capacity SV033 SSF2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV034 SSF3 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV035 SSF4 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000…
  • Page 263
    7. Servo Parameters 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx High-gain (MDS-B-Vx4 Compatible) Motor 103N 203N 303N 703N 053N Drive unit capacity SV001 SV002 SV003 PGN1 SV004 PGN2 SV005 VGN1 SV006 SV007 SV008 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 SV009 4096 4096 4096…
  • Page 264
    7. Servo Parameters 7.2 MDS-C1-Vx High-gain (MDS-B-Vx4 Compatible) Motor 103N 203N 303N 703N 053N Drive unit capacity SV033 SSF2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV034 SSF3 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000…
  • Page 265
    7. Servo Parameters 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) (1) Details for servo parameters For parameters marked with a (PR) in the table, turn the NC power OFF after setting. After the power is turned ON again, the parameter is validated.
  • Page 266
    7. Servo Parameters 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) Items Details Setting range 2207 SV007 Speed loop Set this when the limit cycle occurs in the full-closed 0 to 32767 delay loop, or overshooting occurs in positioning. compensation Select the control method with SV027 (SSF1)/bit1, 0 (vcnt).
  • Page 267
    7. Servo Parameters 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) Items Details Setting range 2215 SV015 Acceleration When a relative error in the synchronous control is 0 to 999 rate feed large, apply this parameter to the axis that is forward gain delaying.
  • Page 268
    7. Servo Parameters 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) Items Details Setting range 2217 SV017 Servo mpt3 (PR) SPEC specification selection vdir fdir spwv seqh dfbx fdir2 Meaning when «0» is set Meaning when «1» is set Speed feedback forward Speed feedback reverse fdir2 polarity…
  • Page 269
    7. Servo Parameters 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) Items Details Setting range 2219 SV019 Position In the case of the semi-closed loop control 1 to 9999 (PR) RNG1 detector Set the same value as SV020 (RNG2). (Refer to the (kp/rev) resolution explanation of SV020.)
  • Page 270
    7. Servo Parameters 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) Items Details Setting range 2224 SV024 In-position Set the in-position detection width. 0 to 32767 detection Set the accuracy required for the machine. (µm) width The lower the setting is, the higher the positioning accuracy gets, however, the cycle time (setting time) becomes longer.
  • Page 271
    7. Servo Parameters 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) Items Details Setting range (Continued from the previous page) Explanation Set the detector type. Set position detector type for «pen», and speed detector type for «ent». In the case of the semi-closed loop control, set the same value for «pen»…
  • Page 272
    7. Servo Parameters 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) Items Details Setting range 2227 SV027 Servo aflt zrn2 afse SSF1 function selection 1 zrn3 vfct vcnt Meaning when «0» is set Meaning when «1» is set Set the execution changeover type of the speed loop delay 0 vcnt compensation.
  • Page 273
    7. Servo Parameters 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) Items Details Setting range 2230 The higher order 8bits and lower order 8bits are used for different functions. 0 to 32767 «The setting value of SV030» = (Icx*256) + IVC SV030 Voltage dead When 100% is set, the voltage equivalent to the logical 0 to 255…
  • Page 274
    7. Servo Parameters 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) Items Details Setting range 2232 SV032 Torque Set the unbalance torque of vertical axis and inclined -100 to 100 offset axis. (Stall [rated] current %) 2233 SV033 Servo SSF2 function selection 2 fhz2 Meaning when «0»…
  • Page 275
    7. Servo Parameters 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) Items Details Setting range 2234 SV034 Servo ovsn SSF3 function selection 3 has2 has1 Meaning when «0» is set Meaning when «1» is set 0 has1 Setting for normal use HAS control 1 valid (Except for HC) (HC: High acceleration rate support)
  • Page 276
    7. Servo Parameters 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) Items Details Setting range 2235 SV035 Servo clG1 cl2n clet cltq SSF4 function selection4 Meaning when «0» is set Meaning when «1» is set Td creation time setting Set to «0». (For machine tool builder adjustment) Set to «1»…
  • Page 277
    7. Servo Parameters 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) Items Details Setting range 2236 SV036 Power rtyp (PR) PTYP supply type ptyp Explanation When the CN4 connector of the drive unit and the power supply are connected, setting below is necessary. To validate the external emergency stop function, add 40h.
  • Page 278
    7. Servo Parameters 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) Items Details Setting range 2237 SV037 JL Load inertia Set “the motor inertia + motor axis conversion load 0 to 5000 scale inertia” in respect to the motor inertia. Jl+Jm SV037 (JL) = *100 Jm: Motor inertia Jl: Motor axis conversion load inertia…
  • Page 279
    7. Servo Parameters 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) Items Details Setting range 2246 SV046 Not used. Set to “0”. 2247 SV047 Inductive Set the inductive voltage compensation gain. Set to 0 to 200 voltage «100» as a standard. compensation If the current FB peak exceeds the current command gain peak, lower the gain.
  • Page 280
    7. Servo Parameters 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) Items Details Setting range 2256 SV056 Deceleration In the vertical axis drop prevention control, set the -20000 to 20000 EMGt time constant time constant used for the deceleration control at (ms) at emergency emergency stop.
  • Page 281
    7. Servo Parameters 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) (2) Initial setting value (a) HC**/HC**R series Motor Drive unit capacity SV001 SV002 SV003 PGN1 SV004 PGN2 SV005 VGN1 SV006 VGN2 SV007 SV008 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 SV009 2048 2048…
  • Page 282
    7. Servo Parameters 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) Motor Drive unit capacity SV033 SSF2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV034 SSF3 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 SV035 SSF4 0000 0000 0040 0040 0040 0040 0040 0040…
  • Page 283
    7. Servo Parameters 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) Motor 103R 153R 203R 353R Drive unit capacity SV001 SV002 SV003 PGN1 SV004 PGN2 SV005 VGN1 SV006 VGN2 SV007 SV008 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 SV009 2048 2048…
  • Page 284
    7. Servo Parameters 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) Motor 103R 153R 203R 353R Drive unit capacity SV033 SSF2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV034 SSF3 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 0003 0000 0000 0000 0000…
  • Page 285
    7. Servo Parameters 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) (b) HA**N series Motor 100N 200N 300N 700N 900N Drive unit capacity SV001 SV002 SV003 PGN1 SV004 PGN2 SV005 VGN1 SV006 VGN2 SV007 SV008 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 SV009 2048 2048…
  • Page 286
    7. Servo Parameters 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) Motor 100N 200N 300N 700N 900N Drive unit capacity SV033 SSF2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV034 SSF3 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV035 SSF4 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000…
  • Page 287
    7. Servo Parameters 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) Motor 103N 203N 303N 703N Drive unit capacity SV001 SV002 SV003 PGN1 SV004 PGN2 SV005 VGN1 SV006 VGN2 SV007 SV008 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 SV009 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048…
  • Page 288
    7. Servo Parameters 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) Motor 103N 203N 303N 703N Drive unit capacity SV033 SSF2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV034 SSF3 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV035 SSF4 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000…
  • Page 289
    7. Servo Parameters 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) Motor 053N Drive unit capacity SV001 SV002 SV003 PGN1 SV004 PGN2 SV005 VGN1 SV006 VGN2 SV007 SV008 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 SV009 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 SV010 2048 2048 2048…
  • Page 290
    7. Servo Parameters 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) Motor 053N Drive unit capacity SV033 SSF2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV034 SSF3 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV035 SSF4 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV036 PTYP 0000 0000 0000…
  • Page 291
    7. Servo Parameters 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) (c) HA**L series Motor 100L 150L 200L 300L 500L A11KL A15KL Drive unit capacity SV001 SV002 SV003 PGN1 SV004 PGN2 SV005 VGN1 SV006 VGN2 SV007 SV008 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364…
  • Page 292
    7. Servo Parameters 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) Motor 100L 150L 200L 300L 500L A11KL A15KL Drive unit capacity SV033 SSF2 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV034 SSF3 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV035 SSF4 0000…
  • Page 293
    7. Servo Parameters 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) Motor 103L 153L 203L 303L 503L Drive unit capacity SV001 SV002 SV003 PGN1 SV004 PGN2 SV005 VGN1 SV006 VGN2 SV007 SV008 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 1364 SV009 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048…
  • Page 294
    7. Servo Parameters 7.3 MDS-C1-Vx Standard Specification (MDS-B-Vx Compatible) Motor 103L 153L 203L 303L 503L Drive unit capacity SV034 SSF3 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV035 SSF4 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV036 PTYP 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SV037…
  • Page 295
    7. Servo Parameters 7.4 Supplement 7.4 Supplement 7.4.1 D/A Output Specifications (1) MDS-B-SVJ2 (a) D/A output specifications Item Explanation No. of channels Output cycle 888µs (min. value) Output precision 8bit Output voltage -10V to 0 to +10V range Output scale ±1/256 to ±128 times setting Output pins…
  • Page 296
    7. Servo Parameters 7.4 Supplement (b) Setting the output data Set the No. of the data to be outputted to each D/A output channel. Abbrev Parameter name 2261 SV061 DA1NO D/A output channel 1 data No. 2262 SV062 DA2NO D/A output channel 2 data No.
  • Page 297
    7. Servo Parameters 7.4 Supplement (c) Setting the output scale When «0» is set, the output will be made with the standard output unit. To change the output unit, set a value other than «0». The scale is set with a 1/256 unit. When 256 is set, the unit will be the same as the standard output. Abbrev Parameter name 2263…
  • Page 298
    7. Servo Parameters 7.4 Supplement (2) MDS-C1-Vx, MDS-B-Vx, MDS-B-Vx4 (a) D/A Output specifications Item Explanation No. of channels Output cycle 888µs (min. value) Output precision 8bit Output voltage 0V to 2.5V to +5V Output scale ±1/256 to ±128 times setting Output pins CN9 connector MO1 = pin 9…
  • Page 299
    7. Servo Parameters 7.4 Supplement (b) Setting the output data Set the No. of the data to be outputted to each data D/A output channel. Abbrev Parameter name 2261 SV061 DA1NO D/A output channel 1 data No. 2262 SV062 DA2NO D/A output channel 2 data No.
  • Page 300
    7. Servo Parameters 7.4 Supplement (Continued from the previous page) Standard setting value of output Standard output Standard Output Output data scale unit output unit cycle (Setting values in SV063, SV064) Estimated disturbance Internal unit (adjustment 888µs torque required) Saw-tooth wave test 0V to 5V 0 (256) Cycle: 227.5ms…
  • Page 301
    7. Servo Parameters 7.4 Supplement 7.4.2 Electronic Gears By setting the ball screw lead, deceleration ratio (or acceleration ratio), and detector resolution correctly with parameters, the command movement amount and machine end movement amount can be matched. The following parameters are related to these electronic gears, and directly affect the machine operation. Take care to set these correctly.
  • Page 302
    7. Servo Parameters 7.4 Supplement Example of calculating PC1 and PC2 setting range To use a ball screw lead of 10mm, interpolation unit of 0.5µm and OSE104 or OSA104 motor end detector with semi-closed loop. The following parameters are determined by the above conditions. SV018 (PIT) = 10, SV019 (RNG1) = 100, SV020 (RNG2) = 100, IUNIT = 2 Divide the denominator and numerator.
  • Page 303
    7. Servo Parameters 7.4 Supplement 7.4.3 Lost Motion Compensation When the motor is to rotate in the clockwise direction (looking from the load side) at the command for the + direction, the command direction is CW. Conversely, when the motor is to rotate in the counterclockwise direction, the command direction is CCW.
  • Page 304
    8. MDS-B-SP/SPH, SPJ2 Spindle Parameters 8.1 MDS-B-SP/SPH, SPJ2 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters 8. MDS-B-SP/SPH, SPJ2 Spindle Parameters The spindle parameter setting and display method will differ according to the CNC being used, so refer to Instruction Manual for each CNC and the following spindles. MELDAS AC Servo and Spindle MDS-A Series MDS-B Series Specifications Manual ..
  • Page 305
    8. MDS-B-SP/SPH, SPJ2 Spindle Parameters 8.1 MDS-B-SP/SPH, SPJ2 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters Relationship between spindle limit rotation speed and maximum spindle rotation speed Output voltage (V) Spindle rotation speed (r/min) smax1 slimt1 smax2 slimt2 smax(n) slimt(n) Limit rotation speed of gear 1 (Parameter setting) Maximum rotation speed of gear 1 (Parameter setting) Set «0»…
  • Page 306
    8. MDS-B-SP/SPH, SPJ2 Spindle Parameters 8.1 MDS-B-SP/SPH, SPJ2 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (Unit) 3021 sori Orientation rotation Set the spindle orientation rotation speed. 0 to 32767 (r/min) speed Set the rotation speed for when the spindle rotates at the constant rotation speed.
  • Page 307
    8. MDS-B-SP/SPH, SPJ2 Spindle Parameters 8.1 MDS-B-SP/SPH, SPJ2 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (Unit) 3029 tapsel Asynchronous Specify whether to use the tap rotation tap gear speed or maximum rotation speed for the selection gear that is selected when an asynchronous tap command is issued.
  • Page 308
    8. MDS-B-SP/SPH, SPJ2 Spindle Parameters 8.1 MDS-B-SP/SPH, SPJ2 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (Unit) 3049 spt Spindle Set the acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 9999 (ms) synchroniza- constant for when the spindle tion acceleration/ synchronization command’s rotation speed deceleration time changes during spindle synchronous constant…
  • Page 309
    8. MDS-B-SP/SPH, SPJ2 Spindle Parameters 8.1 MDS-B-SP/SPH, SPJ2 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (Unit) 3055 sptc2 Spindle Set the spindle speed for changing the 2nd 0 to 99999 (r/min) synchroniza- step’s acceleration/deceleration time tion multi-step constant. acceleration/ deceleration changeover speed 3056 sptc3…
  • Page 310
    8. MDS-B-SP/SPH, SPJ2 Spindle Parameters 8.1 MDS-B-SP/SPH, SPJ2 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (Unit) 3060 sptc7 Spindle synchroniza- Set the spindle speed for changing the 7th 0 to 99999 (r/min) tion multi-step step’s acceleration/deceleration time acceleration/ constant. deceleration changeover speed 7 3061 spdiv1…
  • Page 311
    8. MDS-B-SP/SPH, SPJ2 Spindle Parameters 8.1 MDS-B-SP/SPH, SPJ2 Spindle Base Specifications Parameters Items Details Setting range (Unit) 3066 spdiv6 Magnification for Set the acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 127 time constant constant between the spindle changeover speed synchronization multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover speed 6 (sptc6) to the spindle synchronization multi-step acceleration/deceleration changeover…
  • Page 312
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 For parameters marked with a (PR) in the tables, turn the NC power OFF after setting. The parameters will be valid after the power is turned ON again. The valid spindle parameters will differ according to the motor and amplifier type. Follow the correspondence table given below, and set the correct parameters.
  • Page 313
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3210 SP010 PGS Spindle Set the spindle position loop gain in 1 to 100 synchronous spindle synchronization mode. (1/s) position loop gain 3211 SP011 Use not possible. 3216 SP016 3217 SP017 TSP Maximum motor…
  • Page 314
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3233 SP033 SFNC1 Spindle Set the spindle function 1 in bit units. 0000 to 0000 (PR) function 1 FFFF HEX setting poff ront sftk dflt 1a2m (Note) Always set «0» for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 1a2m 1 amplifier 1 amplifier…
  • Page 315
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3235 SP035 SFNC3 Spindle Set the spindle function 3 in bit units. 0000 to 0000 (PR) function3 FFFF HEX setting hbsd hwid (Note) Always set «0» for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 hwid H-coil wide-range…
  • Page 316
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3237 SP037 SFNC5 Spindle Set the spindle function 5 in bit units. 0000 to 0000 (PR) function 5 FFFF HEX setting nstv plgo enco (Note) Always set «0» for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 enco Encoder orientation…
  • Page 317
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3239 SP039 ATYP Amplifier Set the amplifier type. 0000 to 0000 (PR) type Set each amplifier type or «0». FFFF This parameter corresponds to MDS-B-SPJ2. setting Parameter setting Amplifier type 0000 0001 SPJ2-02…
  • Page 318
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3241 SP041 PTYP Power When this unit is a signal connection axis with 0000 to 0000 (PR) supply type power supply unit, set this parameter. FFFF Set «0» for this parameter for the unit which is not a signal connection axis.
  • Page 319
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3248 SP048 SUT Speed reach Set the speed deviation rate with respect to 0 to 100 (PR) range the commanded speed for output of the speed reach signal. 3249 SP049 TLM2 Torque limit 2 Set the torque limit rate for the torque limit 1 to 120…
  • Page 320
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3267 SP067 VIGWA Change starting Set the speed for starting change of current 0 to (PR) speed of variable loop gain. 32767 current loop gain (r/min) 3268 SP068 VIGWB Change ending Set the speed for ending change of current 0 to…
  • Page 321
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Setting Standard Items Details range setting Not used. Set to «0». 3276 SP076 3277 SP077 TDSL Fixed control Set by Mitsubishi. constant Set «0» unless designated in particular. 3278 SP078 FPWM (PR) 3279 SP079 ILMT (PR) 3280 SP080…
  • Page 322
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3296 SP096 EGAR Encoder gear Set the gear ratio between the spindle end -3 to 4 (PR) ratio and the encoder end (except for the motor-built-in encoder) as indicated below. Setting Gear ratio Setting…
  • Page 323
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3301 SP101 DINP Orientation When using the orientation in-position 1 to 2880 (PR) advance advance function, set the in-position width (1/16°) in-position that is larger than the normal in-position width width defined in SP004 (OINP).
  • Page 324
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3313 SP113 WINP Turret index The position error range is set in which an 0 to 32767 (PR) in-position orientation (indexing) completed signal is (1/16°) width output during turret indexing. This becomes the same as SP004 (OINP) when set to «0».
  • Page 325
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3377 SP177 SPECS Spindle Set the spindle synchronous specifications in 0000 to 0000 (PR) synchronous bit units. FFFF specifica- tions setting odx8 fdir pyfx fclx (Note) Always set «0» for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 fclx Closed loop…
  • Page 326
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3382 SP182 VCSS Change Set the speed for starting change of speed 0 to 32767 (PR) starting speed loop proportional gain at spindle (r/min) of variable synchronization. speed loop proportional Proportional gain gain at…
  • Page 327
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3393 SP193 SPECT Synchronous Set the synchronous tapping specifications in 0000 to 0000 (PR) tapping bit units. FFFF specifications setting zrtn ptyp od8x fdir cdir pyfx fclx (Note) Always set «0» for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 fclx Closed loop…
  • Page 328
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3399 SP199 VCST Change starting Set the speed for starting change of speed 0 to (PR) speed of loop proportional gain at synchronous 32767 variable speed tapping. loop (r/min) proportional Proportional gain gain at…
  • Page 329
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Setting Standard Items Details range setting 1 to 2880 3417 SP217 TINP Synchronous Set the position error range in which (1/16°) tapping in-position signal is output during in-position synchronous tapping. width 3418 SP218 TODR Excessive Set the excessive error width at 1 to 32767 32767…
  • Page 330
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3434 SP234 OBS1 Disturbanc Set the frequency of the low path filter for 0 to 1000 (PR) e observer when the disturbance observer is valid. (1/s) low path Setting (1/s) = 2πf filter f: Approx.
  • Page 331
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.2 MDS-B-SPJ2 Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3457 SP257 Motor This parameter is valid only in the following 0000 to 0000 (PR) constant two conditional cases: FFFF (H coil) HEX setting SP320 (a) In case that SP034 (SFNC2) bit0=1 3520 and SP034 (SFNC2) bit2=0 (PR)
  • Page 332
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH The spindle parameter setting and display method will differ according to the NC being used, so refer to Instruction Manual for each NC and the following spindles. MELDAS AC Servo and Spindle MDS-A Series MDS-B Series Specifications Manual . BNP-B3759 MELDAS AC Servo and Spindle MDS-C1 Series Specifications Manual ……
  • Page 333
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3207 SP007 OPST In-position Set the stop position for orientation. (i) 0 to 4095 shift (i)Motor built-in encoder, encoder: (ii) -512 to amount for Set the value by dividing 360° by 4096. orientation (ii)Magnetic sensor: Divide -5°…
  • Page 334
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3224 SP024 Use not possible. 3225 SP025 GRA1 Spindle Set the number of gear teeth of the spindle 1 to 32767 (PR) gear teeth corresponding to gear 000. count 1 3226 SP026 GRA2…
  • Page 335
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3233 SP033 SFNC1 Spindle Set the spindle function 1 in bit units. 0000 to 0000 (PR) function 1 FFFF HEX setting poff ront pycal pychg pyst pyoff sftk dflt 1a2m (Note) Always set «0»…
  • Page 336
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3234 SP034 SFNC2 Spindle Set the spindle function 2 in bit units. 0000 to 000C (PR) function 2 FFFF HEX setting mkc2 mkch invm mts1 (Note) Always set «0» for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 mts1 Special motor constant…
  • Page 337
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3236 SP036 SFNC4 Spindle Set the spindle function 4 in bit units. 0000 to 0000 (PR) function 4 FFFF dslm dssm setting enc2 enc1 mag2 mag1 plg2 plg1 (Note) Always set «0»…
  • Page 338
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3238 SP038 SFNC6 Spindle Set the spindle function 6 in bit units. 0000 to 0000 (PR) function 6 FFFF oplp iqsv XFzs dcsn lmnp pl80 sdt2 setting vfbs orm adin plg2 pftm alty (Note) Always set «0»…
  • Page 339
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3239 SP039 ATYP Amplifier Set the amplifier type. 0000 to 0000 (PR) type Set each amplifier type or «0» FFFF Parameter setting Amplifier type setting 0000 0001 SP-075 0002 SP-15 0003…
  • Page 340
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3240 SP040 MTYP Motor type This parameter is valid when SP034 (SFNC2) 0000 to 0000 (PR) bit0 is set to «0». FFFF Set the appropriate motor number from the standard motors listed below.
  • Page 341
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3241 SP041 PTYP Power Power supply type 0000 to 0000 (PR) supply type FFFF rtyp setting ptyp Explanation When the CN4 connector of the drive unit and the power supply are connected, setting below is necessary.
  • Page 342
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3243 SP043 TRNG Synchro- This parameter is used to set the synchronous 0 to 7 (PR) nous tapping or spindle synchronous detector range. tapping, Set «0» for this parameter. spindle synchro- nous…
  • Page 343
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3255 SP055 SETM Excessive Set the timer value until the excessive speed 0 to 60 (s) (PR) speed deviation alarm is output. deviation The value of this parameter should be longer timer than the acceleration/deceleration time.
  • Page 344
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3263 SP063 OLT Overload Set the time constant for detection of the 0 to 1000 (PR) alarm motor overload alarm. detection time 3264 SP064 OLL Overload alarm Set the detection level of the motor overload 0 to 120 (PR) detection level…
  • Page 345
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3270 SP070 FHz Machine When machine vibration occurs in speed and 0 to 3000 resonance position control, set the frequency of the (Hz) suppressio required vibration suppression. n filter Note that a value of 100Hz or more is set.
  • Page 346
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3280 SP080 Use not possible. 3281 SP081 LMCA Fixed control This is used by Mitsubishi. constant Set to «0» unless particularly designated. 3282 SP082 LMCB 3283 SP083 3284 SP084 Use not possible.
  • Page 347
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3296 SP096 EGAR Encoder gear Set the gear ratio between the spindle end -3 to 4 (PR) ratio and the encoder end (except for the motor-built-in encoder) as indicated below. Setting Gear ratio Setting…
  • Page 348
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3298 SP098 VGOP Speed loop Set the speed loop proportional gain in 0 to 1000 (PR) gain propor- orientation mode. (1/s) tional term in When the gain is increased, rigidity is improved orientation in the orientation stop but vibration and sound mode…
  • Page 349
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3308 SP108 CSP3 Deceleration Set the deceleration rate in orientation mode 0 to 1000 rate 3 in corresponding to the gear 010. orientation When this parameter is set to «0», same as mode SP006 (CSP).
  • Page 350
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3320 SP120 MPGL Orientation Set the compensation magnification of the 0 to 2560 position gain orientation position loop gain for the L (1/256-fold) L winding winding. compensa- L winding orientation position loop gain tion magnifi- = SP001 (or SP002) ×…
  • Page 351
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3325 SP125 MGD2 Magnetic This parameter is used for adjustment of 1 to 10000 Standard sensor orientation operation of the magnetic sensor. magnet- switching Set the distance dimension from the target stop izing point point at switching from position feedback to…
  • Page 352
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3332 SP132 PGC3 Third position Set the position loop gain when the third gain 1 to 100 loop gain for is selected for C-axis cutting. (1/s) cutting on C-axis 3333 SP133 PGC4 Stop position…
  • Page 353
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3341 SP141 VGCI2 Second Set the speed loop integral gain when the 0 to 5000 (PR) speed loop second gain is selected for C-axis cutting. (0.1 1/s) gain integral item for cutting on C-axis…
  • Page 354
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3349 SP149 CZRN C-axis zero This parameter is valid when SP129 1 to 500 point return (SPECC) bitE is set to «0». (r/min) speed Set the zero point return speed used when the speed loop changes to the position loop.
  • Page 355
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3361 SP161 IQGC0 Current loop Set the magnification of current loop gain 1 to 1000 (PR) gain magnifi- (torque component) for C-axis non-cutting. cation 1 for non-cutting on C-axis 3362 SP162 IDGC0…
  • Page 356
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3370 SP170 VGUD Speed loop Set the speed loop gain delay advance item 0 to 5000 (PR) gain delay for when the disturbance observer is valid. (0.1 1/s) advance item for increased spindle…
  • Page 357
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3380 SP180 VGSD Spindle Set the speed loop delay advance gain in 0 to 1000 (PR) synchronous spindle synchronous mode. (0.1 1/s) speed loop When this parameter is set to «0», PI control gain delay is applied.
  • Page 358
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3388 SP188 IDGS Spindle Set the magnification of current loop gain 1 to 1000 (PR) synchronous (excitation component) in the spindle Current loop synchronous mode. gain magnifi- cation 2 3389 SP189 PG2S Spindle Set the second position loop gain when…
  • Page 359
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3394 SP194 VGTP Synchronized Set the speed loop proportional gain in 0 to 1000 (PR) tapping synchronized tapping mode. (1/s) speed loop gain proportional term 3395 SP195 VGTI Synchronized Set the speed loop integral gain in 0 to1000…
  • Page 360
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3403 SP203 FFC4 Synchronized Set the acceleration feed forward gain for 0 to 1000 (PR) tapping selection of gear 011 during synchronized acceleration tapping. feed forward gain (gear 4) 3404 SP204 Not used.
  • Page 361
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3421 SP221 PG2T Synchronized Set the second position loop gain when 0 to 999 tapping high-gain control is applied during (1/s) position loop synchronized tapping. gain 2 When this parameter is not used, set to «0». 3422 SP222 PG3T Synchronized Set the third position loop gain when…
  • Page 362
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3433 SP233 JL Disturbance Set the ratio of the motor inertia + load 0 to 5000 (PR) observer general inertia and motor inertia. inertia scale Setting Motor inertia + load inertia ×100 value Motor inertia…
  • Page 363
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3453 SP253 DA1NO D/A output Set the output data number for channel 1 -32768 to channel 1 of the D/A output function. 32767 data When set to «0», the output is number speedometer.
  • Page 364
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.3 MDS-B-SP/SPH, MDS-C1-SP/SPH Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3521 SP321 RPML Motor This parameter is valid only in the 0000 to 0000 (PR) constant following conditional case: FFFF (L coil) HEX setting SP384 BSDL (a) In case that SP034 (SFNC2) bit0=1 3584 and SP034 (SFNC2) bit2=1 (PR)
  • Page 365
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM The spindle parameter setting and display method will differ according to the NC being used, so refer to Instruction Manual for each NC and the following spindles. MELDAS AC Servo and Spindle MDS-C1 Series Specifications Manual ……BNP-C3000 For parameters marked with a (PR) in the tables, turn the NC power OFF after setting.
  • Page 366
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3209 SP009 PGT Synchronized Set the spindle position loop gain in 1 to 200 tapping synchronized tapping mode. (1/s) Position loop gain 3210 SP010 PGS Spindle Set the spindle position loop gain in 1 to 200 synchronous spindle synchronization mode.
  • Page 367
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3230 SP030 GRB2 Motor shaft Set the number of gear teeth of the motor shaft 1 to 32767 1 (PR) gear teeth corresponding to gear 001. count 2 3231 SP031 GRB3 Motor shaft Set the number of gear teeth of the motor shaft…
  • Page 368
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3234 SP034 SFNC2 Spindle Set the spindle function 2 in bit units. 0000 to 000C (PR) function 2 FFFF setting mkc2 mkch Mk3c mts1 (Note) Always set «0» for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 mts1 Special motor constant…
  • Page 369
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3235 SP035 SFNC3 Spindle Set the spindle function 3 in bit units. 0000 to 0000 (PR) function 3 FFFF setting mwid lwid hwid (Note) Always set «0» for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 hwid H coil output character-…
  • Page 370
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3236 SP036 Not used. Set to «0». 3237 SP037 SFNC5 Spindle Set the spindle function 5 in bit units. 0000 to 0000 (PR) function 5 FFFF nsno nosg setting plgo enco (Note) Always set «0»…
  • Page 371
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3238 SP038 SFNC6 Spindle Set the spindle function 6 in bit units. 0000 to 0000 (PR) function 6 FFFF XFzs pl80 sdt2 setting hzrn orm plg2 pftm alty (Note) Always set «0» for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 alty Deceleration stop during…
  • Page 372
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3239 SP039 ATYP Amplifier Set the amplifier type. 0000 to 0000 (PR) type Set each amplifier type or «0» FFFF Parameter setting Amplifier type setting 0000 –– 0001 –– 0002 ––…
  • Page 373
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3241 SP041 PTYP Power supply Power supply type 0000 to 0000 (PR) type FFFF rtyp setting ptyp Explanation When the CN4 connector of the drive unit and the power supply are connected, setting below is necessary.
  • Page 374
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3243 SP043 TRNG Synchronous This parameter is used to set the 0 to 7 (PR) tapping, spindle synchronous tapping or spindle synchronous synchronous detector range. detector range Set «0» for this parameter. 3244 SP044 TRAN NC communi-…
  • Page 375
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3256 SP056 Use not possible. Constant → 3257 SP057 STOD Set the value for judging when changing from 0 to 50 (PR) a constant to excessive speed command. (r/min) excessive judgment value…
  • Page 376
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3266 SP066 VCSN1 Change Set the speed when the speed loop 0 to 32767 (PR) starting proportional gain change starts. (r/min) speed of variable Proportional gain speed loop SP022 proportional gain SP022×…
  • Page 377
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3276 SP076 FONS Machine When the vibration increases in motor stop 0 to 32767 resonance (ex. in orientation stop) when the machine (r/min) suppression vibration suppression filter is operated by filter SP070, operate the machine vibration operation…
  • Page 378
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3296 SP096 EGAR Encoder Set the gear ratio between the spindle end and 0 to 4 (PR) gear ratio the encoder end (except for the motor-built-in encoder) as indicated below. Setting Gear ratio value…
  • Page 379
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3298 SP098 VGOP Speed loop Set the speed loop proportional gain in 0 to 2000 (PR) gain propor- orientation mode. (1/s) tional term in When the gain is increased, rigidity is orientation improved in the orientation stop but mode…
  • Page 380
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3309 SP109 CSP4 Deceleration Set the deceleration rate in orientation 0 to 1000 rate 4 in mode corresponding to the gear 011. orientation When this parameter is set to «0», same mode as SP006 (CSP).
  • Page 381
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3321 SP121 MPCSH Orientation Set the compensation magnification of the 0 to 2560 deceleration orientation deceleration rate for the H winding. (1/256-fol rate H winding Orientation deceleration rate for the H compensa- winding tion magnifi-…
  • Page 382
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3329 SP129 SPECC C-axis Set the C-axis specifications in bit units. 0000 (PR) specifica- tions zrtn ptyp fb9x zrtd zrn2 zdir ztyp vg8x fdir phos rtrn fclx (Note) Always set «0» for the empty bits. bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 fclx Closed loop…
  • Page 383
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3331 SP131 PGC2 Second position Set the position loop gain when the 1 to 200 loop gain for second gain is selected for C axis (1/s) cutting on C-axis cutting.
  • Page 384
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3343 SP143 VGCP3 Third speed loop Set the speed loop proportional gain 0 to 5000 (PR) gain proportional when the third gain is selected for (1/s) item for cutting C-axis cutting.
  • Page 385
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3353 SP153 CINP C-axis in-position Set the position error range in which 0000 to 03E8 width the in-position signal is output on the FFFF C-axis. (1/1000°) HEX setting 3354 SP154 CODRL Excessive error Set the excessive error width on the HEX setting…
  • Page 386
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3366 SP166 PG3C C-axis Set the third position loop gain when high-gain 0 to 999 position loop control is carried out for control of the C-axis. (1/s) gain 3 This parameter is applied to all the operation modes of C-axis control.
  • Page 387
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3377 SP177 SPECS Spindle Set the spindle synchronous specifications in 0000 to 0000 (PR) synchronous bit units. FFFF specifica- tions setting odx8 phos fdir mach fclx bit Name Meaning when set to 0 Meaning when set to 1 fclx Closed loop Semi-closed loop…
  • Page 388
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3382 SP182 VCSS Spindle Set the speed when the speed loop 0 to 32767 (PR) synchronous proportional gain change starts in the spindle (r/min) Change synchronous mode. starting speed of variable Proportional gain speed loop…
  • Page 389
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3390 SP190 PG3S Spindle Set the third position loop gain when high-gain 0 to 999 synchronous control is carried out in the spindle (1/s) Position loop synchronous mode. gain 3 When this parameter function is not used, set to «0».
  • Page 390
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3394 SP194 VGTP Synchronized Set the speed loop proportional gain in 0 to 2000 (PR) tapping synchronized tapping mode. (1/s) speed loop gain proportional term 3395 SP195 VGTI Synchronized Set the speed loop integral gain in 0 to2000 (PR)
  • Page 391
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3400 SP200 FFC1 Synchronized Set the acceleration feed forward gain for 0 to 1000 (PR) tapping selection of gear 000 during synchronized acceleration tapping. feed forward This parameter should be used when an error gain of relative position to Z-axis servo is large.
  • Page 392
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3407 SP207 GDL Sequential To carry out spindle synchronization or C-axis 0/1/2 mode startup control in the both-chuck state with no timing movement immediately after the power is turned ON, set this parameter so that the reverse run detection function will function correctly.
  • Page 393
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3417 SP217 TINP Synchronized Set the position error range for output of 1 to 2880 tapping the in-position during synchronized (1/16°) in-position tapping. width 3418 SP218 TODR Synchronized Set the excessive error width during 1 to 32767 32767 (PR)
  • Page 394
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3425 SP225 OXKPH Position loop If gain changeover is valid (SP097: 0 to 2560 gain magni- SPEC0-bitC=1) during orientation, set the (1/256-fold) fication after magnification of each gain changed to orientation gain after in-position.
  • Page 395
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3435 SP235 OBS2 Disturbance Set the gain for the disturbance observer. 0 to 500 (%) 0 (PR) observer gain 3436 SP236 OBS3 Fixed control This is used by Mitsubishi. constant Set to «0»…
  • Page 396
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3453 SP253 DA1NO D/A output Set the output data number for channel 1 -32768 to channel 1 of the D/A output function. 32767 data number When set to «0», the output is speedometer.
  • Page 397
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.4 MDS-C1-SPM Setting Standard Items Details range setting 3521 SP321 RPML Motor This parameter is valid only in the 0000 to 0000 (PR) constant following conditional case: FFFF (L coil) HEX setting SP384 BSDL (a) In case that SP034 (SFNC2) bit0=1 3584 and SP034 (SFNC2) bit2=1 (PR)
  • Page 398
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.5 Supplement 8.5 Supplement 8.5.1 D/A Output Specifications (1) D/A output specifications Item Explanation No. of channels Output cycle 444µs (min. value) Output precision 8bit 0V to +5V (zero) to +10V, Output voltage range 0V to +10V during meter output Output scale 1/256 to ±128 tiems setting…
  • Page 399
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.5 Supplement (2) Setting the output data Input the No. of the data to be output to each D/A output channel. Abbrev Parameter name 3453 SP253 DA1NO D/A output channel 1 data No. 3454 SP254 DA2NO D/A output channel 2 data No. Standard setting value for output scale Standard…
  • Page 400
    8. Spindle Parameters 8.5 Supplement (3) Setting the output scale Abbrev Parameter name 3455 SP255 DA1MPY D/A output channel 1 magnification 3456 SP256 DA2MPY D/A output channel 2 magnification Usually, the standard setting value is set for the output scale (SV063, SV 064). When «0» is set, the output will be made as well as when «256»…
  • Page 401
    9. Machine Error Compensation 9.1 Function Outline 9. Machine Error Compensation 9.1 Function Outline Machine error compensation includes two independent functions: memorized pitch error compensation and memorized relative position compensation. (1) Memorized pitch error compensation According to the specified parameters‚ this method compensates an axis feed error caused by a ball screw pitch error‚…
  • Page 402
    9. Machine Error Compensation 9.1 Function Outline (2) Memorized relative position compensation This method‚ according to the parameters specified in advance‚ compensates the relative position error between two orthogonal axes caused by deflection of the moving stand. For this‚ as shown in Fig. 1. 2‚ specify the compensation amount in the compensation axis direction in the division points obtained by equally dividing the machine coordinates of the base axis.
  • Page 403
    9. Machine Error Compensation 9.1 Function Outline (SETUP PARAM 5. 1/15) Item Details Setting range 4000 Pinc Machine error Specify whether to use the incremental 0: Absolute volume (PR) offset increment amount method or absolute amount method method method when setting the machine error 1: Incremental compensation data.
  • Page 404
    9. Machine Error Compensation 9.1 Function Outline <2nd <3rd <4th <5th <6th <7th <8th <9th <10th axis> axis> axis> axis> axis> axis> axis> axis> axis> 4011 4021 4031 4041 4051 4061 4071 4081 4091 Set the parameters corresponding to the 1st 4012 4022 4032…
  • Page 405
    9. Mmachine Error Compensation 9.2 Setting Compensation Data 9.2 Setting Compensation Data Compensation data can be set according to either absolute or incremental system. «#4000:Pinc» 0: Absolute system 1: Incremental system (1) Absolute system Feed from the reference point to each division point is executed as shown in Fig. 2. 1. The following is obtained at this time.
  • Page 406
    9. Mmachine Error Compensation 9.2 Setting Compensation Data (3) Fig. 2. 3 contains a machine position that is placed in the negative direction with respect to the reference point. Assume that feed from division point n+1 to n by the division interval is executed. In this case‚ the following value is defined as the compensation amount: (Division interval + Actual movement distance) ×…
  • Page 407
    9. Machine Error Compensation 9.3 Example in Using a Linear Axis as the Base Axis 9.3 Example in Using a Linear Axis as the Base Axis (1) When «mdvno» or «pdvno» exists at both ends of «rdvno»: Compensation amount (-3) (-2) in incremental system Error…
  • Page 408
    9. Machine Error Compensation 9.3 Example in Using a Linear Axis as the Base Axis (2) When the range compensated is only the positive range: Compensation amount in incremental system (-2) Error #4115 #4113 #4114 #4116 #4117 Base axis machine coordinate (-2) Compensation amount…
  • Page 409
    9. Machine Error Compensation 9.3 Example in Using a Linear Axis as the Base Axis (3) When the range compensated is only the negative range: Compensation amount (-1) (-3) in incremental system Error #4125 #4126 #4127 #4128 #4129 #4130 Base axis machine coordinate (-1)
  • Page 410
    9. Machine Error Compensation 9.3 Example in Using a Linear Axis as the Base Axis (4) When compensation is executed in a range that contains no reference point: Compensation amount in (-1) (-1) incremental system Error #4135 #4136 #4137 #4138 #4139 #4140 Base axis machine…
  • Page 411
    9. Machine Error Compensation 9.4 Example in Using a Rotation Axis as the Base Axis 9.4 Example in Using a Rotation Axis as the Base Axis Compensation amount in incremental system (-2) (-3) Error #4123 #4124 #4125 #4126 #4127 #4128 360°…
  • Page 412
    10. PLC Constants 10.1 PLC Timer 10. PLC Constants 10.1 PLC Timer (SETUP PARAM 6. 1/14) to (SETUP PARAM 6. 2/14) PLC device Item Details Setting range 6000 T000 10ms adding Set the time for the timer used in the PLC 0 to 32767 (×10ms) timer <10ms>…
  • Page 413
    10. PLC Constants 10.3 PLC Constants 10.3 PLC Constants (SETUP PARAM 6. 4/14) PLC device Item Details Setting range 6301 R2800,2801 PLC constant Set the value to be set in the data type R -99999999 register used in the PLC program to 99999999 (ladder).
  • Page 414
    10. PLC Constants 10.4 Selecting the PLC Bit Table: «Contents of bit selection parameters #6449 to #6496» Symbol name NC card Setting #6449 Integrating display unit Counter C PLC counter PLC timer Controller R2924 L timer T thermal thermal retention program on program on retention…
  • Page 415
    10. PLC Constants 10.4 Selecting the PLC Bit Symbol name #6465 R2932 L #6466 R2932 H #6467 R2933 L #6468 R2933 H #6469 MC alarm 4 Standard PLC R2934 L parameter output off #6470 R2934 H #6471 R2935 L #6472 R2935 H #6473 R2936 L…
  • Page 416
    11. Macro List 11. Macro List (SETUP PARAM 7. 1/3) Item Details Setting range (unit) 7001 M [01] <Code> 1 to 9999 Set the M code used for calling out the macro with 7091 M [10] the M command. This is valid when #1195 Mmac is set to 1. 7002 <Type>…
  • Page 417
    11. Macro List (SETUP PARAM 7. 3/3) Item Details Setting range 7401 ASCII Valid The ASCII code macro parameters (#7402 to [01] 7405) are validated. 0: Invalid 1: Valid 7402 Code Set the ASCII code used to call macros with the L system: ASCII code.
  • Page 418
    12. Position Switch 12.1 Outline of Function 12. Position Switch 12.1 Outline of Function The position switch (PSW) is used as an alternate switch for the dog switch provided on an axis of the machine. The position switch uses parameters by which the names of axes and their corresponding coordinates indicating imaginary dog positions are defined in advance.
  • Page 419
    12. Position Switch 12.1 Outline of Function Position switch numbers of PSW1 to PSW8 and signal devices <axis> <dog1> <dog2> System 1 device System 2 device PSW1 #7501 #7502 #7503 X270 U0F0 PSW2 #7511 #7512 #7513 X271 U0F1 PSW3 #7521 #7522 #7523 X272…
  • Page 420
    12. Position Switch 12.2 Canceling the Position Switch Rotation axis Setting of dog1 and dog2 dog1, dog2 position Description dog1 < dog2 A signal is output dog2 dog1 between dog1 and (Example) dog1 = 30.000 dog2. dog2 = 330.000 A signal is also output dog1 dog2 when dog1 is negative.
  • Page 421
    13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter 13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter Turn the NC power OFF after setting parameters indicated with a (PR) in the table. The setting will be validated after the power is turned ON again. Default Name Details Setting range value Motor series Set the motor series.
  • Page 422
    13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter Default Name Details Setting range value Auto-tuning Set the adjustment of the auto-tuning. Do not set values without a description. 0 1 0 2 (Default setting value) Setting Details value Low response (low-rigidity loads, loads which easily vibrate) Standard setting value Standard setting value Standard setting value…
  • Page 423
    13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter Default Name Details Setting range value (Not used.) 16 JIT Jitter Set the No. of ignored jitter compensation pulses. Do not set values without a compensation description. Setting value Number of ignore No start pulses (Not used.) (Not used.) 19 PG2 Position loop…
  • Page 424
    13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter Default Name Details Setting range value 50 MD1 D/A output Set the Nos. of the data to be output on D/A output channel 1. channel 1 0 0 0 0 (Default setting value) data No. Setting Details Magnification value…
  • Page 425
    13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter Default Name Details Setting range value Cont1 Control This is a HEX setting parameter. Set bits without a description to their default (PR) parameter 1 values. Default value Meaning when «0» is set Meaning when «1» is set High-speed zero point return Dog-type return for each zero after establishment of zero point.
  • Page 426
    13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter Default Name Details Setting range value Cont2 Control This is a HEX setting parameter. Set bits without a description to their default (PR) parameter 2 values. Default value Meaning when «0» is set Meaning when «1» is set Error not corrected at servo OFF Error corrected at servo OFF Linear axis…
  • Page 427
    13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter Default Name Details Setting range value tleng Linear axis Set the movement stroke length for linear axes. 0.001 to 100.000 (PR) stroke This is meaningless when setting non-uniform 99999.999 length assignments or commanding random positions. (mm) 110 ZRNspeed Reference Set the clamp value of the feedrate when a 1 to 100000…
  • Page 428
    13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter Default Name Details Setting range value 120 ABS Type Absolute This parameter is set as a hexadecimal. Set the default value for bits that have position no description. detection parameter Default value Meaning when «0» is set Meaning when «1»…
  • Page 429
    13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter < Operation parameter group 1 > Default Name Details Setting range value Set the feedrate during automatic operation 150 Aspeed1 Operation 1 to 100000 5000 when operation parameter group 1 is selected. parameter (°/min or This parameter is regarded as the clamp value group 1 mm/min) for the automatic operation speeds and manual…
  • Page 430
    13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter Default Name Details Setting range value 154 TL1 Operation Set the motor output torque limit value when 1 to 500 (%) parameter operation parameter group 1 is selected. At group 1 the default value, the torque is limited at the Torque limit maximum torque of the motor specification.
  • Page 431
    13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter < Operation parameter group 2 > Default Name Details Setting range value Operation Set the feedrate during automatic operation 1 to 100000 5000 158 Aspeed2 parameter when operation parameter group 2 is selected. (°/min or group 2 mm/min) Automatic operation…
  • Page 432
    13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter Default Name Details Setting range value Operation Set the motor output torque limit value when 1 to 500 (%) 162 TL2 parameter operation parameter group 2 is selected. At the group 2 default value, the torque is limited at the maximum torque of the motor specifications.
  • Page 433
    13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter < Operation parameter group 3 > Default Name Details Setting range value 166 Aspeed3 Operation Set the feedrate during automatic operation when 1 to 100000 5000 parameter operation parameter group 3 is selected. (°/min or group 3 mm/min) Automatic operation…
  • Page 434
    13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter Default Name Details Setting range value Operation Set the motor output torque limit value when 1 to 500 (%) 170 TL3 parameter operation parameter group 3 is selected. At the group 3 default value, the torque is limited at the maximum torque of the motor specifications.
  • Page 435
    13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter < Operation parameter group 4 > Default Name Details Setting range value 174 Aspeed4 Operation Set the feedrate during automatic operation when 1 to 100000 5000 parameter operation parameter group 4 is selected. (°/min or group 4 mm/min) Automatic operation…
  • Page 436
    13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter Default Name Details Setting range value Operation Set the motor output torque limit value when 1 to 500 (%) 178 TL4 parameter operation parameter group 4 is selected. At the group 4 default value, the torque is limited at the maximum torque of the motor specifications.
  • Page 437
    13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter Default Name Details Setting range value 190 stpos2 Station 2 Set the coordinate value of each station when -99999.999 to 0.000 coordinate non-uniform assignment is selected. 99999.999 value The station 1 coordinate value is fixed at 0.000 (°…
  • Page 438
    13. Auxiliary Axis Parameter Default Name Details Setting range value PSW1dog1 PSW1 area When the machine position is in the region -99999.999 to 0.000 PSW1dog2 setting 1 between region settings 1 and 2, the position 99999.999 PSW1 area switch of each No. will turn ON. (°…
  • Page 439
    Revision History Date of revision Manual No. Revision details Jul. 1997 BNP-B2201* First edition created. May 2000 BNP-B2201B(C) Addition (modification) • Addition or modification of M64 additional parameters and alarms • Addition of M65 and M66 parameters and alarms • Correction of parameter names •…
  • Page 440
    Global Service Network AMERICA EUROPE MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION INC. ( AMERICA FA CENTER) MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. (EUROPE FA CENTER) Central Region Service Center GOTHAER STRASSE 10, 40880 RATINGEN, GERMANY 500 CORPORATE WOODS PARKWAY, VERNON HILLS, IL., 60061, U.S.A. TEL: +49-2102-486-0 / FAX: +49-2102-486-5910…
  • Page 441
    MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION (SHANGHAI) LTD. (CHINA FA CENTER) Singapore Service Center China (Shanghai) Service Center 307 ALEXANDRA ROAD #05-01/02 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC BUILDING SINGAPORE 159943 4/F ZHI FU PLAZA, NO. 80 XIN CHANG ROAD, TEL: +65-6473-2308 / FAX: +65-6476-7439 SHANGHAI 200003,CHINA TEL: +86-21-2322-3030 / FAX: +86-21-2322-2800    China (Ningbo) Service Dealer…
  • Page 442
    Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions in the contents described in this manual. However, please understand that in some unavoidable cases simultaneous revision is not possible. Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric dealer with any questions or comments regarding the use of this product. Duplication Prohibited This instruction manual may not be reproduced in any form, in part or in whole, without written permission from Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.

  1. Инструкции и руководства
  2. Бренды
  3. Mitsubishi Electronics
  4. 60/60S
  5. Справочник Пользователя

  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Mitsubishi Electric Manuals
  4. Control Systems
  5. MELDAS 60 Series
  6. Maintenance manual
  • Contents

  • Table of Contents

  • Troubleshooting

  • Bookmarks

Quick Links

Downloaded from

ManualsNet.com

search engine

loading

Related Manuals for Mitsubishi Electric MELDAS 60 Series

Summary of Contents for Mitsubishi Electric MELDAS 60 Series

  • Page 1
    Downloaded from ManualsNet.com search engine…
  • Page 2
    MELDAS is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. Other company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Downloaded from ManualsNet.com search engine…
  • Page 3
    Introduction (1) Read this manual thoroughly and understand the product’s functions and performance before starting use. (2) An effort has been made to describe special handling of this machine, but items that are not described must be interpreted as «not possible». (3) The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
  • Page 4
    Precautions for Safety Always read the specifications issued by the machine manufacturer, this manual, related manuals and enclosed documents before installation, operation, programming, maintenance or inspection to ensure correct use. Thoroughly understand the basics, safety information and precautions of this numerical controller before using the unit.
  • Page 5
    CAUTION 1. Items related to noise Always treat the shield cables indicated in this manual with grounding treatment such as cable clamps. Separate the signal wire from the drive line/power line when wiring. 2. Items related to installation Install the NC Card on noncombustible material. Installation directly on or near combustible material may lead to fires.
  • Page 6: Table Of Contents

    CONTENTS I. CONNECTION MANUAL 1. OUTLINE……………………1 2. CONFIGURATION ………………….2 2.1 System Configuration List………………2 2.1.1 M64A/M64 System Configuration List…………2 2.1.2 M64AS/M64S/M65/M65S/M66/M66S System Configuration List ….3 2.2 List of Configuration Units ………………4 2.2.1 Control Unit ………………..4 2.2.2 Communication Terminal …………….5 2.2.3 Base I/O Unit………………..6 2.2.4 Remote I/O Unit …………………7 2.2.5 Scan I/O Card ………………..7 2.2.6 Extended I/O Card ………………7…

  • Page 7
    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL ……………….36 5.1 Outline of Communication Terminal …………..36 5.1.1 Configuration of Type………………36 5.1.2 Features of Each Unit ………………36 5.2 FCU6-DUT32 Display Unit (10.4-type monochrome LCD) ……..37 5.2.1 Names and Functions of Each Section…………37 5.2.2 Connection of Power Supply…………….38 5.2.3 Connection of Control Unit…………….38 5.2.4 Connection of NC Keyboard …………….38 5.2.5 Connection of Remote I/O Unit …………..39…
  • Page 8
    6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT …………….74 6.1 Outline of I/O Unit ………………..74 6.1.1 Configuration of model name……………..74 6.1.2 Configuration and functions of each unit…………74 6.2 Base I/O Unit Connection System Drawing…………75 6.3 Connection of Power Supply ……………..78 6.4 Connection of I/O Signal………………79 6.5 Example of Remote I/O Unit Connection……………81 6.6 Connection of Servo Drive Unit …………….82 6.7 Connection of Synchronous Feed Encoder…………83…
  • Page 9
    10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378 ……132 10.1 Connection System Drawing …………….132 10.2 Connection of Power Supply …………….135 10.2.1 Connection of 1st Card’s Power Supply…………135 10.2.2 Connection of 2nd Card’s Power Supply ………….136 10.3 Connection of DI/DO Signal …………….137 10.4 Example of Remote I/O Unit Connection………….141 10.5 Connection of Servo Drive Unit …………….142 10.6 Connection of Synchronous Feed Encoder…………143…
  • Page 10
    Appendix 1.2.11 FCU6-KB022…………….182 Appendix 1.2.12 Key Arrangement ……………..183 Appendix 1.3 Base I/O Unit Outline Drawing……………184 Appendix 1.4 Remote I/O Unit Outline Drawing …………185 Appendix 1.5 HR347/357 (Scan I/O) Card Outline Drawing……..186 Appendix 1.6 FCU6-HR377 Unit Outline Drawing…………187 Appendix 1.7 FCU6-HR378 Unit Outline Drawing…………188 Appendix 1.8 QY231 Card Outline Drawing …………..189 Appendix 1.9 Example of Control Unit and FCU6-HR377 Layout …….190 Appendix 1.10 Example of Control Unit and FCU6-HR378 Layout ……191…
  • Page 11
    APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES…………220 Appendix 4.1 Introduction………………..220 Appendix 4.2 EMC Directives………………221 Appendix 4.3 EMC Measures………………222 Appendix 4.4 Panel Structure………………223 Appendix 4.4.1 Measures for Control Panel Body ……….223 Appendix 4.4.2 Measures for Door ……………..224 Appendix 4.4.3 Measures for Power Supply…………225 Appendix 4.5 Measures for Wiring in Panel …………..226 Appendix 4.5.1 Precautions for Wiring in Panel…………226 Appendix 4.5.2 NC Unit Grounding Wire …………..227…
  • Page 12
    II. MAINTENANCE MANUAL 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS ……………1 1.1 HR071 Card………………….1 1.2 HR081/082/083 Card…………………2 1.3 HR111/113/114/146 Card………………4 1.4 HR171 Card………………….6 1.5 HR211 Card………………….8 1.6 HR325, 327, 335, 337 Cards……………..9 1.7 HR357 Card………………….11 1.8 HR377 Card………………….13 1.9 HR378 Card………………….15 1.10 Memory Cassette HR4 ……………..18 1.11 HR513 Card………………….19 1.12 HR531/534 Cards………………..21…
  • Page 13: Connection Manual

    I. CONNECTION MANUAL Downloaded from ManualsNet.com search engine…

  • Page 14: Outline

    1. OUTLINE 1. OUTLINE This manual explains the items required for installing and connecting the MELDAS60/60S Series. Read this manual thoroughly and understand the product’s functions and performance before starting use. This manual assumes that all functions are added, but the actually delivered device may not have all functions.

  • Page 15: Configuration

    2. CONFIGURATION 2.1 System Configuration List 2. CONFIGURATION 2.1 System Configuration List 2.1.1 M64A/M64 System Configuration List Downloaded from ManualsNet.com search engine…

  • Page 16: M64As/M64S/M65/M65S/M66/M66S System Configuration List

    2. CONFIGURATION 2.1 System Configuration List 2.1.2 M64AS/M64S/M65/M65S/M66/M66S System Configuration List Downloaded from ManualsNet.com search engine…

  • Page 17: List Of Configuration Units

    2. CONFIGURATION 2.2 List of Configuration Units 2.2 List of Configuration Units 2.2.1 Control Unit (1) Control unit Type Function Configuration element Details M64 control unit set Main control card (HR113) Export Trade Control Ordinance and FCU6-MU011 FCA64A-B, FCA64-B system 24V input power supply card (HR083) Foreign Trade Ordinance compatible unit…

  • Page 18: Communication Terminal

    2. CONFIGURATION 2.2 List of Configuration Units 2.2.2 Communication Terminal Type Function Configuration element Details FCU6-DUT32 10.4-type monochrome LCD 10.4-type LCD, Escutcheon Used as a set with FCUA-KB20. display unit (separated type) Control card (RX215) Control card 24VDC input FCU6-DUN22 8.4-type color LCD unit 8.4-type LCD,Escutcheon Used as a set with FCU6-KB022…

  • Page 19: Base I/O Unit

    2. CONFIGURATION 2.2 List of Configuration Units 2.2.3 Base I/O Unit Type Function Configuration element Details FCU6-DX350 Sink input + sink output I/O card (HR325) DI/DO input/output sink input 48 points + sink base I/O unit Aluminum panel for panel output 48 points installation Synchronous feed encoder interface 1ch, Skip…

  • Page 20: Remote I/O Unit

    2. CONFIGURATION 2.2 List of Configuration Units 2.2.4 Remote I/O Unit Configuration Type Function Details element FCUA-DX100 Sink/source input + sink output RX311 DI/DO = 32 points/32 points FCUA-DX110 Sink/source input + sink output RX311 + RX321-1 DI/DO = 64 points/48 points FCUA-DX120 Sink/source input + sink output RX311 + RX321…

  • Page 21: Installation

    3. INSTALLATION 3.1 General Specification 3. INSTALLATION 3.1 General Specification (1) Environment conditions in control part Unit name Control unit Type FCU6-MU011/MU015/MU021/MU023/MU032/MA031/MA034 During operation 0 to 55°C Ambient temperature During storage –20 to 60°C Long term, to 75% RH (with no dew condensation) During operation Ambient Short term, to 95% RH (with no dew condensation) (Note 1)

  • Page 22
    3. INSTALLATION 3.1 General Specification Unit name Communication terminal FCU6- FCUA-CT FCUA- FCUA- FCUA- FCUA- FCUA- FCU6-DUT32 DUN22 100/120 CR10 EL10 KB10/ KB20/30 LD10/ 100 FCU6-DUN33 Type KB12 FCU6- KB021/ 022/031 Ambient During operation 0 to 55°C 0 to 50°C tempe- During storage –20 to 65°C…
  • Page 23: General System Diagram

    3. INSTALLATION 3.2 General System Diagram 3.2 General System Diagram 3.2.1 M64A/M64 Com m un ic ation term ina l R S T 3-phase 200VAC to 230VAC CT 100/C T120/D UT 32/D U N33/LD 100/LD10/C R 10 / -15%, +10% KB10/KB12/KB 20 /K B021/KB30/KB031 Circuit protector R emote I/O unit…

  • Page 24: M64As/M64S/M65/M65S/M66/M66S

    3. INSTALLATION 3.2 General System Diagram 3.2.2 M64AS/M64S/M65/M65S/M66/M66S C om m unica tio n t erm ina l 3-phase 200VAC to 230VAC R S T C T100/C T 120/D U T3 2/D U N 33/LD 100/LD 10/ CR 10/DU N 22(N ote 1)/ -15%, +10% KB10/KB1 2/K B20/KB021/KB30/KB03 1/K B022(N ote 1) Circuit protector…

  • Page 25: Example Of Connection When Using V1/V2/Sp For Drive Section

    3. INSTALLATION 3.2 General System Diagram 3.2.3 Example of Connection when Using V1/V2/SP for Drive Section 3-phase 200VAC to 230VAC R S T Cirquit protector Connect to base I/O unit Note (1) (Absolute position detection (Absolute value specification) Servo drive unit system specification) Spindle drive unit MDS- □…

  • Page 26: Heat Radiation Countermeasures

    3. INSTALLATION 3.3 Heat Radiation Countermeasures 3.3 Heat Radiation Countermeasures Please refer to following method for heat radiation countermeasures. Example of heat radiation countermeasures <Hypothetical conditions> (1) Average temperature in cabinet : T ≤ 55°C (2) Cabinet peripheral temperature : Ta ≤ 0°C to 45°C (3) Internal temperature rise value : ∆…

  • Page 27
    3. INSTALLATION 3.3 Heat Radiation Countermeasures The following shows an example of heat radiation countermeasures for the operation box. Because heat will accumulate in the upper portions of the communication terminal, install an agitating fan as required. <Operation box outline example (provisional)> Heat radiation area (A): Communication except front, bottom surface…
  • Page 28: Noise Countermeasures

    3. INSTALLATION 3.4 Noise Countermeasures 3.4 Noise Countermeasures 3.4.1 Connection of FG (Frame Ground) The frame should basically be grounded at one ground point. Connect the control unit and base I/O unit’s 0V (RG) to the FG on the +24V stabilized power supply side. Communication terminal I-15 Downloaded from…

  • Page 29: Shield Clamping Of Cables

    3. INSTALLATION 3.4 Noise Countermeasures 3.4.2 Shield Clamping of Cables The shield cable connected to the control unit, base I/O unit, servo drive unit and spindle drive unit must be connected to the ground by using clamp fitting to stabilize operation while preventing malfunctioning due to noise.

  • Page 30: Connecting Spark Killers

    3. INSTALLATION 3.4 Noise Countermeasures 3.4.3 Connecting Spark Killers Connect a spark killer on the coil or contact in parallel for noise countermeasures. Use spark killers which are 0.033 to 0.1µF, 10 to 120Ω. Contact Spark killer Coil I-17 Downloaded from ManualsNet.com search engine…

  • Page 31: Installation

    3. INSTALLATION 3.5 Installation 3.5 Installation Each unit is installed in the sealed structure cabinet as a principle. Before installing into the cabinet, refer to the following drawing and secure sufficient space allowing for each unit’s heat dissipation and cable wiring lead-in space.

  • Page 32: Fg Connection Of M64As/64S/65/65S/66/66S

    3. INSTALLATION 3.6 Connection of M64AS/64S/65/65S/66/66S FG 3.6 FG Connection of M64AS/64S/65/65S/66/66S The communication card HR171 used with the M64AS/64S/65/65S/66/66S must be connected to a dedicated FG wire separate from the control unit FG. Refer to the FG cable drawing and separately connect to the HR171 card FG terminal TFG.

  • Page 33: Control Unit

    4. CONTROL UNIT 4.1 Outline of Control Unit 4. CONTROL UNIT 4.1 Outline of Control Unit The installation methods for the control unit are common for all series. Select the optimum NC system that matches the application from the various types of units. MELDAS64/64A control unit MELDAS64AS/64S/65/65S/66/66S control unit…

  • Page 34: Fcu6-Mu011 Control Unit (Meldas64 Compatible)

    4. CONTROL UNIT 4.2 FCU6-MU011 Control Unit (MELDAS64 compatible) 4.2 FCU6-MU011 Control Unit (MELDAS64 compatible) The FCU6-MU011 unit is explained in this section. This unit is the NC control unit for the MELDAS64/64A. 4.2.1 Names and Functions of Each Section Front view CBUS 1 CBUS 2…

  • Page 35: Connection Of Power Supply

    4. CONTROL UNIT 4.2 FCU6-MU011 Control Unit (MELDAS64 compatible) 4.2.2 Connection of Power Supply 24VDC is supplied from the «DCIN» connector at the bottom of the control unit. DCIN Ex.FCU6-MU0 Stabilized power supply 24VDC 0V(RG) FCUA-R220 cable AC(H) AC(N) 200VAC Turn the control unit power ON after turning or simultaneously with the turning ON of the peripheral units (servo drive unit, remote I/O, etc.).

  • Page 36: Connection Of Communication Terminal

    4. CONTROL UNIT 4.2 FCU6-MU011 Control Unit (MELDAS64 compatible) 4.2.4 Connection of Communication Terminal Connect the cable for connecting the communication terminal to the «AUX1» connector on the bottom of the control unit. AUX1 CR02 Ex.FCU6-MU0 SH21 cable (FCUA-R000 cable) The partner side connection destination name is «CR02».

  • Page 37: Connection Of I/O Link (When Using M64)

    4. CONTROL UNIT 4.2 FCU6-MU011 Control Unit (MELDAS64 compatible) 4.2.7 Connection of I/O Link (When using M64) The I/O link is a function used to exchange various data between NC units. (System option function) Connect the «AUX2» connectors found on the front of each control unit. Up to four salve NC units can be connected to one master NC unit.

  • Page 38
    4. CONTROL UNIT 4.2 FCU6-MU011 Control Unit (MELDAS64 compatible) Connecting a unit using the HR531B/532B card In some initially produced control units, the I/O link system was configured with the HR531B card, on which the terminator was mounted, and the HR532B card, on which the terminator was not mounted.
  • Page 39: Connector Pin Assignment

    4. CONTROL UNIT 4.2 FCU6-MU011 Control Unit (MELDAS64 compatible) 4.2.8 Connector Pin Assignment Power input terminal (24VDC) <Cable side connector type> 24VDC DCIN Connector : 2-178288-3 0V(RG) Contact : 1-175218-5 Recommended manufacturer: Tyco Electronics AMP External emergency stop connection terminal <Cable side connector type>…

  • Page 40
    4. CONTROL UNIT 4.2 FCU6-MU011 Control Unit (MELDAS64 compatible) Base I/O unit connection terminal CF10 TXRX1* TXRX1 TXRX2* TXRX2 SKIP1* SKIP1 SKIP2* SKIP2 SKIP3* SKIP3 SKIP4* SKIP4 SKIP5 SKIP5* SKIP6* SKIP6 SKIP7* SKIP7 SKIP8* SKIP8 <Cable side connector type> ENC1A* ENC1A Plug : 10150-6000EL ENC1B*…
  • Page 41
    4. CONTROL UNIT 4.2 FCU6-MU011 Control Unit (MELDAS64 compatible) Communication terminal connection terminal EN_RT AUX1 RXD* TXD* <Cable side connector type> Plug : 10120-6000EL Shell : 10320-3210-00 (Connect the connector case to shield.) Recommended manufacturer: 3M I/O link connection terminal AUX2 EN_RT RXD*…
  • Page 42: Fcu6-Mu021/Mu032/Ma031 Control Unit

    4. CONTROL UNIT 4.3 FCU6-MU021/MA031 Control Unit (MELDAS64AS/M64S/65/65S/66/66S compatible) 4.3 FCU6-MU021/MU032/MA031 Control Unit (MELDAS64AS/M64S/65/65S/66/66S compatible) The FCU6-MU021/MU032/MA031 unit is explained in this section. This unit is the NC control unit for the MELDAS64AS/M64S/65/65S/66/66S. 4.3.1 Names and Functions of Each Section Front view Bottom view Connector name…

  • Page 43: Connection Of Power Supply

    4. CONTROL UNIT 4.3 FCU6-MU021/MA031 Control Unit (MELDAS64AS/M64S/65/65S/66/66S compatible) 4.3.2 Connection of Power Supply 24VDC is supplied from the «DCIN» connector at the bottom of the control unit. DCIN Stabilized power supply Ex.FCU6-MU021/031 24VDC 0V(RG) FCUA-R220 cable AC(H) AC(N) 200VAC Turn the control unit power ON after turning or simultaneously with the turning ON of the peripheral units (servo drive unit, remote I/O, etc.).

  • Page 44: Connection Of Communication Terminal

    4. CONTROL UNIT 4.3 FCU6-MU021/MA031 Control Unit (MELDAS64AS/M64S/65/65S/66/66S compatible) 4.3.4 Connection of Communication Terminal Connect the cable for connecting the communication terminal to the «AUX1» connector on the bottom of the control unit. Ex.FCU6-MU021/MU032/MA031 CR02 AUX1 (SH21 cable) FCUA-R000 cable The partner side connection is «CR02».

  • Page 45: Connection Of I/O Link (When Using Meldas64As/M64S/65/65S/66/66S)

    4. CONTROL UNIT 4.3 FCU6-MU021/MA031 Control Unit (MELDAS64AS/M64S/65/65S/66/66S compatible) 4.3.7 Connection of I/O Link (When using MELDAS64AS/M64S/65/65S/66/66S) The I/O link is a function used to exchange various data between NC units. (System option function) Connect the «AUX2» connectors found on the front of each control unit. Up to three salve NC units can be connected to one master NC unit.

  • Page 46: Connector Pin Assignment

    4. CONTROL UNIT 4.3 FCU6-MU021/MA031 Control Unit (MELDAS64AS/M64S/65/65S/66/66S compatible) 4.3.8 Connector Pin Assignment Power input terminal (24VDC) <Cable side connector type> 24VDC DCIN Connector : 2-178288-3 0V(RG) Contact : 1-175218-5 Recommended manufacturer: Tyco Electronics AMP External emergency connection terminal <Cable side connector type> Connector : 51030-0330 EMG IN Contact…

  • Page 47
    4. CONTROL UNIT 4.3 FCU6-MU021/MA031 Control Unit (MELDAS64AS/M64S/65/65S/66/66S compatible) Base I/O unit connection terminal TXRX1 TXRX1* CF10 TXRX2 TXRX2* SKIP1 SKIP1* SKIP2 SKIP2* SKIP3 SKIP3* SKIP4 SKIP4* SKIP5 SKIP5* SKIP6 SKIP6* SKIP7 SKIP7* SKIP8 SKIP8* ENC1A ENC1A* <Cable side connector type> ENC1B ENC1B* ENC1Z…
  • Page 48
    4. CONTROL UNIT 4.3 FCU6-MU021/MA031 Control Unit (MELDAS64AS/M64S/65/65S/66/66S compatible) Communication terminal connection terminal AUX1 EN_RT RXD* TXD* <Cable side connector type> Plug : 10120-6000EL Shell : 10320-3210-00 Recommended manufacturer: 3M I/O link connection terminal AUX2 EN_RT RXD* TXD* <Cable side connector type> Plug : 10120-6000EL Shell : 10320-3210-00 Recommended manufacturer: 3M…
  • Page 49: Communication Terminal

    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.1 Outline of Communication Terminal 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.1 Outline of Communication Terminal The communication terminal is configured of the display unit and keyboard unit. The optimum terminal can be selected from the following combinations. Communication terminal M I T SU B ISH I Keyboard unit Display unit…

  • Page 50: Fcu6-Dut32 Display Unit (10.4-Type Monochrome Lcd)

    The FCU6-KB021/KB031 NC keyboard can be connected to this unit. 5.2.1 Names and Functions of Each Section Back view (10) OPERATION BOARD DATE:9910 Contrast. UNIT TYPE : FCU6-DUT32 H//W Ver.A (11) CNZ22 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION CNZ22A CR01 CNZ24 CR03 CR02 CR05 CR06 J2 cable (for menu keys) Connector name Function explanation Select the type of keyboard connected.

  • Page 51: Connection Of Power Supply

    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.2 FCU6-DUT32 Display Unit (10.4-type monochrome LCD) 5.2.2 Connection of Power Supply 24VDC is supplied from the «CR01» connector on the back of the communication terminal. FCUA-R220 cable CR01 Stabilized power supply 24VDC Select a stabilized power supply that 0V(RG) satisfies the following specifications.

  • Page 52: Connection Of Remote I/O Unit

    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.2 FCU6-DUT32 Display Unit (10.4-type monochrome LCD) 5.2.5 Connection of Remote I/O Unit Connect to the remote I/O unit from the «CR05» connector on the back of the communication terminal. The scan I/O card (HR347/357) and expansion I/O card (QY231) can be connected in addition to the remote I/O unit.

  • Page 53: Connector Pin Assignment

    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.2 FCU6-DUT32 Display Unit (10.4-type monochrome LCD) 5.2.7 Connector Pin Assignment Power input terminal <Cable side connector type> (24VDC) Connector : 2-178288-3 1 I 24VDC Contact : 1-175218-5 CR01 0V(RG) Recommended manufacturer: Tyco Electronics AMP Remote I/O connection terminal <Cable side connector type>…

  • Page 54
    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.2 FCU6-DUT32 Display Unit (10.4-type monochrome LCD) NC keyboard J2 terminal connection cable (FCU6-KB021/KB031) 2 I SC1 2 I SC0 3 I SC3 3 I SC2 4 I SC5 4 I SC4 5 I SC6 6 O KD7 LCD display signal output terminal CNZ24 DISPOFF*…
  • Page 55: Fcu6-Dun33 Display Unit (10.4-Type Color Lcd)

    The FCU6-KB021/KB031 NC keyboard can be connected to this unit. 5.3.1 Names and Functions of Each Section Back view (13) DATE:9910 OPERATION BOARD H//W Ver.A UNIT TYPE : FCU6-DUT32 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION (12) (16) CR01 CBP18 (11) CF02 CR03 (15)

  • Page 56: Connection Of Power Supply

    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.3 FCU6-DUN33 Display Unit (10.4-type color LCD) 5.3.2 Connection of Power Supply 24VDC is supplied from the CR01-1 cable enclosed with FCU6-DUN33. CR01-1 cable FCUA-R220 cable Stabilized power supply Connect Select a stabilized power supply that CR01 CBP18 24VDC satisfies the following specifications.

  • Page 57: Connection Of Remote I/O Unit

    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.3 FCU6-DUN33 Display Unit (10.4-type color LCD) 5.3.5 Connection of Remote I/O Unit Connect to the remote I/O unit from the «CR05» connector on the back of the communication terminal. The scan I/O (HR347/357) and expansion I/O card (QY231) can be connected in addition to the remote I/O unit.

  • Page 58: Connector Pin Assignment

    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.3 FCU6-DUN33 Display Unit (10.4-type color LCD) 5.3.6 Connector Pin Assignment Power input terminal <Cable side connector type> (24VDC) Connector : 2-178288-3 1 I 24VDC Contact : 1-175218-5 CR01 0V (RG) Recommended manufacturer: CBP18 Tyco Electronics AMP Remote I/O connection terminal CR05 <Cable side connector type>…

  • Page 59
    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.3 FCU6-DUN33 Display Unit (10.4-type color LCD) NC keyboard J2 terminal connection cable (FCU6-KB021/KB031) 2 I SC1 2 I SC0 3 I SC3 3 I SC2 4 I SC5 4 I SC4 5 I SC6 6 O KD7 LCD display signal output terminal DISPOFF* DISPOFF*…
  • Page 60
    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.3 FCU6-DUN33 Display Unit (10.4-type color LCD) Inverter power output 1 I 12VDC <Cable side connector type> CR06 Connector : 51030-0530 Contact : 50083-8160 Recommended manufacturer: MOLEX Backlight inverter power input terminal VDDB(12V) <Cable side connector type> VDDB(12V) Connector : LZ-5S-SC3 GND B…
  • Page 61: Fcu6-Dun22 Display Unit (8.4-Type Color Lcd)

    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.4 FCU6-DUN22 Display Unit (8.4-type color LCD) 5.4 FCU6-DUN22 Display Unit (8.4-type color LCD) The 8.4-type color LCD communication terminal is described in this section. The FCU6-KB022 NC keyboard can be connected to this unit. 5.4.1 Names and Functions of Each Section Back view (15) (11)

  • Page 62: Connection Of Power Supply

    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.4 FCU6-DUN22 Display Unit (8.4-type color LCD) 5.4.2 Connection of Power Supply 24VDC is supplied from the «CR01» connector on the back of the communication terminal. FCUA-R220 CR01 Cable Stabilized power supply Select a stabilized power supply that satisfies 24VDC the following specifications.

  • Page 63: Connection Of Nc Keyboard

    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.4 FCU6-DUN22 Display Unit (8.4-type color LCD) 5.4.4 Connection of NC Keyboard Connect the F054 cable connected to the «J1» connector on the NC keyboard to the «NCKB» connector. Connect the J2 cable for the menu keys to the «J2» connector on the NC keyboard. FCU6-KB022 F054 Cable NCKB…

  • Page 64: Connection Of Remote I/O Unit

    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.4 FCU6-DUN22 Display Unit (8.4-type color LCD) 5.4.5 Connection of Remote I/O Unit Connect to the remote I/O unit from the «CR05» connector on the back of the communication terminal. The scan I/O card (HR347/357) and expansion I/O card (QY231) can be connected in addition to the remote I/O unit.

  • Page 65: Connector Pin Assignment

    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.4 FCU6-DUN22 Display Unit (8.4-type color LCD) 5.4.7 Connector Pin Assignment Power input terminal (24VDC) CR01 <Cable side connector type> 24VDC Connector: 2-178288-3 0V(RG) Contact: 1-175218-5 Recommended manufacturer: Tyco Electronics AMP Remote I/O connection terminal CR05 <Cable side connector type> TXRX Connector: 1-178288-3 TXRX*…

  • Page 66
    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.4 FCU6-DUN22 Display Unit (8.4-type color LCD) NC keyboard J2 terminal connection cable (FCU6-KB022) SC11 SC13 SC15 SC17 KBD3 KBD2 LCD display signal output terminal DCLK Hsync Vsync <Cable side connector type> Connector: DF9-31S-1V Recommended manufacturer: Hirose Electrics DENA 3VDD 3VDD…
  • Page 67: Fcua-Ld10/Ld100 Display Unit (7.2-Type Monochrome Lcd)

    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.5 FCUA-LD10/LD100 Display Unit (7.2-type monochrome LCD) 5.5 FCUA-LD10/LD100 Display Unit (7.2-type monochrome LCD) The thin-type monochrome LCD communication terminal is described in this section. The FCUA-KB20/KB30 NC keyboard can be connected to the FCUA-LD10 unit. The FCUA-LD100 unit integrates the FCUA-LD10 and FCUA-KB20. 5.5.1 Names and Functions of Each Section (12) Back view…

  • Page 68: Connection Of Power Supply

    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.5 FCUA-LD10/LD100 Display Unit (7.2-type monochrome LCD) 5.5.2 Connection of Power Supply 24VDC is supplied from the «CR01» connector on the back of the communication terminal. FCUA-R220 cable CR01 Stabilized power supply 24VDC Select a stabilized power supply that 0V(RG) satisfies the following specifications.

  • Page 69: Connection Of Remote I/O Unit

    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.5 FCUA-LD10/LD100 Display Unit (7.2-type monochrome LCD) 5.5.5 Connection of Remote I/O Unit Connect to the remote I/O unit from the «CR05» connector on the back of the display unit. The scan I/O (HR347/357) and expansion I/O card (QY231) can be connected in addition to the remote I/O unit.

  • Page 70: Adjustment Of Display Screen

    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.5 FCUA-LD10/LD100 Display Unit (7.2-type monochrome LCD) 5.5.6 Adjustment of Display Screen The LCD display screen is set to the optimum display looking from the front. However, this may be difficult to view depending on the installation position. Adjust with the following items in this case. 1.

  • Page 71: Connector Pin Assignment

    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.5 FCUA-LD10/LD100 Display Unit (7.2-type monochrome LCD) 5.5.7 Connector Pin Assignment Power input terminal <Cable side connector type> (24VDC) Connector : 2-178288-3 1 I 24VDC Contact : 1-175218-5 CR01 0V (RG) Recommended manufacturer: Tyco Electronics AMP Remote I/O unit connection terminal CR05 <Cable side connector type>…

  • Page 72
    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.5 FCUA-LD10/LD100 Display Unit (7.2-type monochrome LCD) NC keyboard J2 terminal connection cable (FCUA-KB20/KB30) 2 I SC1 2 I SC0 3 I SC3 3 I SC2 4 I SC5 4 I SC4 5 I SC6 6 O KD7 LCD display signal output terminal CNZ24 DISPOFF*…
  • Page 73: Fcua-El10 Display Unit (9.5-Type El) * Cannot Be Used With M60S Series

    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.6 FCUA-EL10 Display Unit (9.5-type EL) 5.6 FCUA-EL10 Display Unit (9.5-type EL) * Cannot be used with M60S Series. The thin-type EL communication terminal is described in this section. The FCUA-KB10/KB12 NC keyboard can be connected to the FCUA-EL10 unit. 5.6.1 Names and Functions of Each Section Back view Accessory…

  • Page 74: Connection Of Nc Keyboard Unit

    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.6 FCUA-EL10 Display Unit (9.5-type EL) 5.6.3 Connection of NC Keyboard Unit Connect the CR04-2 cable to the FCUA-KB10/KB12 «CR04» connector. Connect the J2 cable to the NC keyboard’s «J2» connector. The FCUA-EL10 (9.5-type EL) power is supplied from the CR04 connector via the CR04-2 cable. FCUA-KB10/KB12 CR03 cable CR04…

  • Page 75: Fcua-Cr10/Ct100/Ct120 Display Unit (9-Type Monochrome Crt)

    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.7 FCUA-CR10/CT100/CT120 Display Unit (9-type monochrome CRT) 5.7 FCUA-CR10/CT100/CT120 Display Unit (9-type monochrome CRT) The CRT type communication terminal is described in this section. The FCUA-CT100 unit integrates the FCUA-CR10 and FCUA-KB10/KB12. The FCUA-CT120 unit is integrated with the FCUA-CT100 lathe system keyboard. 5.7.1 Names and Functions of Each Section Back view Accessory…

  • Page 76: Connection Of Power Supply

    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.7 FCUA-CR10/CT100/CT120 Display Unit (9-type monochrome CRT) 5.7.3 Connection of Power Supply 100VAC is supplied from the FCUA-R100 cable on the back of the communication terminal. Power input terminal (100VAC to 115VAC, 0.4A) FCUA-R100 cable Switch AC IN AC OUT Use a double-OFF type that completely cuts off the circuit when turning the power ON and OFF.

  • Page 77: Fcua-Kb10/Kb12/Kb20/Kb30 And Fcu6-Kb021/Kb022/031 Nc Keyboard Unit

    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.8 FCUA-KB10/KB12/KB20/KB30 and FCU6-KB021/KB022/031 NC Keyboard Unit 5.8 FCUA-KB10/KB12/KB20/KB30 and FCU6-KB021/KB022/031 NC Keyboard Unit The NC keyboard unit for the communication terminal is described in this section. This unit is a separable type. The integrated type is designated with the communication type. Combination of keyboard unit and display unit Keyboard type Compatible display unit type…

  • Page 78: Connection Of Control Unit

    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.8 FCUA-KB10/KB12/KB20/KB30 and FCU6-KB021/KB022/031 NC Keyboard Unit 5.8.2 Connection of Control Unit Connect the cable from the control unit to the FCUA-KB10/KB12 unit’s «CR02» connector. FCUA-KB20/30 and FCU6-KB021/KB022/KB031 do not have a connection. Ex.FCA64 FCUA-KB10/KB12 FCUA-KB10 CR03 CR01 AUX1 SH21 cable…

  • Page 79
    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.8 FCUA-KB10/KB12/KB20/KB30 and FCU6-KB021/KB022/031 NC Keyboard Unit For FCU6-KB022 FCU6-DUN22 FCU6-KB022 F054 Cable NCKB J2 Cable CAUTION Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector. Doing so may lead to destruction or damage. Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors.
  • Page 80: Connection Of Power Supply

    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.8 FCUA-KB10/KB12/KB20/KB30 and FCU6-KB021/KB022/031 NC Keyboard Unit 5.8.4 Connection of Power Supply Supply 24VDC from the FCUA-KB10/KB12 CR01 connector. FCUA-KB20/30 and FCU6-KB021/KB022/KB031 do not have a power supply terminal. FCUA-KB10 FCUA-KB10/KB12 FCUA-R220 cable CR03 CR01 Stabilized power supply Select a stabilized power supply that satisfies the following specifications.

  • Page 81: Connector Pin Assignment

    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.8 FCUA-KB10/KB12/KB20/KB30 and FCU6-KB021/KB022/031 NC Keyboard Unit 5.8.5 Connector Pin Assignment Power input terminal (24VDC) CR01 <Cable side connector type> 1 I 24VDC 0V (RG) Connector: 2-178288-3 Contact: 1-175218-5 Recommended manufacturer: Tyco Electronics AMP Remote I/O unit connection terminal CR05 <Cable side connector type>…

  • Page 82
    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.8 FCUA-KB10/KB12/KB20/KB30 and FCU6-KB021/KB022/031 NC Keyboard Unit Display signal output terminal (For CRT/EL connection) CR04 5 O VD 6 O HD <Cable side connector type> 7 O DCLK Connector: 8426-4500 8 O R 8 O G Contact: 3690-1000 9 O B Recommended manufacturer: 3M 10 O DTMG…
  • Page 83
    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.8 FCUA-KB10/KB12/KB20/KB30 and FCU6-KB021/KB022/031 NC Keyboard Unit NC keyboard connection terminal (FCU6-KB022 only) (F054 cable is already wired.) KBCS0* KBCS1* KBCS2* KBCS3* KBAD0 KBAD1 KBAD2 BUZOUT* RDYOUT* SPOUT KBRES* KBD0 KBD1 <Cable side connector type> KBD2 KBD3 Plug: 7926-6500SC Strain relief: 3448-7926 Recommended manufacturer: 3M…
  • Page 84: Keyboard And Display Unit Installation Pitch

    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.8 FCUA-KB10/KB12/KB20/KB30 and FCU6-KB021/KB022/031 NC Keyboard Unit 5.8.6 Keyboard and Display Unit Installation Pitch Basically, the display unit and keyboard unit should be installed next to each other. When separating the communication terminal from the keyboard, use the following explanation as a guideline.

  • Page 85
    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.8 FCUA-KB10/KB12/KB20/KB30 and FCU6-KB021/KB022/031 NC Keyboard Unit FCU6-DUN22 For vertical placement For horizontal placement 150mm (Max.) 300mm (Max.) FCUA-EL10/FCUA-CR10 The CR04/CR04-2 cable length for the display unit with FCUA-KB10/KB12 is short, so the installation pitch cannot be increased. CAUTION Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector.
  • Page 86
    5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL 5.8 FCUA-KB10/KB12/KB20/KB30 and FCU6-KB021/KB022/031 NC Keyboard Unit When separating the display unit and keyboard unit, review the machine operation panel while referring to the following connector layout. FCUA-LD10 FCU6-DUT32 J2 cable (L=0.39m) CR01 CR03 FCUA-LD10:RX213 card FCU6-DUT32:RX215 card (Part height) FCU6-DUN33 QY287 card…
  • Page 87: Connection Of Base I/O Unit

    6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT 6.1 Outline of I/O Unit 6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT 6.1 Outline of I/O Unit The base I/O unit is used to connect the servo drive unit, synchronous feed encoder, skip signal and remote I/O unit.

  • Page 88: Base I/O Unit Connection System Drawing

    6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT 6.2 Base I/O Unit Connection System Drawing 6.2 Base I/O Unit Connection System Drawing Base I/O unit M60/M60S Series control unit F010 cable SH21 cable CF10 Servo drive unit CF10 SH21 cable Servo drive unit CF11 F040 cable Synchronous feed encoder…

  • Page 89
    6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT 6.2 Base I/O Unit Connection System Drawing I/O unit name FCU6-DX350 FCU6-DX351 FCU6-DX450 FCU6-DX451 Connector name Connect with the control unit CF10 (servo drive unit, synchronous feed encoder, skip signal, remote I/O unit). CF11 Connect with the control unit (+5V, RS-232C, manual pulse generator).
  • Page 90
    6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT 6.2 Base I/O Unit Connection System Drawing Machine input/output terminal CF31 CF32 (X30) (X31) (X32) (X33) (X34) (X35) (X36) (X37) (X38) (X39) (X3A) (X3B) (X3C) (X3D) (X3E) (X3F) 0V(RG) 24VDC 0V(RG) 24VDC 0V(RG) 24VDC 0V(RG) 24VDC The devices shown in parentheses are used only…
  • Page 91: Connection Of Power Supply

    6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT 6.3 Connection of Power Supply 6.3 Connection of Power Supply Supply the 24VDC power for the base I/O unit from the DCIN connector. (Note) A 24VDC power supply input is required for both the sink type and source type. I-78 Downloaded from ManualsNet.com…

  • Page 92: Connection Of I/O Signal

    6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT 6.4 Connection of I/O Signal 6.4 Connection of I/O Signal (1) CF31 and CF32 input circuit specifications The sink and source input is changed by connecting 24VDC to COM or connecting 0V (RG). There are 48 or 64 input points, and the input device numbers are X0 to X3F.

  • Page 93
    6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT 6.4 Connection of I/O Signal (2) Specifications of CF33, CF34 output circuit The output is fixed to a sink or source output. There are 48 or 64 output points, and the Y0 to Y2F or Y0 to Y3F output pins are used.
  • Page 94: Example Of Remote I/O Unit Connection

    6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT 6.5 Example of Remote I/O Unit Connection 6.5 Example of Remote I/O Unit Connection The number of I/O points can be expanded by connecting a remote I/O unit to the base I/O unit. Refer to Chapter 7 CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT for details on the remote I/O unit. (2) RIO1 terminator Connect a terminator to the final remote I/O unit connected to RIO1.

  • Page 95: Connection Of Servo Drive Unit

    6. BASE I/O UNIT CONNECTION 6.6 Connection of Servo Drive Unit 6.6 Connection of Servo Drive Unit Connect the servo drive unit to SV1 (servo axis, PLC axis, spindle) and SV2 (auxiliary axis: MR-J2-CT) of the base I/O unit. Refer to the M60/M60S Series Specifications Manual (BNP-B2210) for the number and types of servo drive units and spindle drive units that can be connected to SV1 and SV2.

  • Page 96: Connection Of Synchronous Feed Encoder

    6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT 6.7 Connection of Synchronous Feed Encoder 6.7 Connection of Synchronous Feed Encoder Connect the encoder to ENC1 on the base I/O unit. When connecting the second unit, connect it to ENC2 on the control unit. ENC1A ENC1Z ENC1B…

  • Page 97: Connection Of Skip Signal (Sensor)

    6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT 6.8 Connection of Skip Signal (sensor) 6.8 Connection of Skip Signal (sensor) Connect the skip signal to SKIP on the base I/O unit. The skip signal is used for processing the high-speed signals. Always shield the cable. (1) Skip signal cable Base I/O unit SKIP…

  • Page 98: Connection Of Manual Pulse Generator

    6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT 6.9 Connection of Manual Pulse Generator 6.9 Connection of Manual Pulse Generator To connect the manual pulse generators, connect an F020/021/022 cable to «HANDLE» on the HR211 card. Up to three manual pulse generators can be connected. (Refer to Appendix 2.5 F020/021/022 Cable Manufacturing Drawings for cable details.) Connecting one manual pulse generator Manual pulse generator…

  • Page 99
    6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT 6.9 Connection of Manual Pulse Generator When devices (pulse generators) other than manual pulse generators (HD60) are connected to the additional I/O units, use within the ranges shown in the following specifications. The commercially- available manual pulse generators include the 25 pulse/rev type and 100 pulse/rev type.
  • Page 100: Connector Pin Assignment

    6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT 6.10 Connector Pin Assignment 6.10 Connector Pin Assignment (1) Base I/O Unit Connector Control unit connection terminal CF10 Refer to section 4.2.8 Control Unit Connector Pin Assignment (CF10) for details on the connector pin assignment. <Cable side connector type>…

  • Page 101
    6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT 6.10 Connector Pin Assignment Skip signal input terminal SKIP SKIP IN1 SKIP IN2 SKIP IN3 SKIP IN4 SKIP IN5 SKIP IN6 SKIP IN7 SKIP IN8 <Cable side connector type> Connector : CDA-15P Connect the connector case to shield. Contact : CD-PC-111 Use a nickel-base chrome-plated part.
  • Page 102
    6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT 6.10 Connector Pin Assignment (2) Additional I/O Unit Connector Control unit connection terminal CF11 Refer to section 4.2.8 Control Unit Connector Pin Assignment (CF11) for details on the connector pin assignment. <Cable side connector type> Connector: DHD-RB50-20AN Recommended manufacturer: DDK Manual pulse generator connection terminal…
  • Page 103: Connection Of Remote I/O Unit

    7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT 7.1 Outline of Remote I/O Unit 7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT This chapter describes the connection of the remote I/O unit and machine control signals. 7.1 Outline of Remote I/O Unit The following eight types of signals can be input/output from the remote I/O unit (FCUA-DX according to the type and No.

  • Page 104: Names Of Each Remote I/O Unit Section

    7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT 7.2 Names of Each Remote I/O Unit Section 7.2 Names of Each Remote I/O Unit Section FCUA-DX10 FCUA-DX11 / FCUA-DX12 FCUA-DX14 Front view Front view Front view (Front) (Front) (Front) Bottom Bottom Bottom view view view (Rear)

  • Page 105: Setting Of Station No. When Using Multiple Remote I/O Units

    7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT 7.3 Setting of Station No. When Using Multiple Remote I/O Units 7.3 Setting of Station No. When Using Multiple Remote I/O Units When the remote I/O unit is connected with serial links (MC link B), multiple units can be used as long as the total No.

  • Page 106
    7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT 7.3 Setting of Station No. When Using Multiple Remote I/O Units <Setting example 3> FCUA-DX11□unit or FCUA-DX12□unit 3 units Base I/O unit SKIP ENC1 SV2SV1 CR31 RIO2 DCIN RIO1 No. of occupied No. of occupied No.
  • Page 107: Outline Of Digital Signal Input Circuit

    7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT 7.4 Outline of Digital Signal Input Circuit 7.4 Outline of Digital Signal Input Circuit Sink type and source type share the digital signal input circuit. Connect according to each respective diagram below. Input circuit DI-L/DI-R (Machine side) 2.2kΩ…

  • Page 108
    7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT 7.4 Outline of Digital Signal Input Circuit Input conditions The input signals must be used within the following condition ranges. Sink type Source type 1 Input voltage at external contact ON 6V or less 18V or more, 25.2V or less 2 Input current at external contact ON 9mA or more…
  • Page 109: Outline Of Digital Signal Output Circuit

    7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT 7.5 Outline of Digital Signal Output Circuit 7.5 Outline of Digital Signal Output Circuit The digital signal output circuit uses a sink type (DX1 0) or source type (DX1 1). Use within the specification ranges shown below. Output circuit Sink type Source type…

  • Page 110: Outline Of Analog Signal Output Circuit

    7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT 7.6 Outline of Analog Signal Output Circuit 7.6 Outline of Analog Signal Output Circuit The analog signal output circuit can be used only for the FCUA-DX120/DX121/DX140/DX141. Output circuit 220Ω OV(LG) Output conditions 0V to ± 10V ( ± 5%) Output voltage 12bit ( ±…

  • Page 111: Outline Of Analog Signal Input Circuit

    7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT 7.7 Outline of Analog Signal Input Circuit 7.7 Outline of Analog Signal Input Circuit The analog signal input circuit can be used only for the FCUA-DX140/DX141. Input circuit 150Ω OV(LG) Input conditions ± 15V Max.

  • Page 112: Connection Of Fcua-Dx10

    7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT 7.8 Connection of FCUA-DX10 /14 Unit and Machine Control Signal 7.8 Connection of FCUA-DX10 Unit and Machine Control Signal Input Output Type of machine input/output signal and No. of points 32 points 32 points FCUA-DX10□…

  • Page 113
    7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT 7.8 Connection of FCUA-DX10 /14 Unit and Machine Control Signal <Signal assignment table> FCUA-DX10□/14□ <CAUTION> DI-L When using two or more remote I/O units or when connecting to the communication terminal, the signal Machine side assignment will differ.
  • Page 114: Connection Of Fcua-Dx14

    7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT 7.9 Connection of FCUA-DX14 Unit and Analog Input/Output Signal 7.9 Connection of FCUA-DX14 Unit and Analog Input/Output Signal For the analog input/output signal, the R031 cable is connected to «AIO». Up to four input points and one output point of the analog input/output signal can be connected.

  • Page 115: Connection Of Fcua-Dx11

    7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT 7.10 Connection of FCUA-DX11 Unit and Machine Control Signal 7.10 Connection of FCUA-DX11 Unit and Machine Control Signal Input Output Type of machine input/output signal and No. of points 64 points 48 points FCUA-DX11□ R300 cable/ R301 cable DI-L…

  • Page 116
    7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT 7.10 Connection of FCUA-DX11 Unit and Machine Control Signal <Signal assignment table> <CAUTION> FCUA-DX11□ When using two or more remote I/O units or when connecting to the communication terminal, the signal DI-L DI-R assignment will differ. Refer to the «PLC Interface Manual»…
  • Page 117: Connection Of Fcua-Dx12

    7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT 7.11 Connection of FCUA-DX12 Unit and Machine Control Signal 7.11 Connection of FCUA-DX12 Unit and Machine Control Signal Analog Input Output Type of machine input/output output signal and No. of points 64 points 48 points 1 point FCUA-DX12□…

  • Page 118
    7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT 7.11 Connection of FCUA-DX12 Unit and Machine Control Signal <Signal assignment table> <CAUTION> When using two or more remote I/O units or when FCUA-DX12□ connecting to the communication terminal, the signal assignment will differ. Refer to the «PLC Interface DI-L DI-R Manual»…
  • Page 119: Cables

    7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT 7.12 Cables 7.12 Cables The remote I/O unit cable types include the R300 and R301 types. The R300 cable has one end cut off, and the R301 cable is used for connection to the IDEC IZUMI Corporation terminal block BX1F-T40A (Note 1).

  • Page 120: Connection Of Scan Di/Do

    8. CONNECTION OF SCAN DI/DO 8.1 Outline 8. CONNECTION OF SCAN DI/DO 8.1 Outline The HR347/357 card is the machine operation board input/output card of the M60/M60S Series. It has a digital input/output and scan input/output, and is connected to the machine operation board and other devices.

  • Page 121
    8. CONNECTION OF SCAN DI/DO 8.2 Hardware Interface (2) Pin assignment Remote I/O unit connection terminal RIO3A/B <Cable side connector type> Connector : 1-178288-3 1 I/O TXRX3 Contact : 1-175218-2 2 I/O TXRX3* Recommended manufacturer : Tyco Electronics AMP Power input terminal (24VDC) DCIN <Cable side connector type>…
  • Page 122
    8. CONNECTION OF SCAN DI/DO 8.2 Hardware Interface Scan type input/output terminals CF35 LC3B LC3A LC2B LC2A LC1B LC1A LC0B LC0A LD7B* LD7A* (Note) LD6B* LD6A* The GND pin is not normally used. LD5B* LD5A* Do not connect the GND pin to the LD4B* LD4A* frame ground.
  • Page 123: Connections

    8. CONNECTION OF SCAN DI/DO 8.3 Connections 8.3 Connections (1) External power supply (DCIN) 24VDC is required for the HR347/HR357 card operation. Prepare a stabilized power supply that satisfies the following specifications. Output : 24VDC ± 5% Ripple : ± 5% (P-P) Rated output current: 2.5A ∗…

  • Page 124
    8. CONNECTION OF SCAN DI/DO 8.3 Connections (3) Scan input (CF35) An example is shown of a scan input circuit manufactured by the machine manufacturer. Refer to 8.2 (2) «Pin assignment» for the connector pin assignments. CF35 KYCO* KYC1* KYC2* KYC3* KYC4* KYC5*…
  • Page 125
    8. CONNECTION OF SCAN DI/DO 8.3 Connections (4) Scan output (CF35) An example is shown of a scan output circuit manufactured by the machine manufacturer. Refer to 8.2 (2) «Pin assignment» for the connector pin assignments. CF35 CF35 LC3B LC3A LC2B LC2A LC1A…
  • Page 126
    8. CONNECTION OF SCAN DI/DO 8.3 Connections (5) Digital input (CF31) A source type input circuit corresponding to source output is shown. Sink type Source type (Machine side) (Machine side) HR3□7 HR3□7 CF31 CF31 24VDC 24VDC 2.2kΩ 2.2kΩ △ 0V(RG) △…
  • Page 127
    8. CONNECTION OF SCAN DI/DO 8.3 Connections (6) Digital output (CF33) The HR357 output circuit is a source type (source output). Source type FCU6-HR3□7 CF33 24VDC (Machine side) Control circuit 0V(RG) CAUTION Do not apply any voltage to the connector other than that specified in this manual. Failure to observe this could cause bursting, damage, etc.
  • Page 128: Connection Of 200Ma Output Di/Do Unit Fcu6-Hr377

    9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377 9.1 Connection System Drawing 9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377 The HR377 is a DI/DO unit capable of a 200mA current output per 1 point. The DI/DO connector is common with the base I/O unit. 9.1 Connection System Drawing M60/M60S Series FCU6-HR377…

  • Page 129
    9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377 9.1 Connection System Drawing Connector Explanation of functions name CF10 Connect with the control unit (servo drive unit, synchronous feed encoder, skip signal, remote I/O unit). CF11 Connect with the control unit (5VDC, RS-232C, manual pulse generator). Connect with the servo drive unit/spindle drive unit.
  • Page 130
    9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377 9.1 Connection System Drawing Machine input/output DI/DO CF31 CF32 24VDC 0V(RG) 24VDC 0V(RG) 24VDC 0V(RG) 24VDC 0V(RG) CF33 CF34 24VDC 24VDC 0V(RG) 24VDC 24VDC 0V(RG) <Cable side connector type> * This examples shows CS1 set to «0» and CS2 Connector : 7940-6500SC set to «1».
  • Page 131: Connection Of Power Supply

    9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377 9.2 Connection of Power Supply 9.2 Connection of Power Supply 9.2.1 Connection of 1st Card’s Power Supply Supply the 24VDC power to the DC24IN connector. The 5VDC power for control in the card is supplied from the control unit via the CF11 connector.

  • Page 132: Connection Of 2Nd Card’s Power Supply

    9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377 9.2 Connection of Power Supply 9.2.2 Connection of 2nd Card’s Power Supply When two or more units are connected as the expansion I/O of this 200mA-output DI/DO unit, supply the 5VDC power to the DC5IN connector on the second or following unit. I-119 Downloaded from ManualsNet.com…

  • Page 133: Connection Of Di/Do Signal

    9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377 9.3 Connection of DI/DO Signal 9.3 Connection of DI/DO Signal (1) CF31 and CF32 input circuit specifications The sink and source input is changed by connecting 24VDC to COM pin or connecting 0V (RG). There are 64 input points, and the pins X0 to X3F are used for input device numbers.

  • Page 134
    9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377 9.3 Connection of DI/DO Signal (2) Specifications of CF33, CF34 output circuit The output is fixed to a source output. There are 64 output points, and the pins used for output device numbers are Y0 to Y3F. Use within the specification range shown below. (Machine side) FCU6-HR377 24VDC…
  • Page 135: Example Of Remote I/O Unit Connection

    9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377 9.4 Example of Remote I/O Unit Connection 9.4 Example of Remote I/O Unit Connection Normally one of these units is used. A remote I/O unit (RIO) is connected as an expansion I/O, and the No.

  • Page 136: Connection Of Servo Drive Unit

    9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377 9.5 Connection of Servo Drive Unit 9.5 Connection of Servo Drive Unit Connect the servo drive unit to SV1 (servo axis, PLC axis, spindle) and SV2 (auxiliary axis: MR-J2-CT) of the base I/O unit. * Connect a terminator or battery unit to the final servo drive unit.

  • Page 137: Connection Of Synchronous Feed Encoder

    9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377 9.6 Connection of Synchronous Feed Encoder 9.6 Connection of Synchronous Feed Encoder Connect the Synchronous feed encoder to ENC1 on the base I/O unit. When connecting the second unit, connect it to ENC2 on the control unit. <Related items>…

  • Page 138: Connection Of Skip Signal (Sensor)

    9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377 9.7 Connection of Skip Signal (sensor) 9.7 Connection of Skip Signal (sensor) Connect the skip signal to SKIP on the base I/O unit. The skip signal is used for processing the high-speed signals. Always shield the cable. (1) Skip signal cable FCU6-HR377 SKIP…

  • Page 139: Connection Of Manual Pulse Generator

    9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377 9.8 Connection of Manual Pulse Generator 9.8 Connection of Manual Pulse Generator To connect the manual pulse generators, connect an F020/021/022 cable to «HANDLE» connector. Up to three manual pulse generators can be connected. In addition to the standard +12V power supply type, the manual pulse generator of the +5V power supply specifications handle can be used with this unit by using a dedicated cable.

  • Page 140
    9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377 9.8 Connection of Manual Pulse Generator When devices (pulse generators) other than manual pulse generators (HD60) are connected to the additional I/O units, use within the ranges shown in the following specifications. The commercially- available manual pulse generators include the 25 pulse/rev type and 100 pulse/rev type.
  • Page 141: Connector Pin Assignment

    9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377 9.9 Connector Pin Assignment 9.9 Connector Pin Assignment Control unit connection terminal CF10 Refer to section 4.2.8 Control Unit Connector Pin Assignment (CF10) for details on the connector pin assignment. <Cable side connector type> Plug : 10150-6000EL Shell : 10350-3210-000 Recommended manufacturer: 3M…

  • Page 142
    9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377 9.9 Connector Pin Assignment Skip signal input connection terminal SKIP SKIP IN1 SKIP IN2 SKIP IN3 SKIP IN4 SKIP IN5 SKIP IN6 SKIP IN7 SKIP IN8 <Cable side connector type> Connector : CDA-15P Contact : CD-PC-111 Connect the connector case to shield.
  • Page 143
    9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377 9.9 Connector Pin Assignment Control unit connection terminal CF11 Refer to section 4.2.8 Control Unit Connector Pin Assignment (CF11) for details on the connector pin assignment. <Cable side connector type> Connector: DHD-RB50-20AN Recommended manufacturer: DDK Manual pulse generator connection terminal HANDLE…
  • Page 144: Fuse For Machine Output Circuit Protection

    9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377 9.10 Fuse for Machine Output Circuit Protection 9.10 Fuse for Machine Output Circuit Protection At every 4-point output, the machine output (DO) circuit has a fuse for burning protection if any circuit should short-circuit.

  • Page 145: Connection Of 200Ma Output Di/Do Unit Fcu6-Hr378

    10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378 10.1 Connection System Drawing 10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378 The FCU6-HR378 is a DI/DO unit capable of a 200mA current output per 1 point. The DO output common is the 4-point common 13 block, and the 1-point 1 common is the 12-point common separated type. 10.1 Connection System Drawing M60/M60S Series FCU6-HR378 (1st card)

  • Page 146
    10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378 10.1 Connection System Drawing Connector Explanation of functions name CF10 Connect with the control unit (servo drive unit, synchronous feed encoder, skip signal, remote I/O unit). CF11 Connect with the control unit (5VDC, RS-232C, manual pulse generator). Connect with the servo drive unit/spindle drive unit.
  • Page 147
    10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378 10.1 Connection System Drawing Machine input/output Input/ Input/ Input/ Input/ Signal Signal Signal Signal output output output output C00003 C02023 C00407 C02427 CI0007 CI2027 C0080B C0282B C00C0F C02C2F CI080F CI282F C01013 C030 C031 C032 C01417…
  • Page 148: Connection Of Power Supply

    10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT HR378 10.2 Connection of Power Supply 10.2 Connection of Power Supply 10.2.1 Connection of 1st Card’s Power Supply Supply the 24VDC power from the DC24IN connector or the I/O connector MJ2. When supplying the 24VDC power supply from the MJ2 connector, supply to all 24VDC pins and 0V (RG) pins.

  • Page 149: Connection Of 2Nd Card’s Power Supply

    10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT HR378 10.2 Connection of Power Supply 10.2.2 Connection of 2nd Card’s Power Supply When two or more units are connected as the expansion I/O of this 200mA-output DI/DO unit, supply the 5VDC power to the DC5IN connector on the second or following unit. I-136 Downloaded from ManualsNet.com…

  • Page 150: Connection Of Di/Do Signal

    10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378 10.3 Connection of DI/DO Signal 10.3 Connection of DI/DO Signal (1) MJ2 input circuit specifications The sink and source input is changed by connecting 24VDC to COM pin or connecting 0V (RG). There are 64 input points, and the pins X0 to X3F are used for input device numbers.

  • Page 151
    10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378 10.3 Connection of DI/DO Signal External signal +24V Internal signal Relation of input common pin and DI input Common name Pin No. Corresponding input signal name CI0007 X00 to X07 CI080F X08 to X0F CI1017 X10 to X17 CI181F…
  • Page 152
    10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378 10.3 Connection of DI/DO Signal (2) MJ3 output circuit specifications The output is fixed to a source output. There are 64 output points, and the pins used for output are Y0 to Y3F. Use within the specification range shown below. (Machine side) FCU6-HR378 24VDC…
  • Page 153
    10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378 10.3 Connection of DI/DO Signal (3) Rotary switch (CS1, CS2) setting Rotary switch CS1: Sets the 32-point station No. with remote I/O communication 1CH DI: X0-X1F and DO: Y0-Y1F. This is normally used set to «0». Rotary switch CS2: Sets the 32-point station No.
  • Page 154: Example Of Remote I/O Unit Connection

    10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378 10.4 Example of Remote I/O Unit Connection 10.4 Example of Remote I/O Unit Connection Normally one of these units is used. A remote I/O unit is connected as an expansion I/O, and the No. of I/O points is configured to match the users’ specifications.

  • Page 155: Connection Of Servo Drive Unit

    10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378 10.5 Connection of Servo Drive Unit 10.5 Connection of Servo Drive Unit Connect the servo drive unit to SV1 (servo axis, PLC axis, spindle) and SV2 (auxiliary axis: MR-J2-CT) of the base I/O unit. SH21/FCUA-R000 SH21/FCUA- R000 cable…

  • Page 156: Connection Of Synchronous Feed Encoder

    10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378 10.6 Connection of Synchronous Feed Encoder 10.6 Connection of Synchronous Feed Encoder Connect the encoder to ENC1 on the base I/O unit. When connecting the second unit, connect it to ENC2 on the control unit. Synchronous feed 1st unit encoder (1st unit)

  • Page 157: Connection Of Skip Signal (Sensor)

    10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378 10.7 Connection of Sip Signal (sensor) 10.7 Connection of Skip Signal (sensor) Connect the skip signal to SKIP connector on the base I/O unit. The skip signal is used for processing the high-speed signals. Always shield the cable. (1) Skip signal cable FC U 6 — H R 3 78 SKIP…

  • Page 158: Connection Of Manual Pulse Generator

    10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378 10.8 Connection of Manual Pulse Generator 10.8 Connection of Manual Pulse Generator To connect the manual pulse generators, connect an F020/021/022 cable to «HANDLE» connector. Up to three manual pulse generators can be connected. In addition to the standard 12VDC power supply type, the manual pulse generator of the 5VDC power supply specifications can be used with this unit by using a dedicated cable.

  • Page 159
    10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378 10.8 Connection of Manual Pulse Generator When devices (pulse generators) other than manual pulse generators (HD60) are connected to the FCU6-HR378, use within the ranges shown in the following specifications. The commercially- available manual pulse generators include the 25 pulse/rev type and 100 pulse/rev type.
  • Page 160: Connector Pin Assignment

    10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378 10.9 Connector Pin Assignment 10.9 Connector Pin Assignment Control unit connection terminal CF10 Refer to section 4.2.8 Control Unit Connector Pin Assignment (CF10) for details on the connector pin assignment. <Cable side connector type> Plug : 10150-6000EL Shell : 10350-3210-000 Recommended manufacturer: 3M…

  • Page 161
    10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378 10.9 Connector Pin Assignment Skip signal input connection terminal SKIP SKIP IN1 SKIP IN2 SKIP IN3 SKIP IN4 SKIP IN5 SKIP IN6 SKIP IN7 <Cable side connector type> SKIP IN8 Connector : CDA-15P Contact : CD-PC-111 Case…
  • Page 162
    10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378 10.9 Connector Pin Assignment Control unit connection terminal CF11 Refer to section 4.2.8 Control Unit Connector Pin Assignment (CF11) for details on the connector pin assignment. <Cable side connector type> Connector: DHD-RB50-20AN Recommended manufacturer: DDK Manual pulse generator connection terminal HANDLE…
  • Page 163: Fuse For Machine Output Circuit Protection

    10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378 10.10 Fuse for Machine Output Circuit Protection 10.10 Fuse for Machine Output Circuit Protection At every 4-point output, the machine output (DO) circuit has a fuse for burning protection if any circuit should short-circuit.

  • Page 164: Explanation Of Led Function

    10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378 10.11 Explanation of LED Function 10.11 Explanation of LED Function Status Name Function Color Correspondence for error When During normal error LED 1 24IN 24VDC input check Green Not lit Check 24VDC voltage (two- Rotary switch [CS1] setting station Check each remote I/O unit’s…

  • Page 165: Connection Of Qy231 Extended I/O Card

    11. CONNECTION OF QY231 EXTENDED I/O CARD 11.1 Outline 11. CONNECTION OF QY231 EXTENDED I/O CARD 11.1 Outline QY231 is the machine input/output and operation board input/output card connected to the base I/O unit’s remote I/O communication or communication terminal remote I/O communication (MC link B). No.

  • Page 166
    11. CONNECTION OF QY231 EXTENDED I/O CARD 11.2 Hardware Interface (2) Pin assignments Remote I/O unit connection terminal CSH41A/B <Cable side connector type> Connector : 1-178288-3 1 I/O TXRX Contact : 1-175218-2 2 I/O TXRX* Recommended manufacturer : 0V(LG) Tyco Electronics AMP Power input terminal (24VDC) <Cable side connector type>…
  • Page 167
    11. CONNECTION OF QY231 EXTENDED I/O CARD 11.2 Hardware Interface Machine output terminal CFD83 CFD83 24VDC <Cable side connector type> Connector : MRP50M01 Contact : MRPM102 Case : MR50W Recommended manufacturer : HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO 0V(RG) * This examples shows CS1 set to ※CS1 を「0」に設定した場合の例です。…
  • Page 168: Connections

    11. CONNECTION OF QY231 EXTENDED I/O CARD 11.3 Connections 11.3 Connections (1) External power supply (DCIN) 24VDC is required for card operation. Prepare a stabilized power supply that satisfies the following specifications. Rated output : 24VDC ± 5% * The rated output current is the value when using 60mA × 48 points Ripple : ±…

  • Page 169
    11. CONNECTION OF QY231 EXTENDED I/O CARD 11.3 Connections (3) Machine input terminal (CMD81, CMD82) The following shows the sink type input circuit corresponding to the machine side sink output, and source type input circuit corresponding to the machine side source output. Sink type Source type QY231…
  • Page 170
    11. CONNECTION OF QY231 EXTENDED I/O CARD 11.3 Connections (4) Machine output terminal (CFD83) The QY231 output circuit is a source type (source output). Source type QY231 24VDC CFD83 (Machine side) Control circuit 0V(RG) CAUTION Do not apply any voltage to the connector other than that specified in this manual. Failure to observe this could cause bursting, damage, etc.
  • Page 171
    11. CONNECTION OF QY231 EXTENDED I/O CARD 11.3 Connections 1) Connection of the remote I/O unit When the remote I/O unit is connected with a serial link, multiple units can be combined and used in a range of eight or less total occupied stations. (Refer to the Connection Manual, Chapter 6 «CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT»…
  • Page 172: Option Card

    12. OPTION CARD 12.1 External PLC Link I (M-NET Interface) 12. OPTION CARD 12.1 External PLC Link I (M-NET Interface) The Mitsubishi sequencer (MELSEC A Series) and MELDAS60 Series can be connected serially. A multi-drop link can be established, but the NC side cannot be set as the master station. This function is an option.

  • Page 173: Connection With Melsec

    12. OPTION CARD 12.1 External PLC Link I (M-NET Interface) 12.1.3 Connection with MELSEC MELDAS60 act as serial link slave stations. An example of the connection is shown below. Refer to each sequencer manual when connecting with the NC side control unit. MELSEC base unit This cable must be prepared by user.

  • Page 174: External Plc Ii (Melsec Bus Connection)

    12. OPTION CARD 12.2 External PLC II (MELSEC bus connection) 12.2 External PLC II (MELSEC bus connection) The Mitsubishi sequencer (MELSEC A Series) and MELDAS60/60S Series can be connected with a bus. Up to four NC control units can be connected to one sequencer. One NC unit occupies one stage (0 slot) of the sequencer extension unit.

  • Page 175: Connection Of High-Speed Program Server Unit

    12. OPTION CARD 12.3 Connection of High-speed Program Server Unit 12.3 Connection of High-speed Program Server Unit The high-speed program server function is used by adding the high-speed program server unit (FCU6-EP203-1), in which the ATA memory card HR831 and Ethernet card HR832 are assembled. The memory card has the ATA specifications, and either the 100BASE-TX or the 10BASE-T type Ethernet can be used.

  • Page 176: Inserting The Ic Card

    12. OPTION CARD 12.3 Connection of High-speed Program Server Unit 12.3.2 Inserting the IC Card The SanDisk ATA type flash ROM can be used for the IC card. There are cases when brands other than SanDisk cannot be used. Always turn the control unit power OFF before inserting or ejecting the IC card. Take care to the orientation of the mark on the IC card, and insert it from the top of the control unit.

  • Page 177: Connection Of Ethernet Cable

    12. OPTION CARD 12.3 Connection of High-speed Program Server Unit 12.3.3 Connection of Ethernet Cable Select a shielded cable for the Ethernet cable, and connect both ends to the FG. For the high-speed program server, refer to the following drawing, lead out the FG wire from the cable and connect to the control unit’s FG terminal.

  • Page 178: Connection Of Ethernet Function

    12. OPTION CARD 12.4 Connection of Ethernet Function 12.4 Connection of Ethernet Function The HR534 card is used to use Ethernet communication. Either the 10BASE-T or 10BASE-5 Ethernet can be selected for HR534. When using 10BASE-5, set the changeover switch SW1 shown below up, and when using the 10BASE-T, set SW1 down.

  • Page 179: Connection Of I/O Device By Cc-Link

    12. OPTION CARD 12.5 Connection of I/O device by CC-link 12.5 Connection of I/O device by CC-link When connecting I/O device by CC-Link, HR576 card is required to be mounted in the expansion slot of the control unit. Connect a dedicated cable for CC-Link cable to a terminal block of HR576 card. Always connect a terminator (accessory) to the unit which serves as the final station.

  • Page 180: Connector Pin Assignment

    12. OPTION CARD 12.5 Connection of I/O device by CC-link 12.5.2 Connector Pin Assignment CC-Link connection I/O DA terminal <Cable side connector type> Crimp terminal: V1.25-3 I/O DB Recommended manufacturer: JST CAUTION Incorrect connections could damage the device, so always connect the cable to the designated connector.

  • Page 181
    12. OPTION CARD 12.5 Connection of I/O device by CC-link Correspondence of terminal name and cable color Terminal name Cable color Blue White Yellow Grounding cable (shielded) (Note 1) In the CC-Link system, when a cable other than a dedicated cable for CC-Link is used, the performance cannot be assured.
  • Page 182: Connection Of External Battery Unit

    13. CONNECTION OF EXTERNAL BATTERY UNIT 13. CONNECTION OF EXTERNAL BATTERY UNIT This battery unit is installed in each unit as the NC data backup and servo (feed axis and auxiliary axis) absolute position backup. It can be replaced from outside the electric cabinet. The NC data backup battery is used with the F240 cable connected to the control unit power supply card battery connection BAT connector, and the CF05 connector on the external battery unit.

  • Page 183: Appendix 1 Outline Drawing

    APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING Appendix 1.1 Control Unit Outline Drawing APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING Appendix 1.1 Control Unit Outline Drawing Appendix 1.1.1 M64A Control Unit Outline Drawing 4-M5 screw hole CBUS 1 CBUS 2 OPEN DC IN DC OUT PS EMG BAT ALM CF11 CF10…

  • Page 184: Appendix 1.1.2 M64As/64S/65/65S/66/66S Control Unit Outline Drawing

    APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING Appendix 1.1 Control Unit Outline Drawing Appendix 1.1.2 M64AS/64S/65/65S/66/66S Control Unit Outline Drawing Fan cover projection 4-M5 screw hole I-171 Downloaded from ManualsNet.com search engine…

  • Page 185: Appendix 1.2 Communication Terminal Outline Drawing

    APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING Appendix 1.2 Communication Terminal Outline Drawing Appendix 1.2 Communication Terminal Outline Drawing Appendix 1.2.1 FCUA-CT100/CT120 I-172 Downloaded from ManualsNet.com search engine…

  • Page 186: Appendix 1.2.2 Fcua-Cr10

    APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING Appendix 1.2 Communication Terminal Outline Drawing Appendix 1.2.2 FCUA-CR10 I-173 Downloaded from ManualsNet.com search engine…

  • Page 187: Appendix 1.2.3 Fcua-Kb10/Kb12/El10

    APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING Appendix 1.2 Communication Terminal Outline Drawing Appendix 1.2.3 FCUA-KB10/KB12/EL10 * This is a special part. Contact Mitsubishi to place an order. I-174 Downloaded from ManualsNet.com search engine…

  • Page 188: Appendix 1.2.4 Fcua-Ld100

    APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING Appendix 1.2 Communication Terminal Outline Drawing Appendix 1.2.4 FCUA-LD100 SH21 cable (FCUA-R000) CR02 connector CR02 (Square hole dimensions) I-175 Downloaded from ManualsNet.com search engine…

  • Page 189: Appendix 1.2.5 Fcua-Ld10

    APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING Appendix 1.2 Communication Terminal Outline Drawing Appendix 1.2.5 FCUA-LD10 SH21 cable (FCUA-R000) CR02 connector CR02 I-176 Downloaded from ManualsNet.com search engine…

  • Page 190: Appendix 1.2.6 Fcu6-Dut32

    APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING Appendix 1.2 Communication Terminal Outline Drawing Appendix 1.2.6 FCU6-DUT32 I-177 Downloaded from ManualsNet.com search engine…

  • Page 191: Appendix 1.2.7 Fcu6-Dut33

    APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING Appendix 1.2 Communication Terminal Outline Drawing Appendix 1.2.7 FCU6-DUT33 I-178 Downloaded from ManualsNet.com search engine…

  • Page 192: Appendix 1.2.8 Fcua-Kb20/Kb30

    APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING Appendix 1.2 Communication Terminal Outline Drawing Appendix 1.2.8 FCUA-KB20/KB30 SH21 cable (FCUA-R000) CR02 connector CR02 I-179 Downloaded from ManualsNet.com search engine…

  • Page 193: Appendix 1.2.9 Fcu6-Kb021/Kb031

    APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING Appendix 1.2 Communication Terminal Outline Drawing Appendix 1.2.9 FCU6-KB021/KB031 I-180 Downloaded from ManualsNet.com search engine…

  • Page 194: Appendix 1.2.10 Fcu6-Dun22

    APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING Appendix 1.2 Communication Terminal Outline Drawing Appendix 1.2.10 FCU6-DUN22 110 (Wiring allowance) (8.4-type color TFT) Menu key 260 (Display unit outline) 250 ± 0.3 Square hole 4 — M3 screw Panel cut drawing I-181 Downloaded from ManualsNet.com search engine…

  • Page 195: Appendix 1.2.11 Fcu6-Kb022

    APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING Appendix 1.2 Communication Terminal Outline Drawing Appendix 1.2.11 FCU6-KB022 110 (Wiring allowance) 140 (Keyboard outline) 130±0.3 Square hole 4-M3 screw Panel cut drawing I-182 Downloaded from ManualsNet.com search engine…

  • Page 196: Appendix 1.2.12 Key Arrangement

    APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING Appendix 1.2 Communication Terminal Outline Drawing Appendix 1.2.12 Key Arrangement (1) Appearance of CT100/LD100/separate type FCUA-CR10 + KB10/KB12 and FCUA-EL10 + KB10/KB12 Alphabetic character, numer ical character, and sym bol keys READY L ED Setting keys Function selection keys MITSUBISHI READY…

  • Page 197: Appendix 1.3 Base I/O Unit Outline Drawing

    APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING Appendix 1.3 Base I/O Unit Outline Drawing Appendix 1.3 Base I/O Unit Outline Drawing 4-M5 screw hole 4-M5ネジ用穴 SKIP SKIP ENC1 ENC1 SV2 SV1 SV2 SV1 CR31 CR31 CF31 CF32 CF31 CF32 CF33 CF34 CF33 CF34 CF11 CF11 RI02 RI01 DCIN…

  • Page 198: Appendix 1.4 Remote I/O Unit Outline Drawing

    APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING Appendix 1.4 Remote I/O Unit Outline Drawing Appendix 1.4 Remote I/O Unit Outline Drawing Wiring allowance Bottom Installation hole 2-M5-0.8 screw I-185 Downloaded from ManualsNet.com search engine…

  • Page 199: Appendix 1.5 Hr347/357 (Scan I/O) Card Outline Drawing

    APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING Appendix 1.5 HR347/357 (Scan I/O) Card Outline Drawing Appendix 1.5 HR347/357 (Scan I/O) Card Outline Drawing SC A N 2 SC A N 1 D I O (Scan DI/DO: 64/64) C F 3 5 C S 3 C S 2 C S 1 Ø4.5…

  • Page 200: Appendix 1.6 Fcu6-Hr377 Unit Outline Drawing

    APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING Appendix 1.6 FCU6-HR377 Unit Outline Drawing Appendix 1.6 FCU6-HR377 Unit Outline Drawing I-187 Downloaded from ManualsNet.com search engine…

  • Page 201: Appendix 1.7 Fcu6-Hr378 Unit Outline Drawing

    APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING Appendix 1.7 FCU6-HR378 Unit Outline Drawing Appendix 1.7 FCU6-HR378 Unit Outline Drawing I-188 Downloaded from ManualsNet.com search engine…

  • Page 202: Appendix 1.8 Qy231 Card Outline Drawing

    APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING Appendix 1.8 QY231 Card Outline Drawing Appendix 1.8 QY231 Card Outline Drawing (SW1) mounted CMD81 CFD83 CMD82 167±0. 3 ∗ The PCB height (depth) will be approx. 40mm when the connector is inserted, so secure a space larger than that during installation.

  • Page 203: Appendix 1.9 Example Of Control Unit And Fcu6-Hr377 Layout

    APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING Appendix 1.9 Example of Control Unit and FCU6-HR377 Layout Appendix 1.9 Example of Control Unit and FCU6-HR377 Layout The FCU6-HR377 part height is max. 25mm. When overlaying the FCU6-HR377 and control unit as shown in the drawing, arrange the control unit 30mm or more away from the FCU6-HR377 PCB surface.

  • Page 204: Appendix 1.10 Example Of Control Unit And Fcu6-Hr378 Layout

    APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING Appendix 1.10 Example of Control Unit and FCU6-HR378 Layout Appendix 1.10 Example of Control Unit and FCU6-HR378 Layout The FCU6-HR377 part height is max. 25mm. When overlaying the FCU6-HR377 and control unit as shown in the drawing, arrange the control unit 30mm or more away from the HR FCU6-377 PCB surface.

  • Page 205: Appendix 1.11 Manual Pulse Generator (Hd60) Outline Drawing

    APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING Appendix 1.11 Manual Pulse Generator (HD60) Outline Drawing Appendix 1.11 Manual Pulse Generator (HD60) Outline Drawing 3-M4 stud bolts L10 Packing t2.0 12V 0V Installation other than M3 × 6 not possible 8.89 7.60 27±0.5 3 — ø4.8 hole ø62 hole +2.0 ø772±0.2 Panel cut drawing…

  • Page 206: Appendix 1.12 Synchronous Feed Encoder (Ose-1024-3-15-68) Outline Drawing

    APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING Appendix 1.12 Synchronous Feed Encoder (OSE-1024-3-15-68) Outline Drawing Appendix 1.12 Synchronous Feed Encoder (OSE-1024-3-15-68) Outline Drawing Caution plate Detector (1024 pulse/rev) 4-ø5.4 hole 1chA 1chZ 1chB 19.5 1chA* Case 1chZ* ground 1chB* Synchronous feed encoder side 97F3102E20-29P (or equivalent) -0.012 -0.042…

  • Page 207: Appendix 1.13 Hr591 (I/O Link Relay Branching Wire) Card Outline Drawing

    APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING Appendix 1.13 HR591 (I/O link relay branching wire) Card Outline Drawing Appendix 1.13 HR591 (I/O link relay branching wire) Card Outline Drawing 4 — 4.5 hole AUX-OUT AUX-IN Appendix 1.14 HR211 Card Outline Drawing HR211A Not used 6- 4 CF11 RS232C…

  • Page 208: Appendix 1.15 Qy261 Card Outline Drawing

    APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING Appendix 1.15 QY261 Card Outline Drawing Appendix 1.15 QY261 Card Outline Drawing 4 — 4.5 hole +24V CBH28 CBH38 CBH48 CBH58 I-195 Downloaded from ManualsNet.com search engine…

  • Page 209: Appendix 1.16 External Battery Unit Outline Drawing

    APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING Appendix 1.16 External Battery Unit Outline Drawing Appendix 1.16 External Battery Unit Outline Drawing Servo drive unit battery Punched hole I-196 Downloaded from ManualsNet.com search engine…

  • Page 210: Appendix 1.17 Outline And Installation Outline Drawing

    APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING Appendix 1.17 Outline and Installation Outline Drawing for Grounding Plate and Clamp Fitting Appendix 1.17 Outline and Installation Outline Drawing for Grounding Plate and Clamp Fitting The shield wire generally only needs to be grounded to the connector’s case Cable frame.

  • Page 211: Appendix 1.18 F Installation Plate Outline Drawing

    APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING Appendix 1.18 F Installation Plate Outline Drawing Appendix 1.18 F Installation Plate Outline Drawing 47.1±0.2 42.6±0.2 Square hole Base I/O unit Example of use with RS-232C devices RS-232C device Cross cable F032 cable RS23 2C F mounting plate Cabinet side wall Max.

  • Page 212: Appendix 2 Cable Drawings

    APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS List of cable type Appendix No. Cable type Application Max. length Standard cable length Appendix 2.1 SH21 cable MC link A communication (servo/display) (Note 1) 30m Appendix 2.2 SH41 cable MC link B communication (Remote I/O 0.5m communication) Appendix 2.3…

  • Page 213
    APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS Maximum cable length I/O base unit SH21 Servo dr ive unit F010 Control unit SH41 Expansion F050 RIO1 Remote I/O unit I/O unit RIO2 F040 Synchronous feed encoder (Note 2) Symbols for writing cable drawings The following symbols are used in the cable drawings. indicates twist.
  • Page 214: Appendix 2.1 Sh21 Cable (Servo Drive Unit)

    APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS Appendix 2.1 SH21 cable Appendix 2.1 SH21 cable (Servo drive unit) Cable type: SH21 cable Usage: MC link A communication (servo/display) Appendix 2.1 Servo drive unit Connector name : SV1, SV2 (SH21/R000) Plug : 10120-6000EL SV1, SV2 (CSH21) Shell : 10320-3210-000 Plug : 10120-6000EL Recommended manufacturer: 3M…

  • Page 215: Appendix 2.4 F010 Cable (Control Unit Interface)

    APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS Appendix 2.4 F010 cable Appendix 2.4 F010 cable (Control unit interface) Cable type: F010 cable Usage: Connection between control unit and base I/O unit Appendix 2.4 Connector name : CF10 Connector name : CF10 CF10 CF10 TXRX1 TXRX1* TXRX2…

  • Page 216: Appendix 2.5 F020/021/022 Cable (Manual Pulse Generator)

    APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS Appendix 2.5 F020/021/022 cable Appendix 2.5 F020/021/022 cable (Manual pulse generator) Cable type: F020/021/02 cable Usage: Manual pulse generator Appendix 2.5 Connector name : HANDLE HANDLE Cable name 1ch 2ch 3ch F020 cable +12V F021 cable F022 cable Note: The circle indicates the station…

  • Page 217: Appendix 2.6 F030/031/032 Cable (Rs-232C)

    APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS Appendix 2.6 F030/031/032 cable Appendix 2.6 F030/031/032 cable (RS-232C) Cable type: F030/031/032 cable Usage: RS-232C device Appendix 2.6 Connector name: RS232C Connector name: (Port No.1) Connector name: (Port No.2) (Port No.1) RS232C F installation plate: Refer to Appwndix 1.18 SD1(SD3) (F installation plate outline drawing).

  • Page 218: Appendix 2.7 F040/041 Cable (Synchronous Feed Encoder)

    APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS Appendix 2.7 F040/041 cable Appendix 2.7 F040/041 cable (Synchronous feed encoder) Cable type: F040/041 cable Usage: Synchronous feed encoder Appendix 2.7 Connector name : ENC1 (ENC2) Connector : MS3106B20-29S F040 Cable clamp: MS3057-12A cable Recommended manufacturer: ITT Canon Connector : MS3106B20-29S…

  • Page 219: Appendix 2.9 F070 Cable (24Vdc Input)

    APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS Appendix 2.9 F070 cable Appendix 2.9 F070 cable (24VDC input) Cable type: F070 cable Usage: 24VDC input Reference: For HR377/378 5VDC input Appendix 2.9 Connector name : DC24IN Connector name: DC5IN DC24IN +24V +24V Wire material : B-18 (19) U × 2SJ-1 × 9 Recommended manufacturer: Connector : 2-178288-5 Sumitomo Electric Industries…

  • Page 220: Appendix 2.11 F190 Cable (Rs-232C Device)

    APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS Appendix 2.11 F190 cable Appendix 2.11 F190 cable (RS-232C device) Cable type: F190 cable Usage: RS-232C device Appendix 2.11 Connection between M6 control unit (CF11) and RS-232C (Maintenance-dedicated cable) Connector name : CF11 Connector name : Port No.1 CF190 Connector name : Port No.2…

  • Page 221: Appendix 2.12 F240 Cable Manufacturing Drawing (External Battery Unit)

    APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS Appendix 2.12 F240 Cable Manufacturing Drawing Appendix 2.12 F240 Cable Manufacturing Drawing (External battery unit) Application: Connection between external battery unit FCU6-BT4D1 and NC control unit List of parts used * Refer to section 13. Connection of External Battery Part name/type Manufacturer Qty.

  • Page 222: Appendix 2.13 Fcua-R031 Cable Manufacturing Drawing (Analog Signal Input /Output)

    APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS Appendix 2.13 FCUA-R031 Cable Manufacturing Drawing Appendix 2.13 FCUA-R031 Cable Manufacturing Drawing (Analog signal input /output) Application: Analog signal input/output Option (compatible connector set) FCUA-CS000 (Note that only the control unit side connector is compatible.) List of parts used Assembly drawing Part name/model Manufacturer…

  • Page 223: Appendix 2.14 Fcua-R211 Cable Manufacturing Drawing (Communication Terminal Communication)

    APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS Appendix 2.14 FCUA-R211 Cable Manufacturing Drawing Appendix 2.14 FCUA-R211 Cable Manufacturing Drawing (Communication terminal communication) Application: Connection between control unit and remote I/O unit Connection between remote I/O unit and remote I/O unit Connection between remote I/O unit and communication terminal Option (corresponding connector set) FCUA-CN211 (Note that when a one-end connector and contact are used, there is no crimp terminal)

  • Page 224: Appendix 2.15 Fcua-R220 Cable Manufacturing Drawing (24Vdc Input)

    APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS Appendix 2.15 FCUA-R220 Cable Manufacturing Drawing Appendix 2.15 FCUA-R220 Cable Manufacturing Drawing (24VDC input) Application: Supply of 24VDC to remote I/O unit Option (compatible connector set) and communication terminal. FCUA-CN220 (Note that this corresponds only to the connector on the control unit side.) Assembly drawing List of parts used…

  • Page 225: Appendix 2.16 Fcua-R500 Cable Manufacturing Drawing [External Plc Link Ii (Melsec Bus Connection) A1S Type]

    APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS Appendix 2.16 FCUA-R500 Cable Manufacturing Drawing Appendix 2.16 FCUA-R500 Cable Manufacturing Drawing [External PLC link II (MELSEC bus connection) A1S type] Application: Connection between extension Option (compatible connector set) unit and MELSEC FCUA-CS500 (connector A1S type) Connection between extension unit and extension unit Assembly drawing…

  • Page 226
    APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS Appendix 2.16 FCUA-R500 Cable Manufacturing Drawing Connection diagram I-213 Downloaded from ManualsNet.com search engine…
  • Page 227: Appendix 2.17 Fcua-R501 Cable Manufacturing Drawing

    APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS Appendix 2.17 FCUA-R501 Cable Manufacturing Drawing Appendix 2.17 FCUA-R501 Cable Manufacturing Drawing [External PLC link II (MELSEC bus connection) A3N type] Application: Connection between extension Option (compatible connector set) unit and MELSEC FCUA-CS501 (connector A3N type) Assembly drawing MELSEC side Extension unit side…

  • Page 228
    APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS Appendix 2.17 FCUA-R501 Cable Manufacturing Drawing Connection diagram I-215 Downloaded from ManualsNet.com search engine…
  • Page 229: Appendix 2.18 Enc-Sp1 Cable (Spindle Drive Unit)

    APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS Appendix 2.18 ENC-SP1 cable Appendix 2.18 ENC-SP1 cable (Spindle drive unit) Cable type: ENC-SP1 cable Usage: Spindle drive unit Appendix 2.18 Connector name : ENC1 (ENC2) Connector name : CN8 Spindle drive side ENC1 (ENC2) Twist ENC1A (ENC2A) ENC1A*(ENC2A*) ENC1B (ENC2B)

  • Page 230: Appendix 2.20 M-Tm Terminator

    APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS Appendix 2.20 M-TM Terminator Appendix 2.20 M-TM Terminator Application: Control unit – Final control unit terminator when multiple units are connected Assembly drawing List of parts used 1 2 3 Part name/model Manufacturer Q’ty Connector 10120-3000VE Connector case 10320-52F0-008 Resistor…

  • Page 231: Appendix 2.21 R-Tm Terminator

    APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS Appendix 2.21 R-TM Terminator Appendix 2.21 R-TM Terminator Application: Remote I/O unit (MC link B communication) terminator Assembly drawing List of parts used Part name/model Manufacturer Q’ty Connector Tyco 1-178288-3 Electronics (X type) Tyco Connector case Electronics 1-175216-2 Resistor…

  • Page 232: Appendix 3 List Of Connector Sets

    APPENDIX 3 LIST OF CONNECTOR SETS APPENDIX 3 LIST OF CONNECTOR SETS I-219 Downloaded from ManualsNet.com search engine…

  • Page 233: Appendix 4 Emc Installation Guidelines

    APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES Appendix 4.1 Introduction APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES Appendix 4.1 Introduction EMC Directives became mandatory as of January 1, 1996. The subject products must have a CE mark attached indicating that the product complies with the Directives. As the NC unit is a component designed to control machine tools, it is believed that it is not a direct EMC Directives subject.

  • Page 234: Appendix 4.2 Emc Directives

    APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES Appendix 4.2 EMC Directives Appendix 4.2 EMC Directives The EMC Directives largely regulate the following two items. • Emission ..Capacity to prevent output of obstructive noise that adversely affects external devices. • Immunity ..Capacity to not malfunction due to obstructive noise from external source. The details of each level are classified in the table below.

  • Page 235: Appendix 4.3 Emc Measures

    APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES Appendix 4.3 EMC Measures Appendix 4.3 EMC Measures The main items relating to EMC measures include the following. (1) Store the device in a sealed metal panel. (2) Ground all conductors that are floating electrically. Decrease the impedance. (3) Increase the distance between the drive line and signal wire.

  • Page 236: Appendix 4.4 Panel Structure

    APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES Appendix 4.4 Panel Structure Appendix 4.4 Panel Structure The design of the panel is a very important factor for the EMC measures, so take the following measures into consideration. Appendix 4.4.1 Measures for Control Panel Body (1) Use metal for all members configuring the panel.

  • Page 237: Appendix 4.4.2 Measures For Door

    APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES Appendix 4.4 Panel Structure Appendix 4.4.2 Measures for Door (1) Use metal for all members configuring the door. (2) When joining the door, use a gasket to lower the impedance of the contacting sections, or use a structure with a large contact area as shown below.

  • Page 238: Appendix 4.4.3 Measures For Power Supply

    APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES Appendix 4.4 Panel Structure Appendix 4.4.3 Measures for Power Supply Shield the power supply section and insert a filter to prevent the noise from flowing in or out. Device Device Radiated noise Flow out Radiated noise Partition Conductive AC input…

  • Page 239: Appendix 4.5 Measures For Wiring In Panel

    APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES Appendix 4.5 Measures for Wiring in Panel Appendix 4.5 Measures for Wiring in Panel Cables act as antennas to propagate unnecessary noise, and thus must be appropriately shielded and treated. The following measures must be sufficiently considered for the cables (SH21/F010/ FCUA-R211) that carry out high-speed communication.

  • Page 240: Appendix 4.5.2 Nc Unit Grounding Wire

    APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES Appendix 4.5 Measures for Wiring in Panel Appendix 4.5.2 NC Unit Grounding Wire Operation panel Keyboard unit Display unit FCUA-KB FCU6-DU CNZ22 CR01 CR03 NC K/B CNZ24 CR02 CR05 CR06 FG cable FG cable FG cable Control panel R000 cable…

  • Page 241: Appendix 4.5.3 Shield Treatment Of Cables

    APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES Appendix 4.5 Measures for Wiring in Panel Appendix 4.5.3 Shield Treatment of Cables Use shielded cables for the cables wired outside the panel in the M60/60S Series. Use a shield clamp within 10cm of the lead-out port from the panel. (1) I/O interface cable [F010 cable] Shield clamp Operation panel…

  • Page 242
    APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES Appendix 4.5 Measures for Wiring in Panel (3) Remote I/O cable [FCUA-R211 cable] Shield clamp Control panel Control panel Base I/O unit Remote I/O unit FCUA-R211 cable Ferrite core • Use a shield clamp within 10cm from the panel’s inlet/outlet. •…
  • Page 243: Appendix 4.6 Parts For Emc Measures

    APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES Appendix 4.6 Parts for EMC Measures Appendix 4.6 Parts for EMC Measures Appendix 4.6.1 Shield Clamp Fitting The ground can be directly connected to the grounding plate as shown below to increase the effect. Install the grounding plate near the outlet (within 10cm) of each panel, and press against the grounding plate with the clamp fitting.

  • Page 244: Appendix 4.6.2 Ferrite Core

    APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES Appendix 4.6 Parts for EMC Measures Appendix 4.6.2 Ferrite Core The ferrite core is mounted integrally with the plastic case. This can be installed with one touch without cutting the interface cable or power supply cable. This ferrite core is effective against common mode noise, allowing measures against noise without affecting the quality of the signal.

  • Page 245: Appendix 4.6.3 Surge Protector

    APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES Appendix 4.6 Parts for EMC Measures Appendix 4.6.3 Surge Protector (1) Surge absorber Make sure that surge does not directly enter the AC line supplying the general-purpose stabilized power supply (prepared by user) to the control unit, base I/O unit, remote I/O unit and communication terminal.

  • Page 246
    APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES Appendix 4.6 Parts for EMC Measures 2) Part name : RAV-781BXZ-4 Manufacturer : Okaya Electric Industries Surge Surge Clamp Electro- Working Circuit voltage Max. tolerable resistance withstand voltage static temperature 50/60Hz Vrms circuit voltage level voltage V ±…
  • Page 247
    APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES Appendix 4.6 Parts for EMC Measures (2) Example of surge absorber installation Transformer Circuit breaker NC control section Other device (power supply for panel, etc.) Earth Control panel leakage (relay panel, breaker etc.) From power for panel supply Circuit breaker…
  • Page 248: Appendix 4.6.4 Selection Of Stabilized Power Supply

    APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES Appendix 4.6 Parts for EMC Measures Appendix 4.6.4 Selection of Stabilized Power Supply Consider the following characteristics when selecting the stabilized power supply (prepared by user). Use a power supply that complies with CE Marking or that follows the Safety Standards given below. Stabilized power supply selection items Item Unit…

  • Page 249: Appendix 5 Precautions For Compliance To Ul/C-Ul Standards

    APPENDIX 5 PRECAUTIONS FOR COMPLIANCE TO UL/C-UL STANDARDS APPENDIX 5 PRECAUTIONS FOR COMPLIANCE TO UL/c-UL STANDARDS Observe the following matters to comply with UL/c-UL Standards. (1) Selection of external 24VDC power supply unit The M60/60S Series numerical control unit complies with the UL Standards on the condition that the external power supply unit supplying 24VDC to each unit is a UL-approved part.

  • Page 250: Appendix 6 Trasportation Restrictions For Lithium Batteries

    ER6, ER6V 0.7g (built-in battery) Battery cell MR-BAT 0.48g MR-BAT Mitsubishi Electric Q6BAT 0.49g Q6BAT Battery (Note 1) Dedicated packaging is required if the shipment exceeds 12 batteries/24 battery cells. Package the batteries so that this limit is not exceeded.

  • Page 251: Appendix 6.1.2 Handling By User

    APPENDIX 6 TRASPORTATION RESTRICTIONS FOR LITHIUM BATTERIES Appendix 6.1 Restriction for Packing (Example) Rating nameplate for battery units Mitsubishi type Safety class Battery manufacturer type Lithium metal content Appendix 6.1.2 Handling by User The following technical opinion is solely Mitsubishi’s opinion. The shipper must confirm the latest IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations, IMDG Codes and laws and orders of the corresponding export country.

  • Page 252
    APPENDIX 6 TRASPORTATION RESTRICTIONS FOR LITHIUM BATTERIES Appendix 6.1 Restriction for Packing (2) When packaged by user The user must follow UN Regulations when packing, preparing for shipping and preparing the indications, etc. (a) Packing a lithium battery falling under Class 9 •…
  • Page 253: Appendix 6.1.3 Reference

    APPENDIX 6 TRASPORTATION RESTRICTIONS FOR LITHIUM BATTERIES Appendix 6.1 Restriction for Packing Appendix 6.1.3 Reference Refer to the following materials for details on the regulations and responses. Guidelines regarding transportation of lithium batteries and lithium ion batteries (Edition 2) …………Battery Association of Japan I -240 Downloaded from ManualsNet.com…

  • Page 254: Appendix 6.2 Issuing Domestic Law Of The United States For Primary Lithium Battery Transportation

    APPENDIX 6 TRASPORTATION RESTRICTIONS FOR LITHIUM BATTERIES Appendix 6.2 Issuing Domestic Law of the United States for Primary Lithium Battery Transportation Appendix 6.2 Issuing Domestic Law of the United States for Primary Lithium Battery Transportation Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) and Research and Special Programs Administration (RSPA) announced an additional regulation (interim final rule) for the primary lithium batteries transportation restrictions item in «Federal Register»…

  • Page 255: Appendix 7 Precautions For Use Of Peripheral Devices And Commercially Available Devices

    APPENDIX 7 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF PERIPHERAL DEVICES AND COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE DEVICES APPENDIX 7 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF PERIPHERAL DEVICES AND COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE DEVICES Peripheral Precautions device CF card Commercially available CF cards may not be compatible with MITSUBISHI units or suitable for FA environment for temperature- or noise-wise.

  • Page 256: Maintenance Manual

    II. MAINTENANCE MANUAL Downloaded from ManualsNet.com search engine…

  • Page 257: Explanation Of Module Functions

    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.1 HR071 Card 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.1 HR071 Card [Block diagram] E R 6 C F 0 5 B A T Cable enclosed with battery [Explanation of functions] The HR071 card is used in the external battery unit for holding the contents of the control section memory.

  • Page 258: Hr081/082/083 Card

    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.2 HR081/082/083 Card 1.2 HR081/082/083 Card [Block diagram] DCIN External Fuse power supply +3.3V 24VDC/3A DC/DC +12V Voltage detection circuit < Emergency stop switch Control signal CF01 +5VB ACFAIL Control circuit (Not used in the M60/60S Series) CHECK Voltage check…

  • Page 259
    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.2 HR081/082/083 Card [Connector layout diagram] This connector is not used. Normally, the battery on the HR081/082/083 card is connected. W hen using the external battery, connect the F240 cable. DC output OUT Battery Control signal IN/OUT CHECK 5: GND 4: External reset input…
  • Page 260
    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.3 HR111/113/114/146 Card 1.3 HR111/113/114/146 Card [Block diagram] Memory cassette Memory cassette (For function (For maintenance) expansion) CPU peripheral control PLC operation FROM SRAM External I/O interface To I/O card ENC #2 To expansion I/O card [Explanation of functions] The HR113/114/116/146 card is the main CPU card, and has the following specifications.
  • Page 261
    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.3 HR111/113/114/146 Card [Connector layout diagram] CBUS1 CBUS2 DC f an (f or 5V) RT#2 RT#1 RT#0 TEST1 TEST2 ENC2 CF10 NCLD1 NCSYS NCRST CF11 WDER TEST 1 & 2 : Test pins for maintenance and service NCRST : NC reset (do not press during normal system operation) [Explanation of settings]…
  • Page 262: Hr171 Card

    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.4 HR171 Card 1.4 HR171 Card [Block diagram] RS-422 transceiver Communication control circuit RS-422 transceiver BUS connector PCIBUS conversion circuit BUS buffer [Explanation of functions] The HR171 card has an M64AS, M64S, M65, M65S, M66 or M66S Series operation board interface, I/O link interface and PCI bus conversion circuit and interface for adding a high-speed program server function.

  • Page 263
    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.4 HR171 Card [Explanation of LEDs] Status Name Function Color Correspondence for error When During normal error Indicates the AUX1 transmission Contact the Mitsubishi Service Green Flickers ON or OFF state Center Indicates the AUX1 reception Check communication cable Green Flickers ON or OFF state…
  • Page 264: Hr211 Card

    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.5 HR211 Card 1.5 HR211 Card [Block diagram] RS232C CF11 CH1,CH2 HANDLE CH1 ~ CH3 [Explanation of functions] The HR211 card is the I/O expansion card for the RS-232C and manual pulse generator. Use the card by connecting the control unit CF11 connector to the HR211 card CF11 connector with an F050 cable.

  • Page 265: Hr325, 327, 335, 337 Cards

    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.6 HR325, 327, 335, 337 Cards 1.6 HR325, 327, 335, 337 Cards [Block diagram] Connection with control section C F 1 0 Servo drive 32-point unit C F 3 1 machine input Servo drive unit Synchronous feed encoder 32-point…

  • Page 266
    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.6 HR325, 327, 335, 337 Cards [Connector layout diagram] SKIP ENC1 SV2 SV1 CR31 CF31 CF32 CF33CF34 RI02 RI01 DCIN 24IN RAL1 5OUT RAL2 [Explanation of settings] Rotary switch CS1: Set the CF31/CF33 side devices of the machine input/output (DI/DO) connected to the remote I/O communication.
  • Page 267: Hr357 Card

    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.7 HR357 Card 1.7 HR357 Card [Block diagram] Communi- Remote RIO3 Scan circuit cation DI/DO:32/32 controller communi- cation Scan input/output CF35 32 points/32 points Communi- Scan circuit cation DI/DO:32/32 controller Digit al input photo- CF31 32 points coupler Communi-…

  • Page 268
    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.7 HR357 Card [Connector layout] DIO SCAN2SCAN1 (Scan DI/DO:64/64) CF35 RIO3 DCIN CF31 CF33 (DI:32) DO:32 [Explanation of settings] Rotary switch Explanation SCAN1 Scan input/output station No. setting 32 pts. /32 pts. (Normally set to 0) SCAN2 Scan input/output station No.
  • Page 269: Hr377 Card

    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.8 HR377 Card 1.8 HR377 Card [Block diagram] Connection with control section CF11 CF10 32-point machine Servo input CF31 drive unit Servo drive unit 32-point Synchronous machine feed encoder output input CF33 Skip signal SKIP: 8 points SKIP input Driver…

  • Page 270
    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.8 HR377 Card [Connector layout diagram] [Explanation of settings] Rotary switch CS1: Set the CF31/CF32 side devices of the machine input/output (DI/DO) connected to the remote I/O communication. Rotary switch CS2: Set the CF33/CF34 side devices of the machine input/output (DI/DO) connected to the remote I/O communication.
  • Page 271: Hr378 Card

    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.9 HR378 Card 1.9 HR378 Card [Block diagram] Connection with control section CF11 CF10 Servo drive unit Servo drive unit 32-point Synchronous machine feed encoder input input Skip signal SKIP: 8 points SKIP input Driver Remote I/O RIO1A 32-point…

  • Page 272
    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.9 HR378 Card [Connector layout diagram] [Explanation of settings] CS1: 0th station setting rotary switch of remote I/O No. 1 system (normally set to 0) CS2: 1st station setting rotary switch of remote I/O No. 1 system (normally set to 1) <Setting method>…
  • Page 273
    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.9 HR378 Card [Explanation of LEDs] Status Name Function Color Correspondence for error When During normal error LED 1 24IN 24VDC input check Green Not lit Check 24VDC voltage (two- Rotary switch [CS1] setting station Check each remote I/O unit’s color RIO1…
  • Page 274: Memory Cassette Hr4

    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.10 Memory Cassette HR4 1.10 Memory Cassette HR4 [Explanation of functions] The HR4 memory cassette is a cassette-type memory card used for maintenance and function expansion, etc. There are SRAM cassettes and FROM cassettes with separate functions. Order parts separately from Mitsubishi.

  • Page 275: Hr513 Card

    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.11 HR513 Card 1.11 HR513 Card [Block diagram] Expansion connector HR513 RT bus #2 DPRAM CF51A MELSEC ABUS connector Commu nication to MELSEC main base. con tr oller To next MELSEC bus connection unit Control CF51B [Explanation of functions] The HR513 card functions as the bus connection interface with the MELSEC mounted as an option…

  • Page 276
    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.11 HR513 Card [Connector layout diagram] CF51A CF51B RTBUS [Explanation of settings] CS: Rotary switch for unit No. setting <Setting method> Rotary switch: CS setting Setting position Function explanation Supplement Not used 1 to 7 Correspond to units 1 to 7 (Reset signal to the PLC valid) Not used 9 and following…
  • Page 277: Hr531/534 Cards

    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.12 HR531/534 Cards 1.12 HR531/534 Cards [Block diagram] RS-422 AUX1 transceiver Comm unication control circuit RS-422 AUX2 transceiver 10BASE-5 Ethernet control cir cuit Selec tor 10BASE-T [Explanation of functions] The HR53 card has an M60 Series communication terminal interface, I/O link interface and Ethernet 10BASE-5 and 10BASE-T interface.

  • Page 278
    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.12 HR531/534 Cards [Connector layout diagram] • HR531 card A and B cards Connector for PLD writing Connector for I/O interface (2ch) For I/O link channel No. setting AUX2 NCNO Connector for I/O interface (1ch) TEST Connector for motherboard interface…
  • Page 279
    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.12 HR531/534 Cards [Connector layout diagram] • HR534 card A and B cards Connector for Connector for PLD writing I/O interface (2ch) Connector for For I/O link station No. setting ETHERNET ( BASE- 5) Connector for ETHERNET ( BASE- T) AUX2 BASE5…
  • Page 280
    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.12 HR531/534 Cards [Explanation of LEDs] Status Name Function Color Correspondence for error When During normal error Contact the Mitsubishi Service AUX1 transmission status display Green Flickers ON or OFF Center Check communication cable AUX1 reception status display Green Flickers ON or OFF connection AUX2 transmission status display…
  • Page 281: Hr571 Card

    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.13 HR571 Card 1.13 HR571 Card [Block diagram] 2-port SRAM RT-BUS (32kB) (8kB) [Explanation of functions] This is used in the M-NET interface which is one of interface with the sequencer. TS1 M-NET (RS-422 multidrop) (Note) The ISP connector and TEST connector on the HR571 card cannot be used.

  • Page 282: Hr591 Card

    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.14 HR591 Card 1.14 HR591 Card [Block diagram] AUX-IN AUX-OUT [Explanation of functions] The HR591 card is the relay branch board used when connecting (I/O linking) three or more control units. Refer to section I-22 «4.2.7 Connection of I/O Link» in the Connection Manual for details on connecting.

  • Page 283: Hr831 Card

    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.15 HR831 Card 1.15 HR831 Card [Block diagram] ATA type IC card control IC card holder circuit EXTPCI1 connector EXTPCI2 connector [Expansion of functions] The HR831 card has an IC card interface for the M65/66 Series’ high-speed program server function. This card is combined with the Ethernet I/F HR832 and used by the high-speed program server unit (FCU6-EP203-1).

  • Page 284: Hr832 Card

    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.16 HR832 Card 1.16 HR832 Card [Block diagram] 10Base-T EXTPCI2 RJ45 100Base-T connector connector Ethernet Control circuit For Work SRAM [Expansion of functions] The HR832 card has an Ethernet interface for the M60/60S Series high-speed program server function.

  • Page 285
    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.16 HR832 Card [Explanation of settings] The HR832 card has no sections to be adjusted or set. [Explanation of LEDs] Status Name Function Color Correspondence for error When During normal error Ethernet transmission status Check Ethernet cable connection Green Not lit display…
  • Page 286: Qy231 Card

    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.17 QY231 Card 1.17 QY231 Card [Block diagram] Machine input photo- CMD82 46 points coupler Communi- CSH41 cation Remote controller communi- cation Machine output CFD83 output 48 points dr iver Machine input photo- CMD81 16 points coupler Communi- cation…

  • Page 287
    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.17 QY231 Card [Connector layout diagram] (SW1) mounted CMD81 CFD83 CMD82 [Explanation of settings] 1) Rotary switch CS1 : Remote I/O station No. setting rotary switch 0 to 7 : Corresponds to RIO station Nos. 0 to 7 (Note) 8 or higher: Cannot be set ∗…
  • Page 288: Qy287 Card

    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.18 QY287 Card 1.18 QY287 Card [Block diagram] VIDEO → LCD signal output RGB signal conversion Backlight power Backlight ON/OFF [Explanation of functions] The QY287 card is used for the 10.4-type color LCD display. The card converts the video signals output from the RX212 card into color LCD signals.

  • Page 289: Rx211/Rx212 Card

    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.19 RX211/RX212 Card 1.19 RX211/RX212 Card [Block diagram] 24V DC IN (CR01) 5V DC OUT CRTC EPROM VIDEO (CR04) NC connection VIDEO (CR02) RS422 HD/VD DCLK Communication control circuit V-RAM R-IO RS422 (CR05) V-RAM Communication control circuit (CR03) (CR06)

  • Page 290
    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.19 RX211/RX212 Card [Connector layout diagram] [Explanation of settings] CS1: Rotary switch for machining center system/lathe system keyboard section. Machining center system keyboard KB20 : «0» Lathe system keyboard KB30 : «1» [Explanation of LEDs] Status Name Function…
  • Page 291: Rx213 Card

    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.20 RX213 Card 1.20 RX213 Card [Block diagram] 24V DC IN 5V DC OUT CRTC EPROM LCD-RAM VIDEO RS422 HD/VD LVIC DCLK Communication control circuit VIDEO DU/DL V-RAM CP/LP R-IO RS422 V-RAM Communication control circuit EXT-BUS [Explanation of functions] The RX213 card is the control card for the 7.2-type monochrome LCD display.

  • Page 292
    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.20 RX213 Card [Connector layout diagram] (Not mounted) [Explanation of settings] SW1: Rotary switch for machining center system/lathe system keyboard section. Machining center system keyboard KB20 : «0» Lathe system keyboard KB30 : «1» [Explanation of LEDs] Status Name Function…
  • Page 293: Rx215 Card

    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.21 RX215 Card 1.21 RX215 Card [Block diagram] 24V DC IN 5V DC OUT CRTC EPROM LCD-RAM VIDEO RS422 HD/VD LVIC DCLK Communication control circuit VIDEO DU/DL V-RAM CP/LP R-IO RS422 V-RAM Communication control circuit EXT-BUS [Explanation of functions] The RX215 card is the control card for the 10.4-type monochrome LCD display.

  • Page 294
    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.21 RX215 Card [Connector layout diagram] (Not mounted) (Not mounted) [Explanation of settings] SW1: Rotary switch for machining center system/lathe system keyboard section. Machining center system keyboard KB20 : «0» Lathe system keyboard KB30 : «1» [Explanation of LEDs] Status Name…
  • Page 295: Hr213 Card

    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.22 HR213 Card 1.22 HR213 Card [Block diagram] SDRAM DRAM (16MB) To NC unit peripheral / IO To remote I/O unit communication controller To LCD panel Graphic To NC keyboard controller 24VDC IN To backlight inverter 5VDC FLROM Video memory…

  • Page 296
    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.22 HR213 Card [Connector layout diagram] 5VON 12V0N INVPON DSPOF DCIN 3V0N LCDPON CR05 CR02 NCSYS KBSEL RWDG RD SD [Explanation of settings] KBSEL: Switch for designating connection keyboard type (M system: 0) Machining system keyboard FCU6-KB022: «0» NCSYS: Internal setting switch (Use prohibited) [Explanation of LEDs] Status…
  • Page 297: Rx291 Card

    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.23 RX291 Card 1.23 RX291 Card [Block diagram] Not used [Explanation of functions] The RX291 card is the expansion memory card used when using the 10.4-type color LCD display. This is mounted on the RX212 card and used. [Connector layout diagram] [Explanation of settings] CS: Rotary switch for confirmation during Mitsubishi servicing.

  • Page 298: Hr576 Card

    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.24 HR576 Card 1.24 HR576 Card [Block diagram] CC-Link 2-port RAM RT-BUS communication controller controller 2-port SRAM [Explanation of functions] The HR576 card functions as master/local station of CC-Link which is one of the field networks. (Note) The ISP connector on the HR576 card cannot be used.

  • Page 299
    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.24 HR576 Card [Explanation of settings] SW1(X10), SW2(X1) : Station No. setting switch SW1 : Ten’s place of unit station No. is set. (Default setting : 0) SW2 : One’s place of unit station No. is set. (Default setting : 0) In remote net mode Master station Local station…
  • Page 300
    1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS 1.24 HR576 Card [Explanation of LEDs] Status Master station Local station (Standby master (Standby master Name Function station) station) When During When During normal error normal error : When the unit is normal Not lit Not lit Not lit : When watch dog timer error ERR.
  • Page 301: Troubleshooting

    2. TROUBLESHOOTING 2.1 List of Unit LEDs 2. TROUBLESHOOTING 2.1 List of Unit LEDs (1) NC control section CBUS1 CBUS2 OPEN DCIN DCOUT ENC2 PSEMG BATALM CF11 CF10 RS T [Explanation of LEDs] Status Correspondence for Name Function Color error When normal During error DCIN 24VDC input check…

  • Page 302
    2. TROUBLESHOOTING 2.1 List of Unit LEDs (2) Base I/O unit Base I/O unit CS2 CS1 CR31 RIO2 RIO1 DCIN 24IN RAL1 5OUT RAL2 [Explanation of LED functions] Status Name Function Color Correspondence for error When During normal error LED1 24IN 24VDC input check Green…
  • Page 303: Troubleshooting

    2. TROUBLESHOOTING 2.2 Troubleshooting 2.2 Troubleshooting 2.2.1 Confirmation of Trouble State Confirm «when», «when doing what», and «what kind of» trouble occurred. (1) When? What time did the trouble occur? (2) When doing what? What was the NC operation mode? •…

  • Page 304: When In Trouble

    2. TROUBLESHOOTING 2.2 Troubleshooting 2.2.2 When in Trouble If the system does not operate as planned or if there is any trouble in the operation, confirm the following points and then contact the Mitsubishi Service Center. − Examples of trouble − •…

  • Page 305
    2. TROUBLESHOOTING 2.2 Troubleshooting (1) Problems related to the power supply The power does not turn ON. Cause Remedy The power cord is disconnected or Check the cable between the NC unit and the external loose. power supply, and between the external power supply and socket.
  • Page 306
    2. TROUBLESHOOTING 2.2 Troubleshooting The power turns OFF. Remedy Cause There is a problem in the power Check whether the voltage fluctuates at certain time zones. socket. Check whether an instantaneous power failure has occurred. A problem occurs when the Check whether the voltage drops instantaneously when the peripheral device starts operating.
  • Page 307
    2. TROUBLESHOOTING 2.2 Troubleshooting (2) Problems when starting the system The NC does not start up correctly. Phenomenon Remedy 8 is displayed on the CPU card’s Check that the rotary switch NCSYS is set to 0. If not set to 7-segment display NCLD1.
  • Page 308: Daily Maintenance And Periodic Inspection And Maintenance

    3. DAILY MAINTENANCE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 3.1 Maintenance Tools 3. DAILY MAINTENANCE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 3.1 Maintenance Tools (1) Measuring instruments The following measuring instruments are used to confirm that the voltage is being supplied correctly to the NC unit, to confirm that the wiring to the NC unit is correct, and to carry out simple troubleshooting.

  • Page 309: Escutcheon

    3. DAILY MAINTENANCE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 3.2 Maintenance Items 3.2.1 Escutcheon (1) Cleaning the escutcheon 1) Keep the rear side of the escutcheon as clean as possible. 2) Wipe the escutcheon with a soft, clean, dry cloth. If cleaning is still required, put some neutral detergent on a cloth and wipe.

  • Page 310: Replacement Methods

    3. DAILY MAINTENANCE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 3.3 Replacement Methods 3.3 Replacement Methods 3.3.1 Cable If the cable is replaced without turning the power OFF, the normal unit or peripheral devices could be damaged, and risks could be imposed. Disconnect each cable with the following procedures.

  • Page 311
    3. DAILY MAINTENANCE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 3.3 Replacement Methods b) For a flat cable type connector with latches, open the latches in the directions of the arrows, and pull the connector off. (1) Open (2) Pull c) For a flat cable type connector without latches, hold the connector with a thumb and forefinger, and pull the connector off.
  • Page 312: Durable Parts

    3. DAILY MAINTENANCE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 3.3 Replacement Methods 3.3.2 Durable Parts (1) Control unit battery All data, such as the parameters and machining programs that need to be backed up when the power is turned OFF, are saved by a lithium battery installed in the control unit’s battery holder. Battery ………

  • Page 313
    3. DAILY MAINTENANCE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 3.3 Replacement Methods (2) External battery unit battery When the external battery unit (FCU6-BT4D1) is used, the data, such as the parameters and machining programs, which needs to be backed up when the power is turned OFF, is held by the lithium battery mounted on the external battery unit.
  • Page 314
    3. DAILY MAINTENANCE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 3.3 Replacement Methods 3.3.3 Control Unit (1) Control unit a) Replacement procedures Always replace the control unit with the machine power turned OFF. 1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.) 2) Open the electric cabinet door.
  • Page 315
    3. DAILY MAINTENANCE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 3.3 Replacement Methods (2) Base I/O unit The base I/O unit is generally installed on the electric cabinet side. a) Replacement procedures Always replace the base I/O unit with the machine power turned OFF. 1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF.
  • Page 316: Control Pcb

    3. DAILY MAINTENANCE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 3.3 Replacement Methods 3.3.4 Control PCB (1) Control section power supply PCB (HR081/HR082/HR083) The control section power supply PCB is supplied with 24VDC from an external source. This PCB generates the DC voltage required for each control PCB in the control section. a) Replacement procedures Always replace the control section power supply PCB with the machine power turned OFF.

  • Page 317
    3. DAILY MAINTENANCE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 3.3 Replacement Methods (2) Expansion PCB The expansion PCB is used to expand the system for adding a serial port, etc. (Refer to the I Connection Manual, Section 2.1 for information related to expansion PCB types and functions.) Up to two expansion PCBs can be added.
  • Page 318: Memory Cassette

    3. DAILY MAINTENANCE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 3.3 Replacement Methods 3.3.5 Memory Cassette (1) HR4 The memory cassette is a PCB used to store user PLC and machining programs, and is installed on the CBUS#2 connector of the control section. a) Replacement procedures Always replace the memory cassette with the machine power turned OFF.

  • Page 319: High-Speed Program Server

    3. DAILY MAINTENANCE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 3.3 Replacement Methods 3.3.6 High-speed Program Server (1) High-speed program server unit (FCU6-EP203-1) The high-speed program server is configured of the HR831 and HR832 cards and an F150 cable. It is replaced as a unit. a) Replacement procedures Turn the machine power OFF before replacing the high-speed program server unit.

  • Page 320
    Revision History Date of revision Manual No. Revision details Jul. 1997 BNP-B2183A Detailed errors were corrected. Feb. 1998 BNP-B2183B Errors were corrected. New items were added. Sept. 1998 BNP-B2183C Errors were corrected. New items were added. Oct. 1999 BNP-B2183D M65/66 was added. EMC Directives measures were added to Appendix 4.
  • Page 321
    TEL: +886-4-2359-0688 FAX: +886-4-2359-0689 Tainan CNC Service Satellite TEL: +886-4-2359-0688 FAX: +886-4-2359-0689 Korean FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION KOREA CO., LTD.) Korea CNC Service Center DONGSEO GAME CHANNEL BLDG. 2F. 660-11, DEUNGCHON-DONG KANGSEO-KU SEOUL, 157-030 KOREA TEL: +82-2-3660-9607 FAX: +82-2-3663-0475 Downloaded from ManualsNet.com…
  • Page 322
    Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions in the contents described in this manual. However, please understand that in some unavoidable cases simultaneous revision is not possible. Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric dealer with any questions or comments regarding the use of this product. Duplication Prohibited This instruction manual may not be reproduced in any form, in part or in whole, without written permission from Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
  • Page 323
    Downloaded from ManualsNet.com search engine…

Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60, 60S Series Users Manual PDF

Summary of Content for Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60, 60S Series Users Manual PDF

CNC 60/60S Series

(LADDER SECTION) PLC PROGRAMMING MANUAL

BNP-B2212*(ENG)

MELDASMAGIC is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. Other company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective company.

Introduction These specifications are the programming manual used when creating the sequence program with the onboard PLC development tool or PLC development software. The PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) is largely divided into the basic commands, function commands and exclusive commands, and ample command types are available. The commands can be used according to the purpose and application such as the PLC support function used when supporting the user PLCs. This Instruction Manual does not explain the operation procedures for programming the sequence program with onboard or PLC development software. Refer to the related material listed below for details. (1) M64 Series MELDAS 64 PLC Onboard Instruction Manual ….. BNP-B2213 MELDAS 64 PLC Program Development Manual (Personal Computer Section) ….. BNP-B2215 MELDAS 64 PLC Interface Manual ….. BNP-B2211 (2) MELDASMAGIC 64 Series MELDASMAGIC 64 PLC Onboard Instruction Manual ….. BNP-B2213 MELDASMAGIC 64 PLC Program Development Manual (Personal Computer Section) ….. BNP-B2215 MELDASMAGIC 64 PLC Interface Manual ….. BNP-B2211 The «Controller» and «Control Unit» in this Instruction Manual are equivalent to the «NC Card» in the MELDASMAGIC 64 Series.

i

CONTENTS 1. System Configuration ………………………………………………………………………… 1

1.1 System Configuration for PLC Development ……………………………………… 1 1.2 User PLC (Ladder) Development Procedure………………………………………. 3 2. PLC Processing Program …………………………………………………………………… 4

2.1 PLC Processing Program Level and Operation ………………………………….. 4 2.2 User Memory Area Configuration …………………………………………………….. 4 3. Input/Output Signals ………………………………………………………………………….. 5

3.1 Input/Output Signal Types and Processing ……………………………………….. 5 3.2 Handling of Input Signals Designated for High Speed Input …………………. 6 3.3 High Speed Input/output Designation Method ……………………………………. 8 3.4 Limits for Using High Speed Processing Program ……………………………… 9 3.4.1 Separation of Main Processing and High Speed Processing Bit Operation Areas …………………………………………………………….. 9 3.4.2 Separation of Remote I/O Output ………………………………………….. 10 4. Parameters ………………………………………………………………………………………… 12

4.1 PLC Constants ……………………………………………………………………………… 12 4.2 Bit Selection Parameters ………………………………………………………………… 14 5. Explanation of Devices ………………………………………………………………………. 18

5.1 Devices and Device Numbers …………………………………………………………. 18 5.2 Device List ……………………………………………………………………………………. 18 5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices ………………………………………………………. 19 5.3.1 Input/output X, Y, U, W ………………………………………………………… 19 5.3.2 Internal Relays M , G and F, Latch Relay L …………………………….. 20 5.3.3 Special Relays E ………………………………………………………………… 20 5.3.4 Timer T, Q …………………………………………………………………………. 21 5.3.5 Counter C, B ………………………………………………………………………. 23 5.3.6 Data Register D ………………………………………………………………….. 23 5.3.7 File Register R ……………………………………………………………………. 24 5.3.8 Accumulator A ……………………………………………………………………. 25 5.3.9 Index Registers Z and V ………………………………………………………. 25 5.3.10 Nesting N …………………………………………………………………………… 26 5.3.11 Pointer P ……………………………………………………………………………. 26 5.3.12 Decimal Constant K …………………………………………………………….. 27 5.3.13 Hexadecimal Constant H ……………………………………………………… 27

ii

6. Explanation of Commands …………………………………………………………………. 28 6.1 Command List ………………………………………………………………………………. 28 6.1.1 Basic Commands …………………………………………………………………. 28 6.1.2 Function Commands …………………………………………………………….. 29 6.1.3 Exclusive commands ……………………………………………………………. 35 6.2 Command Formats ……………………………………………………………………….. 36 6.2.1 How to Read the Command Table ………………………………………….. 36 6.2.2 No. of Steps ………………………………………………………………………… 37 6.2.3 END Command ……………………………………………………………………. 37 6.2.4 Index Ornament …………………………………………………………………… 38 6.2.5 Digit Designation ………………………………………………………………….. 39 7. Basic Commands

(LD, LDI, AND, ANI, OR, ORI, ANB, ORB …..) ……………………………………….. 42 8. Function Commands

(=, >, <, +, , *, /, BCD, BIN, MOV …..) …………………………………………………… 73 9. Exclusive Commands ………………………………………………………………………… 190

9.1 ATC Exclusive Command ………………………………………………………………. 191 9.1.1 Outline of ATC Control ………………………………………………………… 191 9.1.2 ATC Operation …………………………………………………………………… 191 9.1.3 Explanation of Terminology ………………………………………………….. 191 9.1.4 Relationship between Tool Registration Screen and Magazines … 192 9.1.5 Use of ATC and ROT Commands …………………………………………. 193 9.1.6 Basic Format of ATC Exclusive Command ……………………………… 194 9.1.7 Command List ……………………………………………………………………. 195 9.1.8 Control Data Buffer Contents ……………………………………………….. 195 9.1.9 File Register (R Register) Assignment and Parameters ……………. 196 9.1.10 Details of Each Command (ATC K1~ATC K11) ………………………. 198 9.1.11 Precautions for Using ATC Exclusive Instructions ……………………. 207 9.1.12 Examples of Tool Registration Screen …………………………………… 207 9.1.13 Display of Spindle Tool and Standby Tool ………………………………. 209 9.2 Rot Commands …………………………………………………………………………….. 210 9.2.1 Command List (ROT K1, ROT K3) ………………………………………… 210 9.3 Tool Life Management Exclusive Command ……………………………………… 216 9.3.1 Tool Life Management System ……………………………………………… 216 9.3.2 Tool Command System ……………………………………………………….. 216 9.3.3 Spare Tool Selection System ……………………………………………….. 217 9.3.4 Interface ……………………………………………………………………………. 217 9.3.5 User PLC Processing When the Tool Life Management Function Is Selected …………………………………………………………………………. 218 9.3.6 Examples of Tool Life Management Screen ……………………………. 226 9.4 DDB (Direct Data Bus) … Asynchronous DDB …………………………………… 227 9.4.1 Basic Format of Command …………………………………………………… 227 9.4.2 Basic Format of Control Data ……………………………………………….. 227

iii

9.5 External Search …………………………………………………………………………….. 230 9.5.1 Function …………………………………………………………………………….. 230 9.5.2 Interface ……………………………………………………………………………. 230 9.5.3 Search Start Instruction ……………………………………………………….. 232 9.5.4 Timing Charts and Error Causes …………………………………………… 232 9.5.5 Sequence Program Example ………………………………………………… 234 10. PLC Help Function ……………………………………………………………………………… 235 10.1 Alarm Message Display ………………………………………………………………… 236 10.1.1 Interface ……………………………………………………………………………. 236 10.1.2 Message Creation ………………………………………………………………. 237 10.1.3 F or R Type Selection Parameter ………………………………………….. 238 10.2 Operator Message Display ……………………………………………………………. 239 10.2.1 Interface ……………………………………………………………………………. 239 10.2.2 Operator Message Preparation …………………………………………….. 240 10.2.3 Operator Message Display Validity Parameter ………………………… 240 10.3 PLC Switches ……………………………………………………………………………… 241 10.3.1 Explanation of CRT Screen ………………………………………………….. 241 10.3.2 Explanation of Operation ……………………………………………………… 242 10.3.3 Signal Processing ……………………………………………………………….. 243 10.3.4 Switch Name Preparation …………………………………………………….. 247 10.4 Key Operation by User PLC

(This cannot be used with the MELDASMAGIC 64 Series.) ……………….. 248 10.4.1 Key Data Flow ……………………………………………………………………. 248 10.4.2 Key Operations That Can Be Performed ………………………………… 248 10.4.3 Key Data Processing Timing ………………………………………………… 249 10.4.4 Layout of Keys on Communication Terminal …………………………… 250 10.4.5 List of Key Codes ……………………………………………………………….. 251 10.5 Load Meter Display ……………………………………………………………………… 253 10.5.1 Interface ……………………………………………………………………………. 253 10.6 External Machine Coordinate System Compensation ……………………….. 255 10.7 User PLC Version Display …………………………………………………………….. 256 10.7.1 Interface ……………………………………………………………………………. 256 11. PLC Axis Control ……………………………………………………………………………….. 258 11.1 Outline ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 258 11.2 Specifications ……………………………………………………………………………… 258 11.2.1 Basic Specifications …………………………………………………………….. 258 11.2.2 Other Restrictions ……………………………………………………………….. 259 11.3 PLC Interface ……………………………………………………………………………… 260 11.3.1 DDBS Function Command …………………………………………………… 260 11.3.2 Control Information Data ……………………………………………………… 261 11.3.3 Control Information Data Details …………………………………………… 262 11.3.3.1 Commands ………………………………………………………………………. 262 11.3.3.2 Status ……………………………………………………………………………… 263 11.3.3.3 Alarm No. ………………………………………………………………………… 270 11.3.3.4 Control Signals (PLC axis control information data) ……………….. 271 11.3.3.5 Axis Designation ……………………………………………………………….. 273

iv

11.3.3.6 Operation Mode ……………………………………………………………….. 273 11.3.3.7 Feedrate ………………………………………………………………………….. 274 11.3.3.8 Movement Data ………………………………………………………………… 274 11.3.3.9 Machine Position ………………………………………………………………. 275 11.3.3.10 Remaining Distance ………………………………………………………… 275 11.3.4 Reference Point Return near Point Detection …………………………….. 276 11.3.5 Handle Feed Axis Selection …………………………………………………….. 277 12. Appendix …………………………………………………………………………………………. 278 12.1 Example of Faulty Circuit …………………………………………………………… 278

1. System Configuration

— 1 —

1. System Configuration 1.1 System Configuration for PLC Development (1) M64 Series The system configuration for PLC development is shown below.

Ladder development using the communication terminal. (Onboard development)

M64 Control unit

Communication terminal

To RS-232-C connector

Personal computer

Commercially available printer (Example : PC-PR201GS)

Base I/O unit

To AUX 1 connector

RS-232-C

RS-232-C

Program development, ladder monitor and PLC RUN/STOP, etc.

Development and saving of data (Hard disk or floppy disk)

Up/downloading is executed with the controllers maintenance function.

Note) Refer to the «PLC Onboard Instruction Manual» for development using the communication

terminal (onboard development), and the «PLC Program Development Manual (Personal Computer Section)» for development using the personal computer.

1. System Configuration

— 2 —

(2) MELDASMAGIC 64 Series

Ladder development and signal operation monitoring are carried out from the MELDASMAGIC Monitor using the NC onboard function. By using the optional PLC development software, the ladder can be development without the NC card.

MELDASMAGIC Monitor (software) PLC develop- ment software MELDASMAGIC

Monitor

PLC ladder area NC card built-in RAM 16K step 128Kbytes

* Refer to the MELDASMAGIC Monitor Operation Manual for information on the MELDASMAGIC Monitor.

Base I/O unit

Note) Refer to the «PLC Onboard Instruction Manual (BNP-B2130)» for development using the

onboard PLC development tool, and the «PLC Programming Manual (Personal Computer Section) (BN-B2132)» for development using the PLC development software.

1. System Configuration

— 3 —

1.2 User PLC (Ladder) Development Procedure The procedure for creating the user PLC, used to control the control target (machine) built into the control unit, is shown below.

Procedure Desktop Onboard (actual machine) Personal computer

When created onboard (with actual machine), print output is not possible. When created with a personal computer, print out the non-converted PLC.)

Run the ROM. (Run the RAM for the MELDASMAGIC 64 Series.)

When created with a personal computer, the program must be converted with the conversion software before it is serially transmitted.

Decide how many of which remote I/O units to order for the MELDAS 64 Series (MELDAS MAGIC 64 Series).

Back up data on floppy disk

End

Assignment of input/output signals

Decision of program size Decision of No. of input/output points (remote I/O)

Save on personal computer’s hard disk or floppy disk.

Using the maintenance function, transmit and save data on 3.5 FD or in personal computer.

Decision of machine Decision of control unit

Start

Programming

Creation of ladder diagram Assignment of internal relays

Debugging completed?

Ladder monitor

(RAM for MELDASMAGIC 64 Series)

Yes

No

ROM Debugging (ROM operation)

Print output

Device No. Signal name X0 — — — — — — X1 — — — — — — X2 — — — — — —

Serial transmission (Bus transmission for the MELDASMAGIC 64 Series)

Convert the PLC with the conversion software installed in the personal computer. (Note 1) Note that the PLC cannot be changed after conversion. If changes are required, change the non-converted PLC, and then convert again. Using the control unit’s maintenance function and transmission software installed in the personal computer, serially transmitted the converted PLC. (Personal computer control unit)

(MMI Software for MELDASMAGIC 64 Series)

2. PLC Processing Program

— 4 —

2. PLC Processing Program 2.1 PLC Processing Program Level and Operation Table 2.1-1 explains the contents of users PLC processing level and Fig. 2.1-1 shows the timing chart. Table 2.1-1 PLC processing level

Program name Description (frequency, level, etc.) High-speed processing program

This program starts periodically with a time interval of 7.1ms. This program has the highest level as a program that starts periodically. It is used in signal processing where high speed processing is required. Processing time of this program shall not exceed 0.5ms. Application example: Position count control of turret and ATC magazine

Main processing program (ladder)

This program runs constantly. When one ladder has been executed from the head to END, the cycle starts again at the head.

(Note 1) The section from the END command to the next scan is done immediately as shown with

the X section. Note that the min. scan time will be 14.2msec. Fig. 2.1-1 PLC processing program operation timing chart 2.2 User Memory Area Configuration The user memory area approximate configuration and size are shown below.

Control information Control table indicating the user PLC configuration (The table is automatically generated.) <1280 bytes>

P251 High speed processing program

High-speed processing program The program does not need to be a high speed processing program.

P252 Main processing program

PLC main process <16 Kbyte together with high speed process>

Message data

Message data for alarm messages, PLC switches, etc. <32 Kbyte-main process-high speed process-control information>

Max. 32 Kbyte from control information to messages.

3. Input/Output Signals

— 5 —

3. Input/Output Signals 3.1 Input/Output Signal Types and Processing The input/output signals handled in user PLC are as follows: (1) Input/output from/to controller (2) Input/output from/to operation board (Note 1) (3) Input/output from/to machine The user PLC does not directly input or output these signals from or to hardware or controller; it inputs

or outputs the signals from or to input/output image memory. For the reading and writing with the hardware or controller, the controller will perform the input/output according to the level of the main process or high speed process.

(Note 1) The operation board here refers to when the remote I/O is installed on the communication

terminal. (This cannot be used with the MELDASMAGIC 64 Series.) Fig. 3.1-1 Concept of input/output processing Fig. 3.1-2 Input/output processing conforming to program level

Controller

Input/output image memory (device X, Y)

Operation board

Machine

Controller User PLC

High speed processing input/output

Main processing input/output

The controller reads the high speed input designation input, and sets in the image memory.

The controller outputs the high speed output designation output from the image memory to the machine.

User PLC high speed processing

P251

The controller reads the input other than the high speed input designation, and sets in the image memory.

The controller outputs the output other than the high speed output desig- nation from the image memory to the machine.

User PLC main high speed processing

P252

3. Input/Output Signals

— 6 —

Table 3.1-1 lists whether or not high speed input/output, interrupt input and initial processing can be performed.

Table 3.1-1 Whether or not high speed input/output, interrupt input and initial can be performed High speed input

specification High speed output specification

Input signal from control unit x x Output signal to control unit x x Input signal from machine (2-byte units) x Output signal to machine x (2-byte units) Input signal from operation board (Cannot be used with the MELDASMAGIC 64 Series)

x

x

Output signal to operation board (Cannot be used with the MELDASMAGIC 64 Series)

x

x

Input signal from MELSEC when connected to MELSEC (Cannot be used with the MELDASMAGIC 64 Series)

x

x

Output signal to MELSEC when connected to MELSEC (Cannot be used with the MELDASMAGIC 64 Series)

x

x

: Possible x : Not possible

The operation board in Table 3.1-1 is applied when control is performed by operation board input/output card that can be added as NC option.

3.2 Handling of Input Signals Designated for High Speed Input The input/output signals used in user PLC are input/output for each program level as shown in

Fig. 3.1-2. In high speed processing, input/output signal for which high speed input or output designation

(parameter) is made is input or output each time the high speed processing program runs. In main processing, signals other than interrupt input signals or high speed input/output designation are input/output.

When high speed input designation signal is used in main processing, the input signal may change within one scan because high speed processing whose level is higher than main processing interrupts. Input signal which must not change within one scan should be saved in temporary memory (M), etc., at the head of main processing and the temporary memory should be used in the main program, for example.

3. Input/Output Signals

— 7 —

The hatched area is high speed input designation part. Whenever the high speed processing program

runs, data is reset in the hatched area. Thus, the signal in the hatched area may change in main processing (A) and (B) because the high speed process re-reads the input signal in the hatched area.

3. Input/Output Signals

— 8 —

3.3 High Speed Input/output Designation Method High speed input/output is designated by setting the corresponding bit of the bit selection parameter

as shown below. (1) High speed input designation

(2) High speed output designation

As listed above, one bit corresponds to two bytes (16 points). Input or output in which 1 is set in the table is not performed at the main processing program

level. Although the number of bits set to 1 is not limited, set only necessary ones from viewpoint of

overhead. High speed input/output designation corresponds to the bit selection parameter and can be

set in the parameter. However, it is recommended to set in a sequence program to prevent a parameter setting error, etc.

Example: [MOV H3 R2928] ….. To designate X00~X0F, X10~X1F Bits 0 and 1

3. Input/Output Signals

— 9 —

3.4 Limits for Using High Speed Processing Program 3.4.1 Separation of Main Processing and High Speed Processing Bit Operation Areas (1) Bit operation area When using high speed processing, the bit operation range such as the temporary memory is

separated from the main process. (Method 1) When using the same M or G code, the bit operation area for high speed processing

and the bit operation area for main processing are separated by 64 points or more and used.

For example, the following is used M0 to M4735 for main processing Separate by 64 points or more M4800 to M5120 for high speed processing (M4736 to M4799 are not used) (Method 2) M is used for the main processing temporary memory and G is used for the high

speed processing temporary memory. (Note 1) The output devices handled with high speed processing must be limited to M or G, Y, D

and R. (Note 2) These limits apply not only to the OUT command, but also to the PLF, PLS, SET, RST

and MOV command, etc., outputs. The devices apply to all devices including M, G, F, E, T and Q.

(Note 3) Bit device G cannot be used for ladder program development using GPP.

3. Input/Output Signals

— 10 —

(2) Data area Even with commands that handle data (numerical values) during the MOV command, etc., the bit

area must be separated by 64 points or more and the data register (D) and file register (R) separated by four registers or more.

Example) Use D0 to D896 for main processing

Use D900 to D1023 for high speed processing

3.4.2 Separation of Remote I/O Output When handling high speed output during the high speed process, the main processing output and

high speed processing output cannot be used together in the same remote I/O unit (32 points in channel No. setting rotary switch). A separate 32 points for high speed processing output or a 16-point remote I/O unit will be required.

MOV commands, etc., that extend over differing remote I/O units must not be enforced during either main processing or high speed processing. If these must be enforced, the channel No. setting rotary switch for the output unit used in the main processing and the output unit used for the high speed processing must be raised 1 or more.

Separate by four registers or more

3. Input/Output Signals

— 11 —

(Usage example 1) Avoid interference with the main process by assigning 7 (last channel) for the channel No. rotary switch for high speed processing output.

For example, use YE0 to YFF (for 32-point DO-L) or YE0 to YEF (for 16-point DO-R) as the high speed processing output.

(Refer to below.) (Usage example 2) Assign Y0 to Y1F (32-point) for high speed processing, and use Y20 and

following for the main process. (Refer to below.) (Usage example 3) Assign the device after the device used for main processing for the high speed

process. For example, if the devices up to Y2D are used for the main process, use Y40 to

Y5F (channel No. setting rotary switch No.: 2) for the high speed process. (Refer to below.) Relation of channel No. setting switch and device No.

(Devices are YE0 and following)

Usage examples 1-2 show the assignment for the 16-point unit as the No. of high speed output points is relatively low.

DX35*/45* DX110/120DX35*/45* DX100

DX35*/45* DX100 DX100 /120

DX35*/45* DX100

4. Parameters

— 12 —

4. Parameters 4.1 PLC Constants The parameters that can be used in user PLC include PLC constants set in the data type. Set up data is stored in a file register and is backed up. In contrast, if data is stored in the file register

corresponding to PLC constant by using sequence program MOV instruction, etc., it is backed up. However, display remains unchanged. Display another screen once and then select the screen again.

48 PLC constants are set (the setting range is 8 digits). (Signed 4-byte binary data) The correspondence between the PLC constants and file registers is listed below. The setting and

display screens are also shown.

Corresponding file registers Corresponding file registers Corresponding file registers # High order Low order # High order Low order # High order Low order

6301 R2801 R2800 6321 R2841 R2840 6341 R2881 R2880 6302 R2803 R2802 6322 R2843 R2842 6342 R2883 R2882 6303 R2805 R2804 6323 R2845 R2844 6343 R2885 R2884 6304 R2807 R2806 6324 R2847 R2846 6344 R2887 R2886 6305 R2809 R2808 6325 R2849 R2848 6345 R2889 R2888 6306 R2811 R2810 6326 R2851 R2850 6346 R2891 R2890 6307 R2813 R2812 6327 R2853 R2852 6347 R2893 R2892 6308 R2815 R1814 6328 R2855 R2854 6348 R2895 R2894 6309 R2817 R2816 6329 R2857 R2856 6310 R2819 R2818 6330 R2859 R2858 6311 R2821 R2820 6331 R2861 R2860 6312 R2823 R2822 6322 R2863 R2862 6313 R2825 R2824 6333 R2865 R2864 6314 R2827 R2826 6334 R2867 R2866 6315 R2829 R2828 6335 R2869 R2868 6316 R2831 R2830 6336 R2871 R2870 6317 R2833 R2832 6337 R2873 R2872 6318 R2835 R2834 6338 R2875 R2874 6319 R2837 R2836 6339 R2877 R2876 6320 R2839 R2838 6340 R2879 R2878

4. Parameters

— 13 —

PLC constant screen

4. Parameters

— 14 —

4.2 Bit Selection Parameters The parameters that can be used in user PLC include bit selection parameters set in the bit type. Set up data is stored in a file register and is backed up. For use in bit operation in a sequence program, the file register contents are transferred to temporary

memory (M, G) using the MOV command. In contrast, if data is stored in the file register corresponding to bit selection by using the MOV command etc., it is backed up. However, display remains unchanged. Once display another screen and again select screen.

The corresponding between the bit selection parameters and file registers is listed below. The setting and display screens are also shown.

# Corresponding file register # Corresponding

file register # Corresponding file register # Corresponding

file register 6401 R2900-LOW 6433 R2916-LOW 6449 R2924-LOW 6481 R2940-LOW 6402 R2900-HIGH 6434 R2916-HIGH 6450 R2924-HIGH 6482 R2940-HIGH 6403 R2901-L 6435 R2917-L 6451 R2925-L 6483 R2941-L 6404 R2901-H 6436 R2917-H 6452 R2925-H 6484 R2941-H 6405 R2902-L 6437 R2918-L 6453 R2926-L 6485 R2942-L 6406 R2902-H 6438 R2918-H 6454 R2926-H 6486 R2942-H 6407 R2903-L 6439 R2919-L 6455 R2927-L 6487 R2943-L 6408 R2903-H 6440 R2919-H 6456 R2927-H 6488 R2943-H 6409 R2904-L 6441 R2920-L 6457 R2928-L 6489 R2944-L 6410 R2904-H 6442 R2920-H 6458 R2928-H 6490 R2944-H 6411 R2905-L 6443 R2921-L 6459 R2929-L 6491 R2945-L 6412 R2905-H 6444 R2921-H 6460 R2929-H 6492 R2945-H 6413 R2906-L 6445 R2922-L 6461 R2930-L 6493 R2946-L 6414 R2906-H 6446 R2922-H 6462 R2930-H 6494 R2946-H 6415 R2907-L 6447 R2923-L 6463 R2931-L 6495 R2947-L 6416 R2907-H 6448 R2923-H 6464 R2931-H 6496 R2947-H 6417 R2908-L 6465 R2932-L 6418 R2908-H 6466 R2932-H 6419 R2909-L 6467 R2933-L 6420 R2909-H 6468 R2933-H 6421 R2910-L 6469 R2934-L 6422 R2910-H 6470 R2934-H 6423 R2911-L

Use bit selection parameters #6401~#6448 freely.

6471 R2935-L

Bit selection parameter #6449~#6496 are PLC operation selection parameters used by the machine manufacturer and MITSUBISHI. The contents are fixed.

6424 R2911-H 6472 R2935-H 6425 R2912-L 6473 R2936-L 6426 R2912-H 6474 R2936-H 6427 R2913-L 6475 R2937-L 6428 R2913-H 6476 R2937-H 6429 R2914-L 6477 R2938-L 6430 R2914-H 6478 R2938-H 6431 R2915-L 6479 R2939-L 6432 R2915-H 6480 R2939-H

4. Parameters

— 15 —

Bit selection screen

4. Parameters

— 16 —

Contents of bit selection parameters #6449~#6496 Symbol name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0

Bit selection #6449 R2924L

Control unit thermal alarm valid

CRT thermal alarm valid (Note 4)

Counter C hold

Integrating timer T hold

PLC counter program valid

PLC timer program valid

1 0 1

#6450 R2924H

Alarm/ operator changeover

Message full screen display

Operator message R

mode L mode

Alarm message valid

2

#6451 R2925L

Onboard valid

3

#6452 R2925H

Counter B hold (V)

Integrating timer Q hold (V)

4

#6453 R2926L

Message Language change code

5

#6454 R2926H

6

#6455 R2927L

7

#6456 R2927H

8

#6457 R2928L

9

#6458 R2928H

A

#6459 R2929L

(Reserved)

B

#6460 R2929H

(Reserved)

C

#6461 R2930L

D

#6462 R2930H

E

#6463 R2931L

(Reserved)

F

#6464 R2931H

(Reserved)

High speed input designation 1

High speed input designation 2

High speed input designation 3

High speed input designation 4

High speed output designation 1

High speed output designation 2

High speed output designation 3

High speed output designation 4

4. Parameters

— 17 —

Symbol name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0

#6465 R2932L

1

#6466 R2932H

2

#6467 R2933L

3

#6468 R2933H

4

#6469 R2934L

NC alarm 4 output disabled

5

#6470 R2934H

6

#6471 R2935L

7

#6472 R2935H

8

#6473 R2936L

9

#6474 R2936H

A

#6475 R2937L

B

#6476 R2937H

C

#6477 R2938L

D

#6478 R2938H

E

#6479 R2939L

F

#6480 R2939H

(Note 1) The bits marked are used by the system. Be sure to set to 0. (Note 2) Parameters #6481~#6496 are not used. They are for debugging at MITSUBISHI. (Note 3) For the parameter meanings, refer to the PLC Onboard Manual. (Note 4) These cannot be used with the MELDASMAGIC 64 Series.

Standard PLC parameter

_

5. Explanation of Devices

— 18 —

5. Explanation of Devices

5.1 Devices and Device Numbers The devices are address symbols to identify signals handled in PLC. The device numbers are serial

numbers assigned to the devices. The device numbers of devices X, Y, U, W, and H are represented in hexadecimal notation. The device numbers of other devices are represented in decimal notation.

5.2 Device List

Device Device No. Unit Details X* X0~X4BF (1216 points) 1 bit Input signal to PLC. Machine input, etc. Y* Y0~Y53F (1344 points) 1 bit Output signal from PLC.

Machine output, etc. U* U0~U178 (384 points) 1 bit Input signal to PLC for second system.

Signal for No.2 system. W* W0~W1FF (512 points) 1 bit Output signal from PLC for second system.

Signal for No.2 system. M M0~M5119 (5120 points) 1 bit Temporary memory G G0~G3071 (3072 points) 1 bit Temporary memory F F0~F127 (128 points) 1 bit Temporary memory, alarm message

interface L L0~L255 (256 points) 1 bit Latch relay (backup memory) E* E0~E127 (128 points) 1 bit Special relay T T0~T15 (16 points) 1 bit or 16 bits 10ms unit timer T16~T95 (80 points) 1 bit or 16 bits 100ms unit timer T96~T103 (8 points) 1 bit or 16 bits 100ms unit integrating timer Q Q0~Q39 (40 points) 1 bit or 16 bits 10ms unit timer (fixed) Q40~Q135 (96 points) 1 bit or 16 bits 100ms unit timer (fixed) Q136~Q151 (16 points) 1 bit or 16 bits 100ms unit integrating timer (fixed) C C0~C23 (24 points) 1 bit or 16 bits Counter B B0~B103 (104 points) 1 bit or 16 bits Counter (Fixed counter) D D0~D1023 (1024 points) 16 bits or 32 bits Data register for arithmetic operation R* R0~R8191 (8192 points) 16 bits or 32 bits File register. R500 to R549 and R1900 to

R2799 are released to the user for interface between the PLC and controller. R1900 to R2799 are backed up by the battery.

A A0, A1 (2 points) 16 bits or 32 bits Accumulator Z (1 point) 16 bits Index of D or R address (n) V (1 point) 16 bits Index of D or R address (n) N N0~N7 (8 points) Master control nesting level P* P0~P255 (256 points) Label for conditional jump and subroutine

call commands K K-32768~K32767 Decimal constant for 16-bit command K-2147483648~

K2147483647 Decimal constant for 32-bit command

H H0~HFFFF Hexadecimal constant for 16-bit command H0~HFFFFFFFF Hexadecimal constant for 32-bit command

(Note 1) The applications of the devices having a * in the device column are separately determined. Do not use the undefined

device Nos., even if they are open. (Note 2) Devices I, J and S are available besides the above devices, but must not be used.

5. Explanation of Devices

— 19 —

5.3 Detailed Explanation of Devices The devices used with the PLC are described below. 5.3.1 Input/output X, Y, U, W Input/output X, Y, U and W are a window for executing communication with the PLC and external

device or controller. Input X, U (1) This issued commands or data from an external device such as a push-button, changeover

switch, limit switch or digital switch to the PLC. (2) Assuming that there is a hypothetical relay Xn built-in the PLC per input point, the program

uses the a contact and b contact of that Xn. (3) There is no limit to the No. of a contacts and b contacts of the input Xn that can be used in the

program.

(4) The input No. is expressed with a hexadecimal.

Output Y, W (1) This outputs the results of the program control to the solenoid, magnetic switch, signal lamp or

digital indicator, etc. (2) The output (Y) can be retrieved with the equivalent of 1a contact. (3) There is no limit to the No. of a contacts and b contacts of the output Yn that can be used in the

program.

(4) The output No. is expressed with a hexadecimal.

5. Explanation of Devices

— 20 —

5.3.2 Internal Relays M , G and F, Latch Relay L The internal relay and latch relay are auxiliary relays in the PLC that cannot directly output to an

external source. Internal relays M and G (1) These relays are cleared when the power is turned OFF. (2) There is no limit to the No. of a contacts and b contacts of the input relays that can be used in the

program. (3) The internal relay No. is expressed with a decimal.

Internal relay F Internal relay F is an interface for the alarm message display. Use the bit selection parameter to determine whether to use this relay for the alarm message interface. The target will be F0 to F127. This internal relay can be used in the same manner as the internal relay M when not used as the alarm message interface.

Latch relay L (1) The original state is held even when the power is turned OFF. (2) There is no limit to the No. of a contacts and b contacts of the latch relay that can be used in

the program. (3) The latch No. is expressed with a decimal.

5.3.3 Special Relays E The special relays are relays having fixed applications such as the carrier flag for operation results

and the display request signal to the CRT setting and display unit. Even the relays of E0 to E127 that are not currently used must not be used as temporary memory.

Special relays E (1) These relays are cleared when the power is turned OFF. (2) There is no limit to the No. of a contacts and b contacts of the special relays that can be used

in the program. (3) The special relay No. is expressed with a decimal.

5. Explanation of Devices

— 21 —

5.3.4 Timer T, Q (1) The 100ms timer, 10ms timer and 100ms timer cumulative timer are available for this count-up

type timer. 100ms Timer T, Q (1) When the input conditions are set, the count starts. When the set value is counted, that timer

contact will turn ON. (2) If the input conditions are turned OFF, the 100ms timer count value will be set to 0, and the

contact will turn OFF.

(3) The value is set with a decimal, and can be designated from 1 to 32767 (0.1 to 3276.7 sec.).

The data register (D) data can also be used as the setting value. File register (R) cannot be used.

10ms Timer T, Q (1) When the input conditions are set, the count starts. When the set value is counted, that timer

contact will turn ON. (2) If the input conditions are turned OFF, the 10ms timer count value will be set to 0, and the

contact will turn OFF.

(3) The value is set with a decimal, and can be designated from 1 to 32767 (0.01 to 327.67 sec.).

The data register (D) data can also be used as the setting value. File register (R) cannot be used.

5. Explanation of Devices

— 22 —

100ms Cumulative timer T, Q (1) When the input conditions are set, the count starts. When the set value is counted, that timer contact

will turn ON. (2) Even the input conditions are turned OFF, the 100ms cumulative timer current value (count value)

will be held, and the contact state will not change. (3) The 100ms cumulative timer count value will be set to 0 and the contact will turn OFF when the RST

command is executed.

(4) The value is set with a decimal, and can be designated from 1 to 32767 (0.1 to 3267.7 sec.). The

data register (D) data can also be used as the setting value. File register (R) cannot be used. (5) When the bit selection parameter is set, the 100ms cumulative timer current value (count value) will

be held even when the power is turned OFF. (2) Setting of timer setting value from CRT setting and display unit The timer setting value can be set with the CRT setting and display unit using device T. (Variable

timer) Whether the setting value (Kn) programmed with the sequence program or the setting value set

from the CRT setting and display unit is valid is selected with the bit selection parameters. The changeover is made in a group for T0 to T103. Even when set from the CRT setting and display unit, the setting value (Kn) program will be required in the sequence program. However, the Kn value will be ignored. When the data register (D) is used for the setting value, the data register (D) details will be used as the setting value regardless of the parameter.

Note) The setting value for device Q of the timer T, Q cannot be set from the CRT setting and display unit.

5. Explanation of Devices

— 23 —

5.3.5 Counter C, B (1) The counter counts up and detects the rising edge of the input conditions. Thus, the count will not

take place when the input conditions are ON. Counter C, B (1) The value is set with a decimal, and can be designated from 1 to 32767. The data register (D)

data can also be used as the setting value. File register (R) cannot be used. (2) The counter count value will not be cleared even if the input conditions turn OFF. The counter

count value must be cleared with the RST command. (3) When the bit selection parameter is set, the counter current value (count value) will be held

even when the power is turned OFF. (2) Setting of counter setting value from CRT setting and display unit The counter setting value can be set with the CRT setting and display unit using device C.

(Variable counter) Whether the setting value (Kn) programmed with the sequence program or the setting value set

from the CRT setting and display unit is valid is selected with the bit selection parameters. The changeover is made in a group for C0 to C23. Even when set from the CRT setting and display unit, the setting value (Kn) program will be required in the sequence program. However, the Kn value will be ignored. When the data register (D) is used for the setting value, the data register (D) details will be used as the setting value regardless of the parameter.

Note) The setting value for device B of counter C, B cannot be set from the CRT setting and display unit.

5.3.6 Data Register D (1) The data register is the memory that stores the data in the PLC. (2) The data register has a 1-point 16-bit configuration, and can be read and written in 16-bit units. To handle 32-bit data, two points must be used. The data register No. designated with the 32-bit

command will be the low-order 16-bit, and the designated data register No. +1 will be the high-order 16-bit.

(Example) Use of the DMOV command is shown below.

(3) The data that is stored once in the sequence program is held until other data is stored. (4) The data stored in the data register is cleared when the power is turned OFF. (5) Values that can be stored: Decimal -32768 to 32767 } For 16-bit command (Using Dn)

Hexadecimal 0 to FFFF Decimal -2147483648 to 2147483647 } For 32-bit command Hexadecimal 0 to FFFFFFFF

(6) Data registers D0 to D1023 are all user release data registers.

(Using Dn+1, Dn)

5. Explanation of Devices

— 24 —

5.3.7 File Register R (1) As with the data registers, the file registers are memories used to store data. However, there are

some that have fixed applications, and those that are released. (2) The file register has a 1-point 16-bit configuration, and can be read and written in 16-bit units. To handle 32-bit data, two points must be used. The file register No. designated with the 32-bit

command will be the low-order 16-bit, and the designated file register No. +1 will be the high-order 16-bit.

(Example) Use of the DMOV command is shown below.

(3) The data that is stored once in the sequence program is held until other data is stored. (4) The data stored in the file registers R500 to R549 and R1900 to R2799 and the user release

registers R1900 to R2799 is not cleared when the power is turned OFF. The other file registers have fixed applications such as interface of the PLC and controller,

parameter interface, etc. (5) Values that can be stored: Decimal -32768 to 32767 } For 16-bit command (Using Rn)

Hexadecimal 0 to FFFF Decimal -2147483648 to 2147483647 } For 32-bit command Hexadecimal 0 to FFFFFFFF

(Using Rn+1, Rn)

5. Explanation of Devices

— 25 —

5.3.8 Accumulator A (1) The accumulator is a data register that stores the results of the function command operation and

the function commands where the operation results are stored are as follow.

Commands SER, SUM, ROR, DROR, RCR, DRCR, ROL, DROL, RCL, DRCL

(2) When using commands other than those above, the accumulator can be used in the sequence

program with the equivalent registers as the data registers. (3) The accumulator has a 1-point 16-bit configuration, and can be read and written in 16-bit units. (4) The accumulator has two points (A0, A1). With the 32-bit command, A0 will be the low-order

16-bit, and A1 will be the high-order 16-bit. Thus, A1 cannot be designated with a 32-bit command.

(5) The data stored in the accumulator is cleared when the power is turned OFF. (6) Values that can be stored: Decimal -32768 to 32767 } For 16-bit command (Using A1 or A0)

Hexadecimal 0 to FFFF Decimal -2147483648 to 2147483647 } For 32-bit command Hexadecimal 0 to FFFFFFFF (Using A1 or A0)

5.3.9 Index Registers Z and V (1) Z and V index registers are available. (2) The index registers are used as ornaments for the device (T, C, D, R).

(3) The index register has a 1-point 16-bit configuration, and can be read and written in 16-bit units. (4) The data stored in the index register is cleared when the power is turned OFF. (5) Values that can be stored: Decimal -32768 to 32767

Hexadecimal 0 to FFFF Note) The CRT display of the index registers Z and V is as shown below.

5. Explanation of Devices

— 26 —

5.3.10 Nesting N (1) This indicates the master control nesting structure. (2) The master control nesting (N) is used in order from smallest number.

(1) The conditions for each master control to turn ON are as follow. MC N0 M15 ………. ON when condition A is ON

MC N2 M16 ………. ON when conditions A, B are ON

MC N2 M17 ………. ON when conditions A, B, C are ON (2) The timer and counter when the master control is OFF is as follows. 100ms timer, 10ms timer: The count value is set to 0. 100ms cumulative timer : The current count value is retained. Counter: The current counter value is retained. OUT command: All turn OFF.

5.3.11 Pointer P (1) The pointer indicates the branch command (CJ, CALL) jump destination. The pointer No.

assigned at the jump destination head is called the label. (2) Pointers P0 to P159, P251, P252 and P255 are user release pointers. (3) P255 always indicates END. (P255 can be used as a device such as a CJ command, but cannot be used as a label. This

cannot be used for the CALL command device.)

5. Explanation of Devices

— 27 —

(4) The special usages of the pointers other than P255 are shown below. P251: Label for starting PLC high speed processing program. P252: Label for starting PLC main (ladder) processing program.

This can be omitted when there is only a PLC main (ladder) processing program. P128 to P159: Label for page return when printing out ladder diagram. P128 to P159 are the head label of the return page. These can also be used as the normal CJ

and CALL commands. (Note 1) P251 and P252 cannot be used as CJ or CALL command devices. (Note 2) Do not create a program in which the P** in the PLC high speed processing program is

jumped to from the PLC main processing program. (Note 3) The P** used as a CJ or CALL command device must also be programmed as a label. The PLC will not operate correctly if Notes 1 to 3 are not observed. 5.3.12 Decimal Constant K (1) The decimal constant can be used in the following ways. 1) Timer counter setting value: Designate in the range of 1 to 32767. 2) Pointer No.: 0 to 159 3) Bit device digit designation: 1 to 8 4) Basic command, function command, exclusive command value setting 16-bit command: -32768 to 32767 32-bit command: -2147483648 to 2147483647 (2) The decimal constant is stored in the BIN value (binary) in the PLC. 5.3.13 Hexadecimal Constant H (1) The hexadecimal constant is used to designate the basic command, function command and

exclusive command values. 16-bit command: 0 to FFFF 32-bit command: 0 to FFFFFFFF

6. Explanation of Commands

— 28 —

6. Explanation of Commands 6.1 Command List 6.1.1 Basic Commands

Class Pro- cess unit

Command sign Symbol Process details No. of steps

Page

Start of logic operation (A contact operation start) 1 39

Start of logic denial operation (B contact operation start) 1 39

Logical AND (A contact serial connection) 1 41

Logical AND denial (B contact serial connection) 1 41

Logical OR (A contact parallel connection) 1 43

Logical OR denial (B contact parallel connection) 1 43

AND between logical blocks (Serial connection between blocks) 1 45

Basic com- mand

Bit

OR between logical blocks (Parallel connection between blocks) 1 47

Device output 1~2 49

Device set 2 55

Device reset 2 57

Master control start 3 59

Master control release 2 59

Generate one cycle worth of pulses at rising edge of input signal 2 61

Generate one cycle worth of pulses at falling edge of input signal 2 61

Device 1-bit shift 2 63

Registration of logical operation 1 65

Read of operation results registered in MPS 1 65

Reading and resetting of operation results registered in MPS 1 65

Generate one cycle worth of pulses to oper-ation results at rising edge of input signal

1 67

L D

LDI

AND

ANI

O R

ORI

ANB

ORB

OUT

SET

RST

M C

MCR

PLS

PLF

SFT

MPS

MRD

MPP

DEFR

6. Explanation of Commands

— 29 —

6.1.2 Function Commands (1) Comparison commands

Class Pro- cess unit

Command sign Symbol Process details No. of steps

Page

3 70

16-bit

3 70

Continuity state when (S1) = (S2) Non-continuity state when (S1) =/ (S2)

3 70

3~4 72

32-bit

3~4 72

=

Continuity state when (S1+1, S1)=(S2+1, S2) Non-continuity state when (S1+1, S1) = (S2+1, S2)

3~4 72

3 74

16-bit

3 74

Continuity state when (S1) > (S2) Non-continuity state when (S1) <= (S2)

3 74

3~4 76

32-bit

3~4 76

>

Continuity state when (S1+1, S1) > (S2+1, S2) Non-continuity state when (S1+1, S1) <= (S2+1, S2)

3~4 76

3 78

16-bit

3 78

Continuity state when (S1) < (S2) Non-continuity state when (S1) >= (S2)

3 78

3~4 80

32-bit

3~4 80

<

Continuity state when (S1+1, S1) < (S2+1, S2) Non-continuity state when (S1+1, S1) >= (S2+1, S2)

3~4 80

LD =

AND =

OR =

LDD =

ANDD=

ORD =

LD >

AND >

OR >

LDD >

ANDD>

ORD >

LD <

AND <

OR <

LDD <

ANDD<

ORD <

6. Explanation of Commands

— 30 —

(2) Arithmetic operation commands

Class Pro- cess unit

Command sign Symbol Process details No. of steps

Page

16-bit

(S1) + (S2) (D) 4 82

+

32-bit

(S1+1, S1) + (S2+1, S2) (D+1, D) 4~5 84

16-bit

(S1) (S2) (D) 4 86

32-bit

(S1+1, S1) (S2+1, S2) (D+1, D) 4~5 88

16-bit

(S1) x (S2) (D+1, D) 4 90

*

32-bit

(S1+1, S1) x (S2+1, S2) (D+3, D+2, D+1, D) 4~5 92

16-bit

(S1) =. . (S2) (D) Quotient (D) Remainder (D+1)

4 94

/

32-bit

(S1+1, S1) =. . (S2+1, S2) Quotient (D+1,D) Remainder (D+3, D+2)

4~5 96

16-bit

(D) + 1 (D) 2 98

+1

32-bit

(D+1, D) + 1 (D + 1, D) 2 100

16-bit

(D) 1 (D) 2 102

1

32-bit

(D + 1, D) 1 (D + 1, D) 2 104

(3) BCD BIN conversion commands

Class Pro- cess unit

Command sign Symbol Process details No. of step

Page

16-bit

(S) BCD conversion (D) BIN (0~9999) 3 106

BCD

32-bit

(S1+1, S1) BCD conversion (D+1, D) BIN (0~99999999) 3 108

16-bit

(S) BIN conversion (D) BCD (0~9999) 3 110

BIN

32-bit

(S1+1, S1) BIN conversion (D+1, D) BCD (0~99999999) 3 112

+

D+

D

*

D*

/

D/

INC

DINC

DEC

DDEC

BCD

DBCD

BIN

DBIN

6. Explanation of Commands

— 31 —

(4) Data transmission commands

Class Pro- cess unit

Command sign Symbol Process details No. of step

Page

16-bit

(S) (D) 3 114

Trans — mis- sion 32-bit

(S+1, S) (D+1, D) 3~4 116

16-bit

(D1) (D2) 3 118 Con- ver- sion 32-bit

(D1 + 1, D1) (D2 + 1, D2) 3 120

Batch trans- mis-si on

16-bit

4

122

Batch trans- mission of same data

16-bit

4

124

(5) Program branch commands

Class Pro- cess unit

Command sign Symbol Process details No. of step

Page

Jump

Jump to P** after input conditions are set 2 126

Pro-gr am end

End process during sequence program

1

128

Sub-r ou-tin e call

Execute P** sub-routine program after input conditions are set

2

130

Re-tur n

Return to main program from subroutine program 1 130

MOV

DMOV

XCH

DXCH

BMOV

FMOV

CJ

FEND

CALL

RET

6. Explanation of Commands

— 32 —

(6) Logical operation commands

Class Pro- cess unit

Command sign Symbol Process details No. of step

Page

16-bit

(S1) ^ (S2) (D) 4 132 Logical AND

32-bit

(D + 1, D) ^ (S + 1, S) (D + 1, D) 3~4 134

16-bit

(S1) V (S2) (D) 4 136 Logical OR

32-bit

(D + 1, D) V (S + 1, S) (D + 1, D) 3~4 138

16-bit

(S1) V (S2) (D) 4 140 Exclu-si ve OR

32-bit

(D + 1, D) (S + 1, S) (D + 1, D) 3~4 142

Com-ple ment of 2

16-bit

(D) + 1 (D)

2

144

WAND

DAND

WOR

DOR

WXOR

DXOR

NEG

6. Explanation of Commands

— 33 —

(7) Rotation commands

Class Pro- cess unit

Command sign Symbol Process details No. of step

Page

2

146

16-bit

2

148

2

150

Right rotation

32-bit

2

152

2

154

16-bit

2

156

2

158

Left rotation

32-bit

2

160

16-bit

3

162

Right shift

Devic e unit

3

164

16-bit

3

166

Left shift Devic e unit

3

168

ROR

RCR

DROR

DRCR

ROL

RCL

DROL

DRCL

SFR

DSFR

SFL

DSFL

6. Explanation of Commands

— 34 —

(8) Data processing commands

Class Pro- cess unit

Command sign Symbol Process details No. of step

Page

Search

16-bit

4

170

Number of bits set to 1

16-bit

2

172

2n-bit

4

174

Decode 16-bit

3

176

Average value

16-bit

16-bit data average value

1 n (S + i ) (D)

a

i = 1

4

178

(9) Other function commands

Class Pro- cess unit

Command sign Symbol Process details No. of step

Page

Carry flag set

Carry flag contact (E12) is turned on. 1 180

Carry flag reset

Carry flag contact (E12) is turned off.

1

180

Bit test (a contact operation start handling) 3 182

Bit test (a contact series connection handling) 3 182

Bit test (a contact parallel connection handling) 3 182

Bit test (b contact operation start handling) 3 184

Bit test (b contact series connection handling) 3 184

BIT 1-bit

Bit test (b contact parallel connection handling)

3 184

SER

SUM

DECO

SEG

AVE

STC

CLC

ORBII

ANDBII

LDBII

ORBIT

ANDBIT

LDBIT

6. Explanation of Commands

— 35 —

6.1.3 Exclusive commands

Class Pro- cess unit

Command sign Symbol Process details No. of step

Page

K1: Tool number search 194

K2: Tool number AND search 195

K3: Tool change 196

K4: Random position tool change 197

K5: Forward rotation of pointer 198

K6: Reverse rotation of pointer 198

K7: Normal rotation of tool table 199

K8: Reverse rotation of tool table 199

K9: Tool data read 200

K10: Tool data write 201

ATC

K11: Automatic write of tool data

4

202

K1: Rotary body index 207 ROT

K3: Ring counter 4

210

TSRH

Spare tool selection in tool life management

3

211

(Asynchro- nous)

Data designated after Rn is read/written.

2

222

DDB

(Synchro- nous)

Data designated after Rn is read/written.

2

225

ATC

ROT

TSRH

DDBS

DDBA

6. Explanation of Commands

— 36 —

6.2 Command Formats 6.2.1 How to Read the Command Table The basic command and function command explanations are as follow. Example) Explanation of D+ command D+ … BIN 32-bit addition The command sign is indicated.

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant

Point- er

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P

Digit

desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S1 S2 4/5 D

Expressed with T. Same applies for Q.

Same applies for B.

Same applies for G.

Same applies for W, J and S.

Same applies for U, I and S.

The devices that can be used with the D+ command are circled.

Setting data

S1 Head No. data to be added or device where data to be added is stored.

S2 Head No. data to be added or device where data to be added is stored.

D Head No. of device where addition results are stored.

The D+ command circuit display format is indicated. The functions, execution conditions and program examples of each command are explained on the following pages.

The No. of steps of the D+ command is indicated. 4/5 steps indicate that for the 32-bit command, two steps are required for the constant. In the example for the D+ com-mand, if S2 is the word device and step 4 is the constant, the No. of steps will be 5 steps

A circle is indicated if digit designation of the bit device is possible.

The commands that can use an index (Z, V) are circled.

6. Explanation of Commands

— 37 —

6.2.2 No. of Steps The basic No. of steps in the sequence command includes step 1 to step 5. Main examples of each step are shown below.

Basic No. of steps

Command (mnemonic) Circuit display

Step 1

LD, ANI, ANB, ORB, STC, CLC, FEND, RET, P**

Step 2

INC, DEC, SET, RST, OUT T, CJ, CALL, DDB

Step 3

MOV, =, BCD, XCH

Step 4

DMOV, +, -, ATC

Step 5

D+, D-, D*, D/

As shown above, the command code, source and destination in basic No. of steps for the command

are equivalent to one step each. Only the 32-bit command constant K or H uses two steps. (Note) If the constant value in the DMOV or D* command, etc., is small, a display in which there is a

space equivalent to one step will occur between the source (S) and destination (D) or between the source (S2) and destination (D). (Section marked with * in diagram.

v

*

*

6.2.3 END Command When programming a sequence program with a circuit mode, the END command is automatically

created.

6. Explanation of Commands

— 38 —

6.2.4 Index Ornament (1) The index ornament is used to add an index (Z, V) to a device, add the details of the directly

designated device No. and index register, and designate the device No. (2) The index (Z, V) can be set between -32768 to 32767 with a sign added. (3) The index ornament is used only for the MOV command. (It cannot be used for DMOV.) (4) The usable command format is shown below. 1) Transmission of data to Z, V

(Note 1) After circuit conversion, the display will change to Z0 and V0. However, this must be

input as «Z» and «V». 2) Possible device combinations of MOV command with index ornament

S (source) D (destination) Program example Constant

Kn or Hn (Word device) Z Example) D0Z, R500V

MOV K100 D0Z

Word device Example) D0, R1900

(Word device) Z Example) D0Z, R500V

MOV D0 D100V

MOV (Word device) Z Example) D0Z, D1V

(Word device) Z Example) D0V, D1Z

MOV D0Z D20Z

(Word device) Z Example) D0Z, D1V

Bit designation Example) K2Y20 MOV D0Z K2M10

Bit designation Example) K2M00

(Word device) Z Example) D0Z, R1900V

MOV K2M10 D0Z

(Note 2) The word device refers to T, C, D, R, A0 and A1. (Note 3) The CRT display of the circuit with index ornament is as shown below.

6. Explanation of Commands

— 39 —

6.2.5 Digit Designation A digit may need to be designated for the bit device (X, Y, M, L, E, F) when using the function

command. How many points of 4-point unit bit devices are to be used with the 16-bit or 32-bit command is selected with this digit designation.

Use device K when designating the digit. The designation range is as shown below. A random bit device can be set for the bit device.

(a) 16-bit command: K1 to 4 (4 to 16 points)

(Example) Setting range with digit designation of X0 to F 16-bit data

(b) 32-bit command: K1 to 8 (4 to 32 points) (Example) Setting range with digit designation of X0 to 1F 32-bit data.

6. Explanation of Commands

— 40 —

(1) When a digit is designated on the source (S) side, the values that can be handled as source data will be as shown below.

Table of digit designations and values that can be handled For 16-bit command For 32-bit command K1 (4 points) 0~15 0~15 K2 (8 points) 0~255 0~255 K3 (12 points) 0~4095 0~4095 K4 (16 points) -32768~32767 0~65535 K5 (20 points) 0~1048575 K6 (24 points) 0~167772165 K7 (28 points) 0~268435455 K8 (32 points) -2147483648~2147483647

Program example Process For 16-bit command

For 32-bit command

6. Explanation of Commands

— 41 —

(2) When a digit is designated on the destination (D) side, the No. of points designated by the digit will be the target of the destination side.

Circuit side Process When source data (S) is a value

When source (S) data is a bit device

When source (S) data is a word device

(Note) The CRT display of the circuit having a digit designation will be as follows.

7. Basic Commands

— 42 —

7. Basic Commands These commands are the basis for the sequence programs. The sequence program cannot be

created without these commands. The circuit can be created (programmed) with the same image as creating a circuit by combining the

actual relay A contacts and B contacts as done conventionally.

LD, LDI

— 43 —

LD, LDI … Operation start

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-sta nt Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

1

Function LD is the a contact operation start command and LDI is the b contact operation start command. The

ON/OFF information of the designated device is read in as the operation results. Execution conditions This is executed per scan regardless of the device ON/OFF setting.

LD, LDI

— 44 —

Program example (1) Program used at head of circuit block.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M32 1 OUT Y10 2 LDI M32 3 OUT Y11

(2) Program used at head of circuit block connected with ANB.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

99 LD X0 100 LD M9 101 AND M13 102 ORI M35 103 ANB 104 OUT Y99

(3) Program used at head of circuit block connected with ORB.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

93 LD X8 94 AND M1 95 LD X12 96 ANI M60 97 ORB 98 OUT M99

AND, ANI

— 45 —

AND, ANI … Serial connection of contact

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-sta nt Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

1

Function AND is the a contact serial connection command, and ANI is the b contact serial connection

command. The ON/OFF information of the designated device is read in, and the AND operation with the operation results up to that point is executed. The result is the operation result.

Execution conditions This is executed per scan regardless of the operation results before the AND, ANI commands.

AND, ANI

— 46 —

Program example (1) Program used after LD, LDI, AND or ANI, etc.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X3 1 AND M6 2 LDI X4 3 ANI M7 4 ORB 5 ANI M9 6 OUT Y33 7 LD X5 8 LD M8 9 OR M9 10 ANB 11 ANI M11 12 OUT Y34

(2) Program used to connect contact in parallel with coil.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

93 LD X5 94 OUT Y35 95 AND X8 96 OUT Y36 97 ANI X9 98 OUT Y37

OR, ORI

— 47 —

OR, ORI … Parallel connection of one contact

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-sta nt Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

1

Function OR is the one a contact parallel connection command, and ORI is the one b contact parallel

connection operation command. The ON/OFF information of the designated device is read in, and the OR operation with the operation results up to that point is executed. The result is the operation result.

Execution conditions This is executed per scan regardless of the operation results before the OR, ORI commands.

OR, ORI

— 48 —

Program example (1) Program used at head of circuit block.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X3 1 OR X4 2 OR X5 3 OUT Y33 4 LD X5 5 AND M11 6 ORI X6 7 OUT Y34

(2) Program used in circuit.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

93 LD X5 94 LD M8 95 OR M9 96 ORI M10 97 ANB 98 OUT Y35 99 LD X6 100 LD M111 101 ANI M113 102 OR M105 103 OR L10 104 ANB 105 OUT Y36

ANB

— 49 —

ANB … Serial connection of circuit block

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-sta nt Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

1

Function (1) AND operation of the A block and B block is executed, and the operation results are obtained. (2) The ANB symbol is a connection symbol instead of a contact symbol. (3) When consecutively writing ANB, a max. of 7 commands (8 blocks) can be written. The PC

cannot execute a correct operation if 8 or more commands are written consecutively.

ANB

— 50 —

Program example Program that serially connects continuous circuit blocks.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X0 1 OR X1 2 LD X2 3 OR X3 4 ANB 5 LD X4 6 OR X5 7 ANB 8 LD X6 9 OR X7 10 ANB 11 LD X8 12 OR X9 13 ANB 14 OUT M7

ORB

— 51 —

ORB … Parallel connection of blocks

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-sta nt Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

1

Function (1) OR operation of the A block and B block is executed, and the operation results are obtained. (2) ORB connects circuit blocks with two or more contacts in parallel. Use OR or ORI to connect

circuit blocks with only one contact in parallel.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X0 1 AND X1 2 LD X2 3 AND X3 4 ORB 5 ORI X4 6 OUT Y10

(3) The ORB symbol is a connection symbol instead of a contact symbol. (4) When consecutively writing ORB, a max. of 7 commands (8 blocks) can be written. The PC

cannot execute a correct operation if 8 or more commands are written consecutively.

ORB

— 52 —

Program example Program that connects continuous circuit blocks in parallel.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X0 1 AND X1 2 LD X2 3 AND X3 4 ORB 5 LD X4 6 AND X5 7 ORB 8 LD X6 9 AND X7 10 ORB 11 OUT M7

OUT (Y, M, G, L, E, F)

— 53 —

OUT (Y, M, G, L, E, F) … Output (Y, M, G, L, E, F)

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-sta nt Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

1

Function The operation results before the OUT command are output to the designated device.

OUT command Contact

Operation results Coil

a contact b contact OFF OFF Non-continuity Continuity ON ON Continuity Non-continuity

Execution condition This is executed per scan regardless of the operation results before the OUT command.

OUT (Y, M, G, L, E, F)

— 54 —

Program example (1) Program output to output unit.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X5 1 OUT Y33 2 LD X6 3 OUT Y34 4 OUT Y35

(2) Program that turns internal relay or latch relay ON/OFF.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

93 LD X5 94 OUT M15 95 LDI X5 96 OUT L19 97 OUT M90 98 LD X7 99 AND X8 100 OUT F0

OUT T, Q

— 55 —

OUT T, Q … Timer output

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

Device

Setting value

2

Function (1) When the operation results before the OUT command are ON, the timer coil will turn ON and

count to the set value. When the time is counted up (count value set value), the contacts will change as shown below.

a contact Continuity b contact Non-continuity

(2) If the operation results before the OUT command turn ON to OFF, the following will occur.

Before time up After time up Timer type Timer coil Timer current

value a contact b contact a contact b contact 100ms timer

10ms timer OFF

0 Non-conti

nuity Continuity Continuity Non-conti

nuity 100ms cumulative timer OFF Hold current

value Non-conti nuity

Continuity Continuity Non-conti nuity

(3) The state of the cumulative timer contact after time up will not change until the RST command is

executed.

OUT T, Q

— 56 —

Execution condition This is executed per scan regardless of the operation results before the OUT command. Program example (1) Program to turn ON Y10 and Y14 ten seconds after X0 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X0 1 OUT T1 K100 3 LD T1 4 OUT Y10 5 OUT Y14

(2) Program to use X10 to 1F BCD data as timer setting value.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X0 1 BIN K4X10 D10 4 LD X2 5 OUT T2 D10 7 LD T2 8 OUT Y15

OUT C, B

— 57 —

OUT C, B … Counter output

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

Device

Setting value

2

Function (1) If the operation results before the OUT command change from OFF to ON, the current value

(count value) will be incremented by one. When the value is counted up (current value setting value), the contacts will change as shown below.

a contact Continuity b contact Non-continuity

(2) The value will not be counted when the operation results are ON. (A pulse change is not required

to input the count.) (3) If the operation results change from OFF to ON after the current value >= setting value is

established, the contact state will remain the same and the current value will not be counted up. Execution condition This is executed per scan regardless of the operation results before the OUT command.

OUT C, B

— 58 —

Program example (1) Program to turn Y30 ON when X0 turns ON ten times, and to turn Y30 OFF when X1 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X0 1 OUT C10 K10 3 LD C10 4 OUT Y30 5 LD X1 6 RST C10

(2) Program to set C10 setting value to 10 when X0 turns ON, and to 20 when X1 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X0 1 MOV K10 D0 4 LD X1 5 MOV K20 D0 8 LD X3 9 OUT C10 D0 11 LD C10 12 OUT Y30

SET

— 59 —

SET … Device setting (ON)

Usable device Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st

ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

D 2

Function (1) The designated device turns ON when the SET input turns ON. (2) The device turned ON remains ON even if the SET input turns OFF. The device can be turned

OFF with the RST command.

(3) If the SET input is OFF, the state of the device will not change. Execution condition The execution conditions for the SET command are as shown below.

SET

— 60 —

Program example (1) Program to set Y8B (ON) when X8 turns ON, and reset Y8B (OFF) when X9 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X9 1 RST Y8B 3 LD X8 4 SET Y8B

Operation of SET and RST commands

RST

— 61 —

RST … Device resetting

Usable device Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st

ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

D 2

Function (1) The designated device will change as explained below when the RST input turns ON.

Device Status Y, M, E, F, L W, J, S, G

The coil and contact are turned OFF.

T, C, Q, B 0 is set for the current value, and the coil and contact are turned OFF.

(2) If the RST input is OFF, the state of the device will not change. Execution condition The execution conditions for the RST command are as shown below.

RST

— 62 —

Program example (1) Program to reset 100ms cumulative timer and counter.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X4 1 OUT T96 K18000 3 LD T96 4 OUT C23 K16 6 RST T96 8 LD C23 9 OUT Y55 10 LD X5 11 RST C23

MC, MCR

— 63 —

MC, MCR … Master control set/reset

Usable device Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st

ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

n 2/3 D

Function MC (1) If the MC ON/OFF command is ON when the master control starts, the operation results between

MC and MCR will remain the same. (2) If the MC ON/OFF command is OFF, the operation results between MC and MCR will be as

follows.

100ms, 10ms timer 100ms cumulative timer counter OUT

command SET/RST SFT

Count value is set to 0 Current count value is held All become

OFF The state is retained

(3) Up to eight (N0 to 7) nests can be used. When using nests, the MC will use the nesting (N) from

the smallest No., and MCR will use from the largest No. (4) The program between the MC command and MCR command will be scanned regardless of the

MC command ON/OFF state. (5) By changing the destination D device, the MC command can be used as often as necessary in

one scan. (6) When the MC command is ON, the coil for the device designated for the destination will turn ON.

MC, MCR

— 64 —

MCR (1) This is the master control cancel command, and indicates the end of the master control range. (2) The designated nesting (N) No. and following nests will be canceled.

Program example (1) Program to turn MC ON when X9 is ON and turn MC OFF when OFF.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X9 1 MC N0 M98 4 LD X10 5 OUT Y30 6 LD X11 7 OUT Y31 8 LD X12 9 OUT Y32 10 LD X13 11 OUT Y33 12 MCR N0

PLS, PLF

— 65 —

PLS, PLF … Pulse (1 scan ON)

Usable device Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st

ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

D 2

Function PLS (1) The designated device is turned ON for one scan when the PLS command changes from OFF to

ON and is turned OFF in all other cases.

(2) Even if the sequence program is changed from RUN to STOP and then RUN after the PLS

command is executed, the PLS command will not be executed. If the PLS command is ON when the power is turned ON, the PLS command will be executed.

PLF (1) The designated device is turned ON for one scan when the PLF command changes from ON to

OFF and is turned OFF in all other cases.

PLS, PLF

— 66 —

(2) Even if the sequence program RUN switch is changed from RUN to STOP and then RUN after the PLF command is executed, the PLF command will not be executed.

Program example (1) Program to execute PLS command when X9 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X9 1 PLS M9

(2) Program to execute PLF command when X9 turns OFF.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X9 1 PLF M9

SFT

— 67 —

SFT … Device shift

Usable device Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st

ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

D 2

Function (1) The device that designates the ON/OFF state of the device that is one number smaller than the

device designated with D (destination) is shifted, and the device that is one number smaller is turned OFF.

(2) Turn the head device to be shifted ON with the SET command. (3) When using SFT in succession, program from the largest device No.

Operation of shift command

SFT

— 68 —

Program example (1) Program to shift Y57 to 5B when X8 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X8 1 SFT Y5B 3 SFT Y5A 5 SFT Y59 7 SFT Y58 9 LD X7 10 PLS M8 12 LD M8 13 SET Y57

MPS, MRD, MPP

— 69 —

MPS, MRD, MPP … Registering, reading and clearing of operation results

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-sta nt Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

1

Function MPS (1) The operation results (ON/OFF) just before the MPS command are registered. (2) The MPS command can be used consecutively up to four times. If the MPP command is used in

between, the No. of MPS usages will be decremented by one. MRD (1) The operation results registered with the MPS command are read, and the operation is continued

from the next step using those operation results. MPP (1) The operation results registered with the MPS command are read, and the operation is continued

from the next step using those operation results.

MPS, MRD, MPP

— 70 —

(2) The operation results registered with the MPS command are cleared.

Point (1) The circuits when MPS, MRD and MPP are used and not used are as follow.

Program example (1) Program using MPS, MRD and MPP.

Coding No. of

steps Com- mand Device

0 LD X1C (1) 1 MPS 2 AND M8 3 OUT Y30 (2) 4 MPP 5 OUT Y31 6 LD X1D (3) 7 MPS 8 ANI M9 (4) 9 MPS 10 AND M68 11 OUT Y32 (5) 12 MPP 13 AND T0 14 OUT Y33 (6) 15 MPP 16 OUT Y34 17 LD X1E 18 AND M81 (7) 19 MPS 20 AND M96 21 OUT Y35 (8) 22 MRD 23 AND M97 24 OUT Y36 (9) 25 MRD 26 AND M98 27 OUT Y37 (10) 28 MPP 29 OUT Y38

Circuit using MPS, MRD and MPP Circuit not using MPS, MRD and MPP

DEFR

— 71 —

DEFR … Pulses in regard to operation results

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-sta nt Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

1

Function The operation results are turned ON for one scan when the DEFR command is turned from OFF to

ON, and are turned OFF for all other cases.

Execution conditions This is executed per scan regardless of the operation results to the DEFR command.

DEFR

— 72 —

Program example (1) Program to turn Y0 ON for one scan when X9 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X9 1 DEFR M0 2 OUT Y0 3

(2) Program to execute MOVE command once when X9 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X9 1 DEFR M0 2 MOV K0 D10 5

8. Function Commands

— 73 —

8. Function Commands Recent sequence programs that require more advanced control cannot provide sufficient control only

with basic commands and thus need four-rule operation and comparison, etc. Many function commands have been prepared for this. There are approx. 76 types of function

commands. Each command is explained in the following section.

LD=, AND=, OR=

— 74 —

LD=, AND=, OR= …. Comparison of 16-bit data (=)

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S1 S2 3

Function (1) 16-bit comparison operation is executed with a contact handling. (2) The comparison operation results will be as follow.

Conditions Comparison operation results S1=S2 Continuity state S1=/ S2 Non-continuity state

Execution conditions The execution conditions for LD=, AND= and OR= are as follow.

Command Execution conditions LD= Executed per scan AND= Executed only when previous

contact command is ON OR= Executed per scan

LD=, AND=, OR=

— 75 —

Program example (1) Program to compare the X0 to F data and D3 data.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD= K4X0 D3 3 OUT Y33 4

(2) Program to compare the BCD value 100 and D3 data.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M3 1 AND= H100 D3 4 OUT Y33 5

(3) Program to compare the BIN value 100 and D3 data.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M3 1 LD= K100 D3 4 OR M8 5 ANB 6 OUT Y33 7

(4) Program to compare the D0 and D3 data.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M3 1 AND M8 2 OR= D0 D3 5 OUT Y33 6

LDD=, ANDD=, ORD=

— 76 —

LDD=, ANDD=, ORD= … Comparison of 32-bit data (=)

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S1 S2 3/4

Function (1) 32-bit comparison operation is executed with a contact handling. (2) The comparison operation results will be as follow.

Conditions Comparison operation results S1=S2 Continuity state S1=/ S2 Non-continuity state

Execution conditions The execution conditions for LDD=, ANDD= and ORD= are as follow.

Command Execution conditions LDD= Executed per scan ANDD= Executed only when previous

contact command is ON ORD= Executed per scan

LDD=, ANDD=, ORD=

— 77 —

Program example (1) Program to compare the X0 to 1F data, D3 and D4 data.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LDD= K8X0 D3 3 OUT Y33 4

(2) Program to compare the BCD value 18000, D3 and D4 data.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M3 1 ANDD= H18000 D3 5 OUT Y33 6

(3) Program to compare the BIN value -80000, D3 and D4 data.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M3 1 LDD= K-80000 D3 5 OR M8 6 ANB 7 OUT Y33 8

(4) Program to compare the D0, D1, D3 and D4 data.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M3 1 AND M8 2 ORD= D0 D3 5 OUT Y33 6

LD>, AND>, OR>

— 78 —

LD>, AND>, OR> …. Comparison of 16-bit data (>)

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S1 S2 3

Function (1) 16-bit comparison operation is executed with a contact handling. (2) The comparison operation results will be as follow.

Conditions Comparison operation results S1>S2 Continuity state S1<=S2 Non-continuity state

Execution conditions The execution conditions for LD>, AND> and OR> are as follow.

Command Execution conditions LD> Executed per scan AND> Executed only when previous

contact command is ON OR> Executed per scan

LD>, AND>, OR>

— 79 —

Program example (1) Program to compare the X0 to F data and D3 data.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD> K4X0 D3 3 OUT Y33 4

(2) Program to compare the BCD value 100 and D3 data.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M3 1 AND> H100 D3 4 OUT Y33 5

(3) Program to compare the BIN value 100 and D3 data.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M3 1 LD> K100 D3 4 OR M8 5 ANB 6 OUT Y33 7

(4) Program to compare the D0 and D3 data.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M3 1 AND M8 2 OR> D0 D3 5 OUT Y33 6

LDD>, ANDD>, ORD>

— 80 —

LDD>, ANDD>, ORD> … Comparison of 32-bit data (>)

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S1 S2 3/4

Function (1) 32-bit comparison operation is executed with a contact handling. (2) The comparison operation results will be as follow.

Conditions Comparison operation results S1>S2 Continuity state S1<=S2 Non-continuity state

Execution conditions The execution conditions for LDD>, ANDD> and ORD> are as follow.

Command Execution conditions LDD> Executed per scan ANDD> Executed only when previous

contact command is ON ORD> Executed per scan

LDD>, ANDD>, ORD>

— 81 —

Program example (1) Program to compare the X0 to 1F data, D3 and D4 data.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LDD> K8X0 D3 3 OUT Y33 4

(2) Program to compare the BCD value 18000, D3 and D4 data.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M3 1 ANDD> H18000 D3 5 OUT Y33 6

(3) Program to compare the BIN value -80000, D3 and D4 data.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M3 1 LDD> K-80000 D3 5 OR M8 6 ANB 7 OUT Y33 8

(4) Program to compare the D0, D1, D3 and D4 data.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M3 1 AND M8 2 ORD> D0 D3 5 OUT Y33 6

LD<, AND<, OR<

— 82 —

LD<, AND<, OR< …. Comparison of 16-bit data (<)

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S1 S2 3

Function (1) 16-bit comparison operation is executed with a contact handling. (2) The comparison operation results will be as follow.

Conditions Comparison operation results S1 =S2 Non-continuity state

Execution conditions The execution conditions for LD<, AND< and OR< are as follow.

Command Execution conditions LD< Executed per scan AND< Executed only when previous

contact command is ON OR< Executed per scan

LD<, AND<, OR<

— 83 —

Program example (1) Program to compare the X0 to F data and D3 data.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD< K4X0 D3 3 OUT Y33 4

(2) Program to compare the BCD value 100 and D3 data.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M3 1 AND< H100 D3 4 OUT Y33 5

(3) Program to compare the BIN value 100 and D3 data.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M3 1 LD< K100 D3 4 OR M8 5 ANB 6 OUT Y33 7

(4) Program to compare the D0 and D3 data.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M3 1 AND M8 2 OR< D0 D3 5 OUT Y33 6

LDD<, ANDD<, ORD<

— 84 —

LDD<, ANDD<, ORD< … Comparison of 32-bit data (<)

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S1 S2 3/4

Function (1) 32-bit comparison operation is executed with a contact handling. (2) The comparison operation results will be as follow.

Conditions Comparison operation results S1 =S2 Non-continuity state

Execution conditions The execution conditions for LDD<, ANDD< and ORD< are as follow.

Command Execution conditions LDD< Executed per scan ANDD< Executed only when previous

contact command is ON ORD< Executed per scan

LDD<, ANDD<, ORD<

— 85 —

Program example (1) Program to compare the X0 to 1F data, D3 and D4 data.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LDD< K8X0 D3 3 OUT Y33 4

(2) Program to compare the BCD value 18000, D3 and D4 data.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M3 1 ANDD< H18000 D3 5 OUT Y33 6

(3) Program to compare the BIN value -80000, D3 and D4 data.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M3 1 LDD< K-80000 D3 5 OR M8 6 ANB 7 OUT Y33 8

(4) Program to compare the D0, D1, D3 and D4 data.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M3 1 AND M8 2 ORD< D0 D3 5 OUT Y33 6

+

— 86 —

+ … BIN 16-bit addition

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S1 S2 D

4

Function (1) The BIN data designated with S1 and the BIN data designated with S2 are added, and the

addition results are stored in the device designated with D.

(2) -32768 to 32767 (BIN 16-bit) can be designated in S1 and S2. (3) The positive/negative of the data in S1, S2 and D is determined with the highest-order bit (B15).

B15 Judgment of positive/negative

0 Positive 1 Negative

(4) The carry flag will not turn ON if the 15th bit overflows.

+

— 87 —

Execution conditions The execution conditions for + are as shown below.

Program example (1) Program to add the D0 BIN data and D10 BIN data and output to D20.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M0 1 + D0 D10 D20

D+

— 88 —

D+ … BIN 32-bit addition

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S1 S2 D

4/5

Function (1) The BIN data designated with S1 and the BIN data designated with S2 are added, and the

addition results are stored in the device designated with D.

(2) -2147483648 to 2147483647 (BIN 32-bit) can be designated in S1 and S2. (3) The positive/negative of the data in S1, S2 and D is determined with the highest-order bit (B31).

B31 Judgment of positive/negative

0 Positive 1 Negative

(4) The carry flag will not turn ON if the 31st bit overflows.

D+

— 89 —

Execution conditions The execution conditions for D+ are as shown below.

Program example (1) Program to add the D0, 1 data and D9, 10 data when X0 turns ON, and output the results to D20,

21.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X0 1 D+ D0 D9 D20 5

(2) Program to add the A0, A1 data and D0, D1 data when XB turns ON, and output the results to

D10, D11.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X0 1 D+ D0 A0 D10 5

— 90 —

… BIN 16-bit subtraction

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S1 S2 D

4

Function (1) The device designated with S1 and the device designated with S2 are subtracted, and the

subtracted results are stored in the device designated with D.

(2) -32768 to 32767 (BIN 16-bit) can be designated in S1 and S2. (3) The positive/negative of the data in S1, S2 and D is determined with the highest-order bit (B15).

B15 Judgment of positive/negative

0 Positive 1 Negative

(4) The carry flag will not turn ON if the 0 bit underflows.

— 91 —

Execution conditions The execution conditions for — are as shown below.

Program example (1) Program to subtract the BIN data from D3 to D10 and output to D20.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M0 1 — D3 D10 D20 5

(2) Program to BCD output the difference of the timer T3 setting value and current value to D20.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X3 1 OUT T3 K18000 3 LD M0 4 MOV K18000 D2 7 — D2 T3 D3 11 BCD D3 D20 14

D

— 92 —

D … BIN 32-bit subtraction

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S1 S2 D

4/5

Function (1) The device designated with S1 and the device designated with S2 are subtracted, and the

subtracted results are stored in the device designated with D.

(2) -2147483648 to 2147483647 (BIN 32-bit) can be designated in S1 and S2. (3) The positive/negative of the data in S and D is determined with the highest-order bit (B31).

B31 Judgment of positive/negative

0 Positive 1 Negative

(4) The carry flag will not turn ON if the 0 bit underflows.

D

— 93 —

Execution conditions The execution conditions for D- are as shown below.

Program example (1) Program to subtract the D0, 1 data from the D10, 11 data when X1 turns ON, and output the

results to D99, 100. Program to subtract the D0, 1 data from D10, 11 data when X2 turns ON, and output the results to D97, 98.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X1 1 D- D10 D0 D99 5 LD X2 6 D- D10 D0 D97 10

*

— 94 —

* … BIN 16-bit multiplication

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S1 S2 D

4

Function (1) The BIN data designated with S1 and the BIN data designated with S2 are multiplied, and the

multiplication results are stored in the device designated with D.

(2) -32768 to 32767 (BIN 16-bit) can be designated in S1 and S2. (3) The positive/negative of the data in S1, S2 and D is determined with the highest-order bit (B15, D

is B31).

B15/B31 Judgment of positive/negative

0 Positive 1 Negative

*

— 95 —

Execution conditions The execution conditions for * are as shown below.

Program example (1) Program to multiply the D0 data and BIN 5678 when X5 turns ON and output the results to D3, 4.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X5 1 * D0 K5678 D3 5

(2) Program to multiple the D0 BIN data and D10 BIN data, and output the results to D20.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M0 1 * D0 D10 D20 5

D*

— 96 —

D* … BIN 32-bit multiplication

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S1 S2 D

4/5

Function (1) The BIN data designated with S1 and the BIN data designated with S2 are multiplied, and the

multiplication results are stored in the device designated with D.

(2) -2147483648 to 2147483647 (BIN 32-bit) can be designated in S1 and S2. (3) The positive/negative of the data in S1, S2 and D is determined with the highest-order bit (B31, D

is B63).

B31/B63 Judgment of positive/negative

0 Positive 1 Negative

D*

— 97 —

Execution conditions The execution conditions for D* are as shown below.

Program example (1) Program to multiply the D7, 8 BIN data and D18, 19 BIN data when X5 turns ON, and output the

results to D1 to 4.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X5 1 D* D7 D18 D1 5

(2) Program to multiply the D20 BIN data and D10 BIN data when X0 turns ON, and output the

high-order 16-bit to Y30 to 4F.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X0 1 D* D20 D10 D0 5 DMOV D3 K8Y30 8

/

— 98 —

/ … BIN 16-bit division

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S1 S2 D

4

Function (1) The BIN data designated with S1 and the BIN data designated with S2 are divided, and the

division results are stored in the device designated with D.

(2) -32768 to 32767 (BIN 16-bit) can be designated in S1 and S2. (3) The positive/negative of the data in S1, S2 and D is determined with the highest-order bit (B15).

B15 Judgment of positive/negative

0 Positive 1 Negative

(4) For the word device, the operation results will be stored as quotient and redundant using the 32-bit.

Quotient … Stored in low-order 16-bit. Redundant … Stored in high-order 16-bit. (5) The S1 and S2 data will not change even after operation is executed.

/

— 99 —

Execution conditions The execution conditions for / are as shown below.

Program example (1) Program to divide the D10 data by 3.14 when X3 turns ON, and output the value (quotient) to D5.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X3 1 * D10 K100 D0 5 / D0 K314 D5 9

Point

The source and destination sides of the above program are as follow.

D/

— 100 —

D/ … BIN 32-bit division

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S1 S2 D

4/5

Function (1) The BIN data designated with S1 and the BIN data designated with S2 are divided, and the

division results are stored in the device designated with D.

(2) -2147483648 to 2147483647 (BIN 32-bit) can be designated in S1 and S2. (3) The positive/negative of the data in S and D is determined with the highest-order bit (B31).

B31 Judgment of positive/negative

0 Positive 1 Negative

(4) For the word device, the operation results will be stored as quotient and redundant using the

64-bit. Quotient … Stored in low-order 32-bit. Redundant … Stored in high-order 32-bit. (5) The S1 and S2 data will not change even after operation is executed.

D/

— 101 —

Execution conditions The execution conditions for D/ are as shown below.

Program example (1) Program to multiply the D10 data by 3.14 when X3 turns ON, and output the results to Y30 to 3F.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X3 1 * D10 K314 D0 5 D/ D0 K100 D2 10 MOV D2 K4Y30

Point

The source and destination sides of the above program are as follow.

INC

— 102 —

INC … (16-bit BIN data) +1

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

D 2

Function (1) The device (16-bit data) designated with D is incremented by one.

(2) If INC is executed when the details of the device designated with D are 32767, -32768 will be

stored in the device designated with D. Execution conditions The execution conditions for the INC command are as shown below.

INC

— 103 —

Program example (1) Example of addition counter program

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X7 1 MOV K0 D8 4 LD X8 5 PLS M5 7 LD M5 8 ANI M38 9 INC D8 11 LD= K100 D8 14 OUT M38 15

DINC

— 104 —

DINC … (32-bit BIN data) +1

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

D 2

Function (1) The device (32-bit data) designated with D is incremented by one.

(2) If DINC is executed when the details of the device designated with D are 2147483647,

-2147483648 will be stored in the device designated with D. Execution conditions The execution conditions for the DINC command are as shown below.

DINC

— 105 —

Program example (1) Program to increment the D0, 1 data by one when M0 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M0 1 DINC D0

(2) Program to increment X10 to 27 data by one when M0 turns ON, and to store the results in D3, 4.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M0 1 DMOV K6X10 D3 4 DINC D3

DEC

— 106 —

DEC … (16-bit BIN data) 1

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

D 2

Function (1) The device (16-bit data) designated with D is decremented by one.

(2) If DEC is executed when the details of the device designated with D are 0, -1 will be stored in the

device designated with D. Execution conditions The execution conditions for the DEC command are as shown below.

DEC

— 107 —

Program example (1) Example of subtraction counter program

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X7 1 MOV K100 D8 4 LD X8 5 PLS M5 7 LD M5 8 ANI M38 9 DEC D8 11 LD= K0 D8 14 OUT M38

DDEC

— 108 —

DDEC … (32-bit BIN data) 1

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

D 2

Function (1) The device (32-bit data) designated with D is decremented by one.

(2) If DDEC is executed when the details of the device designated with D are 0, -1 will be stored in the

device designated with D. Execution conditions The execution conditions for the DDEC command are as shown below.

DDEC

— 109 —

Program example (1) Program to decrement the D0, 1 data by one when M0 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M0 1 DDEC D0

4 (3) (2) Program to decrement X10 to 27 data by one when M0 turns ON, and to store the results in D3,

4.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M0 1 DMOV K6X10 D3 4 DDEC D3

7 (6)

BCD

— 110 —

BCD … BIN BCD conversion (16-bit)

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S D 3

Function The BIN data (0 to 9999) of the device designated with S is BCD converted and transmitted to the

device designated with D.

(Note 1) If the device BIN data designated by S is not within 0 to 9999, it will not be converted

correctly. Execution conditions The execution conditions for BCD are as follow.

BCD

— 111 —

Program example (1) Program to output C4 current value from Y20 to 2F to BCD display.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M0 1 BCD C4 D4 4 MOV D4 K4Y20

DBCD

— 112 —

DBCD … BIN BCD conversion (32-bit)

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S D 3

Function The BIN data (0 to 99999999) of the device designated with S is BCD converted and transmitted to

the device designated with D.

(Note 1) If the device BIN data designated by S is not within 0 to 99999999, it will not be converted

correctly.

DBCD

— 113 —

Execution conditions The execution conditions for DBCD are as follow.

Program example (1) Program to output the current timer value of which the setting value exceeds 9999 to Y1C to 2F.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X3 1 OUT T5 K18000 3 LD M0 4 DBCD T5 D15 7 DMOV D15 K5Y1C

BIN

— 114 —

BIN … BCD BIN conversion (16-bit)

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S D 3

Function The BCD data (0 to 9999) of the device designated with S is BIN converted and transmitted to the

device designated with D.

(Note 1) If the device digit data designated by S is not within 0 to 9, it will not be converted

correctly. Execution conditions The execution conditions for BIN are as follow.

BIN

— 115 —

Program example (1) Program to BIN convert the X10 to 1B BCD data when X8 turns On, and store in D8.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X8 1 BIN K3X10 D8 4

DBIN

— 116 —

DBIN … BCD BIN conversion (32-bit)

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S D 3

Function The BCD data (0 to 99999999) of the device designated with S is BIN converted and transmitted to

the device designated with D.

(Note 1) If the device digit data designated by S is not within 0 to 9, it will not be converted

correctly.

DBIN

— 117 —

Execution conditions The execution conditions for DBIN are as follow.

Program example (1) Program to BIN convert the X10 to 23 BCD data when X0 turns ON, and to store in D14, 15.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X0 1 DBIN K5X10 D14 4

(2) Program to BIN convert the D0, 1 data when X0 turns ON, and store in D18, 19.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X0 1 DBIN D0 D18 4

MOV

— 118 —

MOV … 16-bit data transmission

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S

D Note1 3

: MOV from a bit device (word device) to Z or V is not possible. Z and V cannot be independently placed on the source side, but can be used on the source side

as ornaments for D and R. Refer to «6.2.4 Index Ornaments» for details. (Note 1) MOV to device X can be programmed, but this is a command for testing by Mitsubishi.

Do not use it.

Function The 16-bit data of the device designated with S is transmitted to the device designated with D.

Execution conditions The execution conditions for MOV are as shown below.

MOV

— 119 —

Program example (1) Program to store input X0 to B data in D8.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M0 1 MOV K3X0 D8 4

(2) Program to store 155 in D8 as binary value when X8 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X8 1 MOV K155 D8 4

(3) Program to store 155 in D93 as BCD value in when XB turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD XB 1 MOV H155 D93 4

(4) Program to store 155 in D894 as hexadecimal (HEX) when X13 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X13 1 MOV H9B D894 4

DMOV

— 120 —

DMOV … 32-bit data transmission

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S D Note2 3/4

(Note 1) DMOV from a bit device to a bit device is not possible. (Note 2) DMOV to device X can be programmed, but this is a command for testing by Mitsubishi.

Do not use it.

Function The 32-bit data of the device designated with S is transmitted to the device designated with D.

Execution conditions The execution conditions for DMOV are as shown below.

DMOV

— 121 —

Program example (1) Program to store A0, A1 data in D0, D1.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M0 1 DMOV A0 D0 4

(2) Program to store X0 to 1F data in D0, D1.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M0 1 DMOV K8X0 D0

XCH

— 122 —

XCH … 16-bit data exchange

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

D1 D2 3

Function The D1 and D2 16-bit data are exchanged.

Execution conditions The execution conditions for the XCH command are as shown below.

XCH

— 123 —

Program example (1) Program to exchange T0 current value with D0 details when M8 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M8 1 XCH T0 D0

(2) Program to exchange D0 details with M16 to M31 data when M10 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M10 1 XCH K4M16 D0

(3) Program to exchange D0 details with R9 details when M0 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M0 1 XCH D0 R9

DXCH

— 124 —

DXCH … 32-bit data exchange

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

D1 D2 3

Function The D1 and D2 32-bit data are exchanged.

Execution conditions The execution conditions for the DXCH command are as shown below.

DXCH

— 125 —

Program example (1) Program to exchange T0 and T1 current values with D0, 1 details when M8 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M8 1 DXCH T0 D0

(2) Program to exchange D0, 1 details with M16 to M47 data when M10 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X10 1 DXCH K8M16 D0

(3) Program to exchange D0, 1 details with R9, 10 details when M0 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M0 1 DXCH D0 R9

BMOV

— 126 —

BMOV … Block transmission of 16-bit data

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S D

n 4

Function The details of n points from the device designated with S are batch transmitted to the n point

designated with D.

Execution conditions The execution conditions of the BMOV command are as shown below.

BMOV

— 127 —

Program example (1) Program to transmit the current values of T33 to 48 to D908 to 923.

Block transmission with BMOV command

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M90 1 BMOV T33 D908 H10

FMOV

— 128 —

FMOV … Batch transmission of same 16-bit data

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S D

n 3

Function The details of the device designated with S are transmitted to the n point designated with D.

Execution conditions The execution conditions of the FMOV command are as shown below.

FMOV

— 129 —

Program example (1) Program to reset (clear) D8 to 23 when XA turns ON.

Resetting of data registers with FMOV command

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD XA 1 FMOV K0 D8 H10 5

CJ

— 130 —

CJ … Conditional jump

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

P 2

Function CJ (1) The program of the designated pointer No. is executed when the jump command turns ON. (2) The program of the next step is executed when the jump command is OFF.

CJ

— 131 —

Point (1) After the timer coil is turned ON, if the timer that is turning the coil ON with the CJ command is

jumped, the timer count will continue. (2) The scan time will be shortened if jumping is done after the CJ command. (3) The CJ command can be used to jump to a smaller step.

(4) The devices skipped with CJ will not change.

(5) Label (P**) possesses one step.

FEND

— 132 —

FEND … Program end

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-sta nt Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

1

Function The sequence program is ended.

FEND

— 133 —

Program example Program when using CJ command

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X0 1 OUT Y20 2 LD XB 3 CJ P23 5 LD X13 6 OUT Y30 7 LD X14 8 OUT Y31 9 FEND 10 P23 11 LD X1 12 OUT Y22 13

CALL, RET

— 134 —

CALL, RET … Call/return of sub-routine program

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

P 2

Function CALL (1) The sub-routine program designated with the point (P**) is executed.

CALL, RET

— 135 —

RET (1) The end of the sub-routine program is indicated. (2) When the RET command is executed, the sequence program in the step after the CALL

command will be executed. Execution conditions The execution conditions of the CALL command are as shown below.

Program example Program to execute sub-routine program when X1 changes from OFF to ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X8 1 OUT Y11 2 LD X1 3 CALL P33 5 LD X9 6 OUT Y13 7 FEND 8 500 P33 501 LD XA 502 OUT Y33 503 OUT Y34 504 RET 505

WAND

— 136 —

WAND … Logical AND of 16-bit data

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S1 S2 D

4

Function (1) Logical AND is executed for each bit of the 16-bit data in the device designated with S1 and the

device designated with S2, and the results are stored in the device designated with D.

(2) Above the bit device digit designation is operated as 0. (Refer to program example (2) on the next page.)

WAND

— 137 —

Execution conditions The execution conditions for WAND are as follow.

Program example (1) Program that executes logical AND of the D10 data and D20 data when XA turns ON, and stores

the results in D33.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD XA 1 WAND D10 D20 D33

(2) Program that executes logical AND of the X10 to 1B data and D33 data when XA turns ON, and

outputs the results to D50.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD XA 1 WAND K3X10 D33 D50

DAND

— 138 —

DAND … Logical AND of 32-bit data

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S D 3/4

Function (1) Logical AND is executed for each bit of the 32-bit data in the device designated with D and the

device designated in S, and the results are stored in the device designated with D.

(2) Above the bit device digit designation is operated as 0. (Refer to program example (1) on the next page.) Execution conditions The execution conditions for the DAND command are as follow.

DAND

— 139 —

Program example (1) Program that executes logical AND of the X30 to 47 24-bit data and D99, 100 data when X8 turns

ON, and transmit the results to M80 to 103.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X3 1 DAND K6X30 D99 10 DMOV D99 K6M80

(2) Program that executes logical AND of the D0, 1 32-bit data and R108, 109 when M16 turns ON, and

outputs the results to Y100 to 11F.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M16 1 DAND D0 R108 4 DMOV R108 K8Y100

WOR

— 140 —

WOR … Logical OR of 16-bit data

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S1 S2 D

4

Function Logical OR is executed for each bit of the 16-bit data in the device designated with S1 and the device

designated with S2, and the results are stored in the device designated with D.

Execution conditions The execution conditions for WOR are as follow.

WOR

— 141 —

Program example (1) Program that executes logical OR of the D10 data and D20 data when XA turns ON, and stores

the results in D33.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD XA 1 WOR D10 D20 D33

(2) Program that executes logical OR of the X10 to 1B data and D33 data when XA turns ON, and

outputs the results in D100.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD XA 1 WOR K3X10 D33 D100

DOR

— 142 —

DOR … Logical OR of 32-bit data

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S D 3/4

Function Logical OR is executed for each bit of the 32-bit data in the device designated with D and the device

designated with S, and the results are stored in the device designated with D.

Execution conditions The execution conditions for DOR are as follow.

DOR

— 143 —

Program example (1) Program that executes logical OR of the X0 to 1F 32-bit data and the F0FF hexadecimal when

XB turns ON, and stores the results in R66, 67.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD XB 1 DMOV HFOFF R66 5 DOR X8X0 R66

(2) Program that executes logical OR of the M64 to 87 24-bit data and X20 to 37 24-bit data when

M8 turns ON, and stores the results in D23, 24.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M8 1 DMOV K6X20 D23 4 DOR K6M64 D23

WXOR

— 144 —

WXOR … Exclusive OR of 16-bit data

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S1 S2 D

4

Function Exclusive OR is executed for each bit of the 16-bit data designated with S1 and designated with S2,

and the results are stored in the device designated with D.

Execution conditions The execution conditions for WXOR are as follow.

WXOR

— 145 —

Program example (1) Program that executes exclusive OR of the D10 data and D20 data when XA turns ON, and

stores the results in D33.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD XA 1 WXOR D10 D20 D33

(2) Program that executes exclusive OR of the X10 to 1B data and D33 data when XA turns ON, and

outputs the results to D100.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD XA 1 WXOR K3X10 D33 D100

DXOR

— 146 —

DXOR … Exclusive OR of 32-bit data

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S D 3/4

Function Exclusive OR is executed for each bit of the 32-bit data designated with D and designated with S, and

the results are stored in the device designated with D.

Execution conditions The execution conditions for DXOR are as follow.

DXOR

— 147 —

Program example (1) Program that compares the X20 to 3F 32-bit data and the D9, 10 data when X6 turns ON, and

stores the differing No. of bits in D16.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X6 1 DXOR K8X20 D9 4 SUM D9 6 MOV A0 D16

NEG

— 148 —

NEG … Complement of 2 (BIN 16-bit data)

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

D 2

Function (1) The 16-bit data of the device designated with D is reversed and incremented by one, and then

stored in the device designated with D.

(2) This is used to use a negative BIN value as an absolute value. Execution conditions The execution conditions for NEG are as follow.

NEG

— 149 —

Program example (1) Program to calculate D10 — D20 when XA turns ON and obtain an absolute value when the

results are negative.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD XA 1 AND< D10 D20 4 OUT M3 5 LD XA 6 — D10 D20 D10 10 AND M3 11 NEG D10 13

ROR

— 150 —

ROR … Right rotation of A0 data

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

n 2

Function The A0 data excluding the carry flag is rotated to the right n bits.

Execution conditions The execution conditions for the ROR command are as shown below.

ROR

— 151 —

Program example Program to rotate the A0 details 3 bits to the right when M0 turns ON.

Right rotation of data using ROR command

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M0 1 ROR K3 3

RCR

— 152 —

RCR … Right rotation of A0 data

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

n 2

Function The A0 data including the carry flag is rotated to the right n bits. The carry flag must be set to 1 or 0 before executing RCR.

RCR

— 153 —

Execution conditions The execution conditions for the RCR command are as shown below.

Program example Program to rotate the A0 details 3 bits to the right when M0 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M0 1 RCR K3 3

Right rotation of data using RCR command

DROR

— 154 —

DROR … Right rotation of A0, 1 data

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

n 2

Function The A0, 1 data excluding the carry flag is rotated to the right n bits.

Execution conditions The execution conditions for the DROR command are as shown below.

DROR

— 155 —

Program example Program to rotate the A0, 1 details 3 bits to the right when M0 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD XA 1 DMOV K1 A0 5 LD M0 6 DROR K3 8

Right rotation of data using DROR command

DRCR

— 156 —

DRCR … Right rotation of A0, 1 data

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

n 2

Function The A0, 1 data including the carry flag is rotated to the right n bits.

The carry flag must be set to 1 or 0 before executing DRCR.

DRCR

— 157 —

Execution conditions The execution conditions for the DRCR command are as shown below.

Program example Program to rotate the A0, 1 details 3 bits to the right when M0 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD XA 1 DMOV K1 A0 5 LD M0 6 DRCR K3 8

Right rotation of data using DRCR command

ROL

— 158 —

ROL … Left rotation of A0 data

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

n 2

Function The A0 data excluding the carry flag is rotated to the left n bits. The carry flag must be set to 1 or 0 after executing ROL.

Execution conditions The execution conditions for the ROL command are as shown below.

ROL

— 159 —

Program example Program to rotate the A0 details 3 bits to the left when M0 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M0 1 ROL K3 3

Left rotation of data using ROL command

RCL

— 160 —

RCL … Left rotation of A0 data

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

n 2

Function The A0 data including the carry flag is rotated to the left n bits. The carry flag must be set to 1 or 0 before executing RCL.

RCL

— 161 —

Execution conditions The execution conditions for the RCL command are as shown below.

Program example Program to rotate the A0 details 3 bits to the left when M0 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M0 1 RCL K3 3

Left rotation of data using RCL command

DROL

— 162 —

DROL … Left rotation of A0, 1 data

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

n 2

Function The A0, 1 data excluding the carry flag is rotated to the left n bits.

Execution conditions The execution conditions for the DROL command are as shown below.

DROL

— 163 —

Program example Program to rotate the A0, 1 details 3 bits to the left when M0 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD XA 1 DMOV H80000000 A0 5 LD M0 6 DROL K3 8

Left rotation of data using DROL command

DRCL

— 164 —

DRCL … Left rotation of A0, 1 data

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

n 2

Function The A0, 1 data including the carry flag is rotated to the left n bits. The carry flag must be set to 1 or 0 before executing DRCL.

DRCL

— 165 —

Execution conditions The execution conditions for the DRCL command are as shown below.

Program example Program to rotate the A0, 1 details 3 bits to the left when M0 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD XA 1 DMOV H80000000 A0 5 LD M0 6 DRCL K3 8

Left rotation of data using DRCL command

SFR

— 166 —

SFR … Right shift of 16-bit data

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

D n

3

Function (1) The 16-bit data of the device designated with D is shifted n bits to the right.

(2) n bits from the highest order are set to 0. (3) The T, C shift will be a current value (attribute value or count value) shift. (Shifting with the setting

value is not possible.)

SFR

— 167 —

Execution conditions The execution conditions for SFR are as shown below.

Program example Program that shifts the details of D8 5 bits to the right when M10 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M10 1 SFR D8 K5

Right shift of data with SFR command (word device)

DSFR

— 168 —

DSFR … Right shift of word device in batch

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

D n

3

Function (1) n points starting at the head of the device designated with D are shifted one point to the right.

(2) The highest order device is set to 0. (3) The T, C shift will be a current value (attribute value or count value) shift. (Shifting with the setting

value is not possible.) Execution conditions The execution conditions of DSFR are as shown below.

DSFR

— 169 —

Program example (1) Program to shift the details of D668 to 689 to the right when M10 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M10 1 DSFR D683 K7

Right shift of data with DSFR command

(2) Program to shift the details of R6 to 9 to the right when M6 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M6 1 DSFR R6 K4

Right shift of data with DSFR command

SFL

— 170 —

SFL … Left shift of 16-bit data

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

D n

3

Function (1) The 16-bit data of the device designated with D is shifted n bits to the left. (2) n bits from the lowest order are set to 0.

(3) The T, C shift will be a current value (attribute value or count value) shift. (Shifting with the setting

value is not possible.)

SFL

— 171 —

Execution conditions The execution conditions for SFL are as shown below.

Program example (1) Program that shifts the details of D8 5 bits to the left when M10 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M10 1 SFL D8 K5

Left shift of data with SFL command (word device)

DSFL

— 172 —

DSFL … Left shift of word device in batch

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

D n

3

Function (1) n points starting at the head of the device designated with D are shifted one point to the left.

(2) The lowest order device is set to 0. (3) The T, C shift will be a current value (attribute value or count value) shift. (Shifting with the setting

value is not possible.) Execution conditions The execution conditions of DSFL are as shown below.

DSFL

— 173 —

Program example (1) Program to shift the details of D683 to 689 to the left when M10 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M10 1 DSFL D683 K7

Left shift of data with DSFL command

(2) Program to shift the details of R6 to 9 to the left when M6 turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M6 1 DSFL R6 K4

Left shift of data with DSFL command

SER

— 174 —

SER … Search of 16-bit data

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S1 S2

n 4

Function (1) Using the 16-bit data of the device designated with S1 as the keyword, the n points from the

16-0bit data of the device designated with S2 are searched. (2) The number of data items matching the keyword is stored in A1. The relative position of the

device containing the first matched data counted from S2 is stored in A0. (3) When n is a negative value, it is interpreted as 0. (4) No process is executed when n = 0. Execution conditions The execution conditions for SER are as shown below.

SER

— 175 —

Program example Program to compare the data in D883 to D887 with 123 when XB turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD XB 1 SER D0 D883 K5

Search of data using SER command

SUM

— 176 —

SUM … Count of No. of 16-bit data items set to 1

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

D 2

Function The total No. of bits in the 16-bit data of the device designated with S that are set to 1 is stored in A0.

Execution conditions The execution conditions for SUM are as shown below.

SUM

— 177 —

Program example Program to obtain the No. of D10 data bits that are set to ON (1) when XB turns ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD XB 1 SUM D10 3

Counting with SUM command

DECO

— 178 —

DECO … 8 256 bit decoding

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S D

n 4

Function (1) The low-order n bits of the device designated with S are decoded, and the results are stored in

the 2n bit from the device designated with D. (2) 1 to 8 can be designated for n. (3) No process is executed when n = 0, and the details of the device designated with D will not

change. (4) The word device is handled as 16 bits. Execution conditions The execution conditions for DECO are as shown below.

DECO

— 179 —

Program example (1) Program to decode the three bits 0 to 2 of R20, and turn the bits corresponding in D100 ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X0 1 DECO R20 D100 K3 5

(Note 1) The D100 bit 0 turns ON when the R20 B0 to B2 is 0. (Note 2) The D100 details remain the same even if X0 turns OFF. (2) Program to decode the eight bits 0 to 7 of R20, and turn the bits corresponding in D100 to D115

(28 = 256 bits) ON.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X0 1 DECO R20 D100 K8 5

SEG

— 180 —

SEG … Decoding to 7-segment display data

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S D

3

Function (1) The 0 to F data designated with the low-order 4-bit in S is decoded in the 7-segment display data

and stored in D.

(2) Refer to the following page for the 7-segment display. Execution conditions The execution conditions for SEG are as follow.

SEG

— 181 —

7-segment decode table

Program example Program to convert D7 data into 7-segment display data when X0 turns ON, and output to D8.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD X0 1 SEG D7 D8

AVE

— 182 —

AVE … Calculation of average value

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S D

n 4

Function The details of the n point devices from the device designated with S are averaged, and the results are

output to the device designated with D.

AVE

— 183 —

Execution conditions The execution conditions for AVE are as shown below.

Program example (1) Program to average the details of D882 to D888 when XB turns ON, and to output the results to

D0.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD XB 1 AVE D882 D0 K7

Averaging of data with AVE command

(Note) Fractional values are omitted.

STC, CLC

— 184 —

STC, CLC … Setting/resetting of carry flag

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-sta nt Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

1

Function STC (1) The carry flag contact (E12) is set (ON). CLC (2) The carry flag contact (E12) is reset (OFF). Execution conditions The execution conditions for STC and CLC are as shown below.

STC, CLC

— 185 —

Program example Program to add the X0 to F data and D0 data when M0 turns ON and to turn the carry flag (E12) ON

if the results exceed 9999. If the results are 9999 or less, the carry flag is turned OFF.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M0 1 + K4X0 D0 D1 5 LD> K4X0 D1 8 OR> D0 D1 11 OUT M1 12 LD M1 13 STC 14 LD1 M1 15 CLC 16

LDBIT, ANDBIT, ORBIT

— 186 —

LDBIT, ANDBIT, ORBIT … Bit test of a contact handling

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S1 n

3

Function (1) A bit test of the 16-bit device is executed with a contact handling. (2) The bit test results are as shown below.

Condition Bit test results When test bit is 1 Continuity When test bit is 0 Non-continuity

Execution conditions The execution conditions for LDBIT, ANDBIT and ORBIT are as shown below.

Condition Execution conditions LDBIT Executed per scan ANDBIT Executed only when previous

contact command is ON ORBIT Executed per scan

LDBIT, ANDBIT, ORBIT

— 187 —

Program example (1) Program to test bit 3 of D10.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LDBIT D10 K3 3 OUT Y33 4

(2) Program to test bit 15 of D10.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M3 1 ANDBIT D10 K15 4 OUT Y33 5

(3) Program to test bit 15 of D10.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M3 1 LDBIT D10 HF 4 OR M8 5 ANB 6 OUT Y33 7

(4) Program to test bit 10 of D10.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M3 1 AND M8 2 ORBIT D10 K10 5 OUT Y33 6

LDBII, ANDBII, ORBII

— 188 —

LDBII, ANDBII, ORBII … Bit test of b contact handling

Usable device

Bit device Word (16-bit) device Con-st ant Pointer Level

X Y M L E F T C D R A0 A1 Z V K H P N

Digit desig- nation

No. of steps Index

S1 n

3

Function (1) A bit test of the 16-bit device is executed with b contact handling. (2) The bit test results are as shown below.

Condition Bit test results When test bit is 0 Continuity When test bit is 1 Non-continuity

Execution conditions The execution conditions for LDBII, ANDBII and ORBII are as shown below.

Condition Execution conditions LDBII Executed per scan ANDBII Executed only when previous

contact command is ON ORBII Executed per scan

LDBII, ANDBII, ORBII

— 189 —

Program example (1) Program to test bit 3 of D10.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LDBII D10 K3 3 OUT Y33 4

(2) Program to test bit 15 of D10.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M3 1 ANDBII D10 K15 4 OUT Y33 5

(3) Program to test bit 15 of D10.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M3 1 LDBII D10 HF 4 OR M8 5 ANB 6 OUT Y33 7

(4) Program to test bit 10 of D10.

Coding No. of steps

Com- mand

Device

0 LD M3 1 AND M8 2 ORBII D10 K10 5 OUT Y33 6

9. Exclusive Commands

— 190 —

9. Exclusive Commands Although the basic and functional commands are not used only for specific purposes, some

commands may be efficient if command applications such as data transfer between under PLC and controller and controller display screen are limited.

Then, the M300 series provides a number of exclusive commands which are explained below. Examples of exclusive commands: ATC dedicated command (ATC) Rotary body control command (ROT) Tool life management exclusive command (TSRH) DDB (direct data bus) ….. asynchronous External search …………… synchronous

9. Exclusive Commands

— 191 —

9.1 ATC Exclusive Command 9.1.1 Outline of ATC Control The ATC (Automatic Tool Change) can be controlled in the following two ways: (1) Mechanical random control With the information of magazine position from the machine, and T command, the control system

determines the direction of magazine rotation, number of steps required, etc. for index of the magazine, according to the given command.

Each tool and magazine tool pot (socket) have a one-on-one corresponding relation. Usually, the «intermediate pot» that supports the transfer of the tool is provided between the

spindle and the magazine. This control is possible by not using ATC command, but ROT command only. (2) Memory random control With the information of magazine rotation, or magazine position from the machine, the control

system refers to tool No. stored in the memory. For index of the magazine, the direction of magazine rotation and number of steps are determined by the given T command and tool No. stored in the memory.

Each tool and magazine tool pot (socket) does not always have a one-on-one corresponding relation.

Usually, the «intermediate pot» is not provided. 9.1.2 ATC Operation The motions related to ATC operation can be largely divided into the following four motions: (1) Index of magazine ….. (ATC-K1, K2, K5, K6, K7, K8) (2) Tool change (arm, or the like is used) ….. (ATC-K3, K4) (3) Transfer of tool to intermediate pot or arm ….. (Normal function commands such as MOV, XCH

are used.) (4) Others ….. (ATC-K9, K10, K11) 9.1.3 Explanation of Terminology (1) Pointer This points out the position where the magazine is indexed. When a tool table in which tool No.

are previously recorded is used, the tool table does not rotate with rotation of the magazine and the pointer serves as «ring counter» for control of magazine position.

(2) Fixed pointer This is the type with tool pots numbered and the relationship between tool pot and tool No. is

fixed if the magazine is rotated. When the tool table is rotated, fixed pointer does not functionally differ from «floating pointer».

(3) Floating pointer This is the type with numbered fixed position on magazine and the relationship between

magazine No. and tool No. changes when the magazine rotates.

9. Exclusive Commands

— 192 —

9.1.4 Relationship between Tool Registration Screen and Magazines

When the floating pointer system or tool table rotation system is selected on the tool registration

screen, correspondence display between the magazines and tools changes each time the magazine rotates; when the fixed pointer system is selected, it does not change.

9. Exclusive Commands

— 193 —

9.1.5 Use of ATC and ROT Commands The use order of the ATC and ROT commands during the T command or tool change command is

shown below:

The relationship between the tool number search command and rotary body indexing command

when the tool table rotation system or floating pointer system is used is explained below. Tool table rotation system Floating pointer system

Register number of data searched Tool number search T command

Fixed pointer system Ring counter control Magazine

rotation Rotation direction Rotary body

indexing

Floating pointer system

Magazine stop Tool change command

Tool change

Number of steps, etc.

Forward rotation, reverse rotation of pointer

Error processing No. of the same data ATC K1 Pointer or ring counter value

Tool number AND search ATC K2

ROT K3 ROT K1

ATC K5, K6

ATC K3

Forward rotation, reverse rotation of tool table

Random position tool change ATC K4

ATC K7, K8

9. Exclusive Commands

— 194 —

(1) Index tool number 8 in the situation shown above (a) In the tool table rotation system, the tool number search command outputs 3. (b) In the floating pointer system, the tool number search command outputs 7. (2) The tool number search command output result is used by the rotary body indexing command to

find the rotation direction, the number of steps, etc. (a) In the tool table rotation system, rotation direction CW and number of steps 3 are found from

the relationship between current value 0 (pointer 0) and tool number search output result 3. (b) In the floating pointer system, rotation direction CW and number of steps 3 are found from

the relationship between current value 4 (pointer 4) and tool number search output result 7, as in (a) above.

In the fixed pointer system, the pointer is fixed to 0 and the ring counter of 0 to n-1 (n is the number of

magazines) separate from the pointer is controlled. The counter value is used as the current position. 9.1.6 Basic Format of ATC Exclusive Command

9. Exclusive Commands

— 195 —

9.1.7 Command List Command Description ATC K1 Rn Rm Tool No. search ATC K2 Rn Rm Tool No. logical product search ATC K3 Rn Rm Tool change ATC K4 Rn Rm Random position tool change ATC K5 Rn Rm Pointer «FWD» rotation ATC K6 Rn Rm Pointer «REV» rotation ATC K7 Rn Rm Tool table «FWD» rotation ATC K8 Rn Rm Tool table «REV» rotation ATC K9 Rn Rm Tool data read ATC K10 Rn Rm Tool data write ATC K11 Rn Rm Automatic tool data write

9.1.8 Control Data Buffer Contents Command Rn Rn+1 Rn+2

1 Tool No. search No. of register to store search data

No. of register to which data output

2 Tool No. logical product search

No. of register to store search data

No. of register to which data output

Mask data position R No.

3

Tool change (Ex.: Spindle Index position)

No. of register to specify the position of tool change

4 Random position tool

change No. of register to specify the position of tool change

No. of register to specify the tool to be changed

5 Pointer «FWD» rotation 6 Pointer «REV» rotation

7 Tool table «FWD» rotation

8 Tool table «REV» rotation

9 Tool data read Magazine position (to be read) R No.

No. of register to which data output

10 Tool data write Magazine position (to be written) R No.

Written data position R No.

11 Automatic tool data write

Initial data storage R No.

9. Exclusive Commands

— 196 —

9.1.9 File Register (R Register) Assignment and Parameters (1) File registers for ATC control The file registers used with the ATC are as shown below.

Corresponding file (R) register

Magazine No. 1 magazine

No. 2 magazine

No. 3 magazine

T4-digit/T8-digit specifications

T4- digit

T8- digit

T4- digit

T8- digit

T4- digit

T8- digit

ATC control parameters R2950 No. of magazine designation R2960 R2961 R2962 Binary

Pointer designation R2965 R2966 R2967 Binary

Spindle tool R2970 R2970 R2971 R2980 R2980

R2981 BCD

Standby 1 tool R2971 R2972 R2973 R2981 R2982

R2983 BCD

Standby 2 tool R2972 R2974 R2975 R2982 R2984

R2985 BCD

Standby 3 tool R2973 R2976 R2977 R2983 R2986

R2987 BCD

Standby 4 tool R2974 R2978 R2979 R2984 R2988

R2989 BCD

AUX data R2998 Binary (0~99) Magazine tool data MG1 R3000 R3000

R3001 R3240 R3240 R3241 R3480 R3480

R3481 BCD

MG2 R3001 R3002 R3003 R3241 R3242

R3243 R3481 R3482 R3483 BCD

MG3 R3002 R3004 R3005 R3242 R3244

R3245 R3482 R3484 R3485 BCD

MG79 R3078 R3156 R3157 R3318 R3396

R3397 R3558 R3636 R3637 BCD

MG80 R3079 R3158 R3159 R3319 R3398

R3399 R3559 R3638 R3639 BCD

(Note 1) A maximum of 80 tools per magazine can be used. (Note 2) The tool registration screen has been prepared only for the No. 1 magazine.

Remarks (data type)

~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~

9. Exclusive Commands

— 197 —

(2) Control parameter contents

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 For details on the control parameters, refer to 9.1.12 Examples of Tool Registration Screen.

R2950

0: T 4-digit 1: T 8-digit Max. number of standby displayed: 4

0: Magazine starts from «1». 1: Magazine starts from «0».

9. Exclusive Commands

— 198 —

9.1.10 Details of Each Command (1) Tool No. search This command is used to search for tool No. stored in the tool data table. When the command tool No. is found, number of searched data and its location are output. If two

or more tool No. are found, the location of tool No. nearest to the pointer is output.

9. Exclusive Commands

— 199 —

(2) Tool No. logical product (AND) search Tool number AND search is the same as the tool number search command (ATC K1) in function:

search data and in-magazine tool number and AND data are ANDed together for a search.

9. Exclusive Commands

— 200 —

(3) Tool change When a spindle tool and a magazine index tool are exchanged by the ATC arm, etc., the contents

in the memory (R register) must be updated correspondingly.

9. Exclusive Commands

— 201 —

(4) Random position tool change In tool change, a spindle tool is usually exchanged with a magazine index tool. It may often occur,

however, that tool change must be performed at a station other than the usual tool change position (tool change at auxiliary tool change position, for example). This command is used in such cases.

Magazine No. to be changed

Tool data to be changed

9. Exclusive Commands

— 202 —

(5) Pointer «FWD» rotation In the ATC control with floating pointer, pointer count is controlled so that it coincides with the

actually indexed magazine position when the magazine rotates in «FWD» direction for index.

When a magazine with 10 tools is used, the control sequence is as follows: 0, 1, 2, 3 …….. 9, 0, 1, 2, …….. 8, 9, 0, 1 …

(Note 1) When this command is executed, the relationship

between magazine No. and tool No., appearing on the tool entry display, changes accordingly.

(6) Pointer «REV» rotation In the ATC control with floating pointer, pointer count is controlled so that it coincides with

actually indexed magazine position when the magazine rotates in «REV» direction for index.

When a magazine with 10 tools is used, for example, the control sequence is as follows: 2, 1, 0, 9, 8 …….. 2, 1, 0, 9, 8 …….. 1, 0, 9, 8 …

(Note 1) When this command is executed, the relationship

between magazine No. and tool No., appearing on the tool entry display, changes accordingly.

9. Exclusive Commands

— 203 —

(7) Tool table «FWD» rotation The tool table rotates in «FWD» direction in accordance with the magazine rotation.

(8) Tool table «REV» rotation The tool table rotates in «REV» direction in accordance with the magazine rotation.

(Note 1) In this control mode, pointer always indicates «0» (tool table head). (Note 2) When this command is executed, the relationship between magazine No. and tool No., appearing on the tool entry display, changes accordingly.

(Note 1) In this control mode, pointer always indicates «0» (tool table head). (Note 2) When this command is executed, the relationship between magazine No. and tool No., appearing on the tool entry display, changes accordingly.

9. Exclusive Commands

— 204 —

(9) Tool data read This command is used to call a specific tool No. in the magazine.

9. Exclusive Commands

— 205 —

(10) Tool data write Instead of setting tool No. through the CRT console, the tool No. is entered to each magazine No.

set through PLC program.

9. Exclusive Commands

— 206 —

(11) Automatic tool data write All tool Nos. are written (entered) in batch. This command is used for initialization, etc. The data are written one after another for each tool, starting from the default value.

9. Exclusive Commands

— 207 —

9.1.11 Precautions for Using ATC Exclusive Instructions (1) When tool data is rewritten by ATC or other than ATC command, tool registration screen display

is not updated. The following processing is required: Turn on special relay E64 by using the SET command. Program example)

E64 processing is not required for ATC commands ATC K5, K6 (forward rotation, reverse

rotation of pointer), ATC K7, K8 (forward rotation, reverse rotation of tool table). E64 is set through the use of the user PLC and reset by controller. (2) Method of tool registration prohibiting during magazine rotation If tool data is set on the tool registration screen during magazine rotation, data may be set in

erroneous position. To prevent this error, a signal called special relay E71 is provided. Turn on E71 during magazine rotation. Program example)

Setting of AUX data (R2998) is valid while E71 is being ON. 9.1.12 Examples of Tool Registration Screen Tool registration screen examples are given below. For operation, refer to the Operation Manual.

9. Exclusive Commands

— 208 —

(1) Comment display part Comment in the comment display part is prepared by the user who uses the comment display

function described in the PLC Development Manual (Personal Computer Section) and PLC Onboard Instruction Manual.

(2) Spindle tool, standby tool display part The number of display items can be changed according to the control parameter value. Control parameter (R2950)

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

00: Only spindle tool is displayed. 01: Spindle tool and standby 1 are displayed. 02: Spindle tool and standby 1 and 2 are displayed. 03: Spindle tool and standby 1~3 are displayed. 04: Spindle tool and standby 1~4 are displayed. 05 or more: No spindle tool or standby tool is displayed.

Hexadecimal expression (3) Magazine tool number display part The number of displayed magazine tools and the magazine number start value can be changed

according to the number-of-magazine parameter and control parameter values. 1) Number of magazines Number-of-magazine parameter (R2960): The value can be set in the range of 0 to 80. (Note) If 0 is set, the magazine number is not displayed. However, the magazine number

and magazine tool number guide part is displayed. 2) Magazine number start value Control parameter (R2950)

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Example) Magazine number display when the number of magazines is 12.

The magazine number The magazine number starts at 1. starts at 0.

0: The magazine number starts at 1. 1: The magazine number starts at 0.

9. Exclusive Commands

— 209 —

9.1.13 Display of Spindle Tool and Standby Tool The tool mounted on the spindle or the tool to be mounted next on the spindle (standby tool) and tool

No. in the magazine are set and displayed on the tool registration screen. However, the spindle and standby tool Nos. can also be displayed on the position display screen and tool length measurement screen that are often used. With this, the changes in the magazine pot and spindle tool No. according to the tool selection command or tool change command can be confirmed.

(1) Position display screen for 9-inch CRT

(2) Display tool selection parameter A maximum of four standby tools can be displayed on the tool registration screen. The No. of the

standby tool and the title to be displayed on the current value screen and tool length measurement screen, etc., are selected.

9. Exclusive Commands

— 210 —

9.2 Rot Commands Rot commands are prepared as functions such as rotary body target position, rotation direction and

ring counter. The commands can be used to determine the direction of rotation and number of steps with the data resulting from ATC exclusive command tool No. search processing.

9.2.1 Command List

Command Description ROT K1 Rn Rm Rotary body indexing ROT K3 Rn Rm Ring counter

9. Exclusive Commands

— 211 —

(1) Rotary body indexing Direction of rotation and number of steps of ATC magazine (or turret) are determined

automatically.

(Note 1) The Index command is executed after setting R numbers to Rn to Rn+3 and writing data in

the file registers (Rs) each corresponding to the R numbers. However, data setting to the parameter (Rp) is done once before execution of the Index command; this is to prevent the error code from being cleared.

(Note 2) The error code stored in bit F of the parameter (Rp) is cleared when the Index command activating signal (ACT) goes off.

9. Exclusive Commands

— 212 —

1) Example of rotary body index by ROT K1 instruction Conditions: (i) The number of rotary body index cycles is 6.

(ii) The target position is specified by a T command. (Note) Normally the target position must be a binary, but in this example,

the number of rotary body index cycles is 1 to 6, and there is no difference between the binary and BCD. Thus, the direct T command output file register R36 (B, C, D) is used.

In the example of ladder circuit shown below, the rotation direction is determined by the T

command and current position data given by the machine, and the rotary body is rotated in that direction until the target position reaches the current position. When indexing is completed, the auxiliary command completion signal is turned on.

9. Exclusive Commands

— 213 —

9. Exclusive Commands

— 214 —

(Note 1) Either M202 or M203 can be used for a stop signal. (Note 2) The devices (X, Y, and R) are used in this example for no special purpose. Use any

device within the available range. (Note 3) If a number from 1 to 6 has not been specified for current position data (R512) before

the ROT command is activated, an error results. (Note 4) The control parameters (R510) are specified as follows: 1) Magazine 1~km 2) Take a short cut. 3) Calculate the number of steps. (Note 5) The T command (R36) is output with a BCD code. In this example, the number of

rotary body index cycles is 1 to 6, and there is no difference between the binary and BCD. Thus, the contents of R36 are used as they are.

The target position and current value (R36 and R512 in this example), which are the data to be compared in the ROT K1 command must be binaries. (In actual use, the contents of R36 are binary converted.)

9. Exclusive Commands

— 215 —

(2) Ring counter (Up/down counter) This command is used to control position of rotary body (or turret).

The ring counter is a binary counter; it is used as an up/down counter of 0 to Km-1 or 1 to Km

according to the parameter rotary body command. Rp (parameter) contents

(Note 1) The ring counter command is executed after setting R numbers to Rn to Rn+1 and

specifying data for the parameter. (Note 2) The error code (Mm) of the ring counter command and the error code in bit F of the

parameter (Rp) are cleared when the activating signal (ACT) goes off. The activating signal (ACT) of the ring counter command is generally pulsed. This makes it hard for the interface diagnostic and ladder monitor programs to detect an error signal. For debugging, therefore, an error hold circuit is provided after the ring count command to ease error detection.

9. Exclusive Commands

— 216 —

9.3 Tool Life Management Exclusive Command (When BASE SPEC parameter #1037 cmdtype is set to 1 or 2.) The following command is provided only for tool life management. (It is used for the machining

centers.) 1. Spare tool selection … TSRH

9.3.1 Tool Life Management System (1) Tool life management I (When BASE SPEC parameter #1096 T-Ltyp is set to 1.) The use time or use count of the spindle tool specified from user PLC (R3720, R3721) is

integrated and the tool use state is monitored. Tool data corresponding to the spindle tool is also output. (R3724~R3735)

(2) Tool life management II (When BASE SPEC parameter #1096 T-Ltyp is set to 2.) Tool life management II is provided by adding the spare tool selection function to tool life

management I. Spare tool is selected among group by the spare tool selection command executed by user PLC during tool command, etc., and the tool data of the spare tool is output.

Tool data corresponding to the spindle tool specified from user PLC is output (R3724~R3735) and tool offset corresponding to the spindle tool is made.

9.3.2 Tool Command System One of the following two can be selected by using a parameter for command tool number (Rm

contents) input to the spare tool selection command in tool life management II: (1) Group number command system (When BASE SPEC parameter #1104 T-Com2 is set to 0.) The command tool number (Rm contents) input to the spare tool selection command is handled

as group number. Spare tool is selected among the tools corresponding to the group number in tool data.

(2) Tool number command system (When BASE SPEC parameter #1104 T-Com2 is set to 1.) The command tool number (Rm contents) input to the spare tool selection command is handled

as a tool number. The group number containing the command tool number is found and spare tool is selected among the group.

9. Exclusive Commands

— 217 —

9.3.3 Spare Tool Selection System One of the following two can be selected by using a parameter for the spare tool selection system of

the spare tool selection command in tool life management II: (1) Selection in tool registration order (When BASE SPEC parameter #1105 T-Sel2 is set to 0.) Spare tool is selected among the used tools of a single group in the registration number order. If

used tools do not exist, spare tool is selected among unused tools in the registration number order. If none of used and unused tools exist, spare tool is selected among normal life tools and abnormal tools (the former is assigned higher priority) in the registration number order.

(2) Life equality selection (When BASE SPEC parameter #1105 T-Sel2 is set to 1.) Tool whose remaining life is the longest is selected among the used and unused tools of a single

group. If more than one tool has the same remaining life, it is selected in the registration number order. If none of used and unused tools exist, spare tool is selected among normal life tools and abnormal tools (the former is assigned higher priority) in the registration number order.

9.3.4 Interface (1) User PLC Controller

Device name Signal name Explanation

Y29A Auxiliary function locking signal

While this signal is input, tool life management is not made.

Y2C8

Tool error 1 signal

This signal indicates tool error state 1. When controller inputs the signal it changes the status in spindle tool data to 3. (Unused tools or used tools are changed to toll error state 1.)

Y2C9

Tool error 2 signal

This signal indicates tool error state 2. When controller inputs the signal, it changes the status in spindle tool data to 4. (Unused tools or used tools are changed to toll error state 2.)

Y2CA Usage data counter validity signal

If this signal is not input, the usage data is not counted.

Y2CB Tool life management input

signal If this signal is input to controller and the tool life management output signal is output to PLC, tool life management is made.

(2) Controller User PLC

Device name Signal name Explanation

X20B Tool life management output signal

The controller outputs this signal to PLC while the tool life management function is selected. (When BASE SPEC parameter #1103 T-Life is set to 1.)

9. Exclusive Commands

— 218 —

9.3.5 User PLC Processing When the Tool Life Management Function Is Selected A PLC processing example when tool change is made by the T command is given below:

START

Does T command exist?

Is life management selected?

Read life management tool data based on the R36 contents by using TSRH command.

Index up magazine according to the R36 contents.

Index magazine according to tool number in the read tool data.

Change tool (mount new tool on spindle) Set the tool number of the tool mounted on the spindle in R3720.

Turn on auxiliary function completion signal.

Error processing

Is tool available?

The control system varies depending on whether or not life management is selected. Life management tool data is read into any desired R register based on T command data (R36) by using life management exclusive command. The tool status and tool number are checked to see if the tool can be used. Desired tool (magazine) is indexed. Desired tool (magazine) is indexed. Set the tool number of the new tool mounted on the spindle in R3720. (4) Seeing a change in the R3720

contents, controller outputs the life management tool data corresponding to the tool number to R3724~R3735 and starts life management at the same time. The completion signal when life management is selected is turned on after the spindle tool number is set in R3720.

(1)

NO YES

NO YES (2)

(3)

NO YES

9. Exclusive Commands

— 219 —

(1) Procedure when tool command is executed (1) Tool life management I 1) When tool command (T command) is given, the controller outputs T code data and start

signal (TF). Note) The T code data (BCD) is binary converted and then used. 2) The user PLC checks the tool command. If life management is required, the user PLC

executes the spare tool selection command. 3) The spare tool selection command outputs the tool data of the tool corresponding to the

specified tool number. 4) The user PLC decides whether or not the tool can be used according to the status in the

output tool data, and selects command tool or performs alarm processing. (Note) If -1 is set in the group number in the output tool data, the tool data is invalid. At

the time, the specified tool number is output to the tool number in the output tool data as it is.

(2) Tool life management II 1) When tool command (T command) is given, the controller outputs T code data and start

signal (TF). Note) The T code data (BCD) is binary converted and then used. 2) The user PLC checks the tool command. If life management is required, the user PLC

executes the spare tool selection command. 3) The spare tool selection command selects the spare tool corresponding to the specified

number (group number, tool number) and outputs the tool data of the spare tool. 4) The user PLC decides whether or not the tool can be used according to the status in the

output tool data, and selects command tool or performs alarm processing. (Note) If -1 is set in the group number in the output tool data, the tool data is invalid. At

the time, the specified tool number is output to the tool number in the output tool data as it is.

(2) Procedure when spindle tool is changed 1) When spindle tool is changed during the spindle tool change command (M06), etc., the user

PLC specifies the tool number of the spindle tool (R3720~R3721). The controller outputs the spindle tool data corresponding to the tool number of the spindle

tool every user PLC main cycle (R3724~R3735). 2) The controller integrates the use time or use count of the spindle tool based on the spindle

tool data in the tool data file. In tool life management II, it also executes tool offset corresponding to the spindle tool. (Note) If -1 is set in the group number in the output spindle tool data, the spindle tool data is

invalid. At the time, the specified tool number (R3720~R3721) is output to the tool number in the output spindle tool data as it is. The controller does not integrate the usage time or usage count of the spindle tool or make tool offset.

In tool life management I, tool number is only specified and spare tool is selected.

Tool data (Rn)

Tool command (Rm) (Tool number, group number)

Spare tool selection function command

Tool is selected according to tool number in tool data. (User PLC)

9. Exclusive Commands

— 220 —

When tool is changed, the spindle tool number is set in R3720, R3721. (User PLC)

When the spindle tool number changes, the controller assumes that the spindle tool is changed, and searches the tool data file for the tool data of the new tool. The controller executes life management and tool offset based on the tool data. It also outputs the tool data to R3724~R3735 every user PLC main cycle.

Spindle tool number

(R3720-R3721)

Standby tool number

(R3722-R3723)

Spindle tool data

(R3724-R3735)

NC Tool data file

(Controller internal data)

9. Exclusive Commands

— 221 —

(3) Tool data flow

9. Exclusive Commands

— 222 —

(4) Tool data The tool data is tool management data such as the group number, tool number, and tool status.

The details are given below:

Tool data name

Explanation Data range

Group number Number to manage tools of the same type (form and dimensions) in a group. The tools assigned the same group number are assumed to be spare tools.

1 — 99999999

Tool number Number unique to each tool actually output during tool command execution

1 — 99999999

Tool data flag Parameter of use data count system, length compensation system, radius compensation system, etc.

Tool status The tool state is indicated. 0 — FF (H) Auxiliary data Reserved data 0 — 65535 Tool life data Life time or life count for each tool.

(If 0 is set, infinity is assumed to be specified.)

0 — 4000 (minutes) 0 — 9999 (times)

Tool use data Use time or use count for each tool. 0 — 4000 (minutes) 0 — 9999 (times)

Tool length compensation data

Length compensation data set in any format of compensation number, direct offset amount, and addition offset amount.

Compensation numbers 1 — 400 Direct offset amount 99999.999 Addition offset amount 99999.999

Tool radius compensation data

Radius compensation data set in any format of compensation number, direct offset amount, and addition offset amount.

Compensation numbers 1 — 400 Direct offset amount 99999.999 Addition offset amount 99999.999

9. Exclusive Commands

— 223 —

(5) Tool data flag and tool status The tool data flag and tool status contents are shown below: 1) Correspondence with tool life management data screen

2) Tool data flag ….. Bits 0~7 of file register Rn (such as R3728)

bit Explanation bit 0 bit 1

Length compensation data format 0: Compensation number (spare tool compensation system) 1: Addition offset

2: Direct offset amount bit 2 bit 3

Radius compensation data format 0: Compensation number (spare tool compensation system) 1: Addition offset

2: Direct offset amount bit 4 bit 5

Usage data count system 0: Usage time (minutes) 1: Number of times tool

has been mounted 2: Number of cutting

times bit 6 bit 7

9. Exclusive Commands

— 224 —

1) Spare tool compensation system Tool compensation corresponding to the spindle tool can be made in tool life

management II. One of the following three types of length and compensation can be selected by setting

tool data: a) Compensation umber system (0 is set on the tool data registration screen.) Compensation data in tool data is handled as the compensation number. It is

replaced with the compensation number given in a work program and compensation is executed.

b) Addition compensation system (1 is set on the tool data registration screen.) Compensation data in tool data is handled as addition offset amount. It is added to the

offset amount indicated by the compensation number given in a work program and compensation is executed.

c) Direct compensation system (2 is set on the tool data registration screen.) Compensation data in tool data is handled as direct offset amount. It is replaced with

the offset amount indicated by the compensation number given in a work program and compensation is executed.

2) Usage data count system a) Usage time count For usage data, the execution time of cutting feed (such as G01, G02, or G03) is

counted in 3.75-s units. However, the life data and usage data are displayed in minute units on the tool data registration screen.

b) Number of times tool has been mounted is counted When tool is used as spindle tool in tool change, etc., usage data is counted. However,

if cutting feed (G01, G02, or G03) is not executed after tool is used as spindle tool, usage data is not counted.

c) Number of cutting times is counted Usage data is counted when a change is made from rapid traverse feed (such as

G00) command to cutting feed (such as G01, G02, or G03) command as shown below. However rapid traverse or cutting feed command with no movement becomes invalid.

Even if a command other than the rapid traverse command appears between cutting feed commands, usage data is not counted.

Caution: When none of the tool life management input signal and use data count validity signal are input

or during machine lock, auxiliary function lock, dry run, or single block, usage data is not counted.

The usage data is not counted when the life data is 0. Life management is executed even in the MDI operation mode. The usage data is not counted even when the status is 2 or more (normal life, error tool 1,

error tool 2).

9. Exclusive Commands

— 225 —

3) Tool status ….. Bits 8~F of file register Rn (such as R3728)

bit Explanation

bit 8

bit 9

bit A

bit B

Tool status (numeric data 0~4) 0: Unused tool 1: Used tool 2: Normal life tool 3: Tool error 1 tool 4: Tool error 2 tool

bit C bit D bit E bit F

(Reserved)

4) Tool status contents When the tool status number is 0 or 1, NC assumes the tool to be available.

Tool status number Explanation

0

Indicates unused tool. Normally, this state is set when tool is replaced with a new tool.

1 Indicates used tool. When actual cutting is started, this state is set.

2 Indicates normal life tool. When use data exceeds life data, this state is set.

3

Indicates tool error 1 tool. When controller inputs the tool error 1 signal, this state is set.

4 Indicates tool error 2 tool. When controller inputs the tool error 2 signal, this state is set.

9. Exclusive Commands

— 226 —

9.3.6 Examples of Tool Life Management Screen Tool life management screen examples are given below. For operation, refer to the Operation Manual.

Tool life management screen example on 9-inch CRT setting and display unit

9. Exclusive Commands

— 227 —

9.4 DDB (Direct Data Bus) … Asynchronous DDB The DDB function is used for PLC to directly read/write various pieces of data that controller has. PLC

can read specified data into buffer or write specified data into controller by storing necessary information for read/write and calling the DDB function. Generally, data is read or written for each data piece; data concerning the control axes is processed in batch as many as the specified number of axes.

9.4.1 Basic Format of Command

(Note 1) File registers (Rn) and data registers (Dn) to which the user is accessible can be used as

the asynchronous DDB control data buffer. The file registers (R) to which the user is accessible are R500 through R549 (not backed up) and R1900 through R2799 (backed up).

9.4.2 Basic Format of Control Data

9. Exclusive Commands

— 228 —

(1) Control signals (Rn), (Dn)

(2) Large section number (Rn+1), (Dn+1) Specify the large section number of the data to be read/written in binary form. (3) Sub-section number (Rn+2, Rn+3), (Dn+2, Dn+3)

(LOW) (HIGH) (LOW) (HIGH) Specify the sub-section number of the data to be read/written in binary form. (4) Data size (Rn+4), (Dn+4) Specify the size of the data to be read/written in binary form. 1: One byte 2: Two bytes 4: Four bytes If any value other than 1, 2, or 4 is specified, the invalid data size alarm will occur. (5) Read/write specifications axis (Rn+5), (Dn+5) Specify the axis to read or write data for each axis classified by major classification numbers.

If axis specification is not made or exceeds the maximum control axis when axis data is read or

written, the invalid axis number alarm will occur.

9. Exclusive Commands

— 229 —

(6) Read/write data (Rn+6, Rn+7), (Dn+6, Dn+7) (LOW) (HIGH) (LOW) (HIGH)

When data is read, the controller outputs data specified by PLC. When data is written, PLC sets the data to be written.

The effective portion of data varies depending on the data size. (Hatched portion) When read is specified the sign of 1-byte or 2-byte is extended to four bytes. The main data that can be referenced by using the DDB function is listed below. Specification item

Contents Read Write Remarks

Asynchronous Current position in work coordinate, machine coordinate system, length, radius offset amount

Parameters Maximum rotation speed of spindle, second, third, and fourth reference position coordinates, stroke stored limit, coordinate system offset, etc.

User macro variables Modal data of G code, etc. Controller alarm number Compensation function

External work coordinate system input, external tool compensation input

Synchronous External search PLC axis control, etc.

Caution: The DDBA command is issued after setting necessary data such as control signal and large and

sub-classification numbers to the buffer (Rn or Dn). A read or write of the control signal is specified only once before execution of the DDBA command to prevent error codes stored in high-order bits by the CNC from being erased.

9. Exclusive Commands

— 230 —

9.5 External Search 9.5.1 Function When PLC specifies the program number, sequence number, and block number of a work program

for the controller, the external search function searches memory or tape for the program number, sequence number, and block number.

9.5.2 Interface PLC sets data except the status.

(Note 1) File register (Rn) that can be used by the user is used for the control data buffer. Data register (Dn) cannot be used.

(Note 2) System designation is used for 2-system specifications.

(1) Command

(Note) Unassigned bits will be used for later function extension. Use only bits shown here.

9. Exclusive Commands

— 231 —

(2) Status The search state is indicated. The status is set by the controller and is used by PLC for completion check, etc.

The status is cleared by the controller when the search start instruction execution condition is off. (3) Program number Specify the program number to be searched in binary form in the range of 1 to 99999999 (eight

digits). Specify 0 to search for the sequence number of the current program selected. If a number other than 0~99999999 is specified, a data specification error will occur. (4) Sequence number Specify the sequence number to be searched in binary form in the range of 1 to 99999 (five

digits). Specify 0 to search for the head of the specified program number. If a number other than 0~99999 is specified, a data specification error will occur. (5) Block number Specify the block number to be searched in binary form in the range of 0 to 99 (two digits). If a number other than 0~99 is specified, a data specified error will occur.

Program No. Sequence No. Search Specified Specified Memory or tape is searched for the specified sequence

number of the specified program. Specified Not specified (=0) Memory or tape is searched for the top of the specified

program. Not specified (=0) Specified Memory or tape is searched for the specified sequence

number of the current program selected. Not specified (=0) Not specified (=0) Error (no specification)

(6) System specification Specify the system to be searched. If no system specification is made, only the first system is

searched.

9. Exclusive Commands

— 232 —

9.5.3 Search Start Instruction After interface data between the controller and PLC is prepared, search is started by using the

following instruction:

9.5.4 Timing Charts and Error Causes (1) Normal completion

(2) Search error completion

9. Exclusive Commands

— 233 —

(3) Search error completion (Data specification error)

9. Exclusive Commands

— 234 —

9.5.5 Sequence Program Example

RST: Reset signal (reset button, output during reset, etc.)

10. PLC Help Function

— 235 —

10. PLC Help Function To help the user PLC, an exclusive interface is provided between the user PLC and controller or

PLC basic. The function and interface are explained below. PLC help function examples: Alarm message display Operator message display PLC switches Key operation by user PLC Load meter display External machine coordinate system compensation User PLC version display

10. PLC Help Function

— 236 —

10.1 Alarm Message Display The contents of an alarm that occurred during sequence (user PLC) processing can be displayed

on the CRT setting and display unit. Up to four alarm messages can be displayed at a time on the alarm diagnosis screen. The

maximum length of a message is 32 characters. 10.1.1 Interface The alarm message display interface is available in the two types: F type in which temporary

memory F is used for message display request and R type in which file register (R) is used for message display request. Either type is selected by using a parameter.

(1) F type interface This interface applies to 128 points of temporary memory F0~F127. If temporary memory F is used as the alarm interface, do not use it for another purpose.

The highest priority is assigned to the F0 signal. The message corresponding to Fn set to 1 is

fetched from the message table and displayed in order starting at F0. If no messages are prepared or Fm greater than the number of prepared messages is set to 1, the message «USER PC ERROR m» is displayed.

(2) R type interface This interface applies to file registers R158~R161. The numeric value (binary) contained in

each of the R registers indicates the position of the message to be displayed in the message table.

The message is cleared by setting the R register to 0.

10. PLC Help Function

— 237 —

The messages are displayed starting at the message corresponding to R158 from top to bottom.

Since message display is cleared by setting the R register to 0, number 0 in the table message cannot be used in the R mode.

If greater value than the number of prepared messages, m is set in the R register, the message «USER PC ERROR m» is displayed.

(3) Alarm classification display Classification number can be displayed following the message to be displayed regardless of

the F or R type. (Dn1~Dn4 in the figure) For example, one typical alarm message is prepared and classification number can be used to

indicate the alarm source or cause.

Example) When spindle alarm occurs, the message «SPINDLE ALARM» is displayed and the alarm source or cause is indicated by the classification number.

For the classification number, the contents of each data register specified in alarm message preparation are displayed. Data register D0 cannot be specified.

(Note 1) The display of the classification number by cause is updated when an alarm message display changes. It is not updated if only the contents of the specified data register (Dn1 to Dn4) change. If the contents of the specified data register are 0, no classification numbers are displayed.

Display example of 9-inch CRT setting and display unit

10.1.2 Message Creation Create messages by using PLC development software. Set the length of a message and the number of messages to be prepared, then enter message data

through the keyboard. The maximum length of an alarm message is 32 characters (even numbers). A maximum of 256 alarm messages can be prepared. However, the number of alarm messages

may be limited depending on the available memory capacity. For details, refer to the PLC Development Manual (Personal Computer Section).

SPINDLE ALARM 5

This varies depending on the alarm cause or source.

(Note 1)

10. PLC Help Function

— 238 —

10.1.3 F or R Type Selection Parameter Set the parameter on the machine manufacturer parameter bit selection screen. # (6450) Data ( 0 0 0 0 0 0 * 1 ) (Reference) #6450 corresponds to the high-order byte of file register R2924.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Alarm message valid.

0: F mode 1: R mode

Use number 6450.

10. PLC Help Function

— 239 —

10.2 Operator Message Display When a condition to inform the operator of a message occurs, an operator message can be

displayed independently of an alarm message. A maximum of 60 characters can be displayed for the operator message on the alarm diagnosis

screen. One operator message can be displayed at a time. 10.2.1 Interface An operator message is displayed by setting the number of the operator message table to be

displayed in file register R162. It is cleared by setting R162 to 0. Thus, number 0 of the operator message table cannot be displayed.

Display example of 9-inch CRT setting and display unit

As with alarm messages, the contents of the data register specified for the class number display in

operator message preparation are also displayed.

(Note 1) The class number display is updated when the contents of file register R162 change. It is not updated if only the contents of the specified data register (Dn) change.

To change the class number display only, the contents of R162 must be cleared to 0. If the contents of the specified data register are 0, no class numbers are displayed.

10. PLC Help Function

— 240 —

10.2.2 Operator Message Preparation Create messages by using PLC development software. On M-FAS, set the length of a message and the number of messages to be prepared, then prepare

message data. The maximum length of an operator message is 60 characters (even numbers). A maximum of 256

operator messages can be prepared. However, the number of operator messages may be limited depending on the available memory capacity. For details, refer to the PLC Development Manual (Personal Computer Section).

10.2.3 Operator Message Display Validity Parameter The parameter is set on the machine manufacturer parameter bit selection screen. # (6450) Data ( 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 ) (Reference) #6450 corresponds to the high-order byte of file register R2924.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Operator message display valid. Use number 6450.

10. PLC Help Function

— 241 —

10.3 PLC Switches Similar function to machine operation switches can be provided by using the controller CRT setting

and display unit. The number of switch points is 32. The switch names can be given as desired. 10.3.1 Explanation of CRT Screen The CRT screen is explained below.

PARAMETER SCREEN PLC SWITCH (MENU)

10. PLC Help Function

— 242 —

10.3.2 Explanation of Operation To turn on or off a switch, set the number of the switch to be turned on or off in the parentheses of

setting part # ( ) and press the INPUT CALC key.

Depending on the state of the switch, its input device X is turned on (off) and accordingly the switch mark indicates the on (off) state.

The switch can be turned off (on) the same way. Special relay E can reverse the switch on/off states. When special relay E is activated, the on/off

state of the corresponding switch and device X is reversed. To display the switch validity state, etc., the switch name can be highlighted. To do this, turn on or

off output device Y corresponding to the switch name. The corresponding table of the switch numbers, input device X, output device Y, and special relay E

is listed below:

Corresponding device

Corresponding device Switch

No. X Y E

Switch No.

E Y E #1 X140 Y160 E80 #17 X150 Y170 E96 #2 X141 Y161 E81 #18 X151 Y171 E97 #3 X142 Y162 E82 #19 X152 Y172 E98 #4 X143 Y163 E83 #20 X153 Y173 E99 #5 X144 Y164 E84 #21 X154 Y174 E100 #6 X145 Y165 E85 #22 X155 Y175 E101 #7 X146 Y166 E86 #23 X156 Y176 E102 #8 X147 Y167 E87 #24 X157 Y177 E103 #9 X148 Y168 E88 #25 X158 Y178 E104 #10 X149 Y169 E89 #26 X159 Y179 E105 #11 X14A Y16A E90 #27 X15A Y17A E106 #12 X14B Y16B E91 #28 X15B Y17B E107 #13 X14C Y16C E92 #29 X15C Y17C E108 #14 X14D Y16D E93 #30 X15D Y17D E109 #15 X14E Y16E E94 #31 X15E Y17E E110 #16 X14F Y16F E95 #32 X15F Y17F E111 (Note 1) Input device X also holds the state if power is

turned off.

10. PLC Help Function

— 243 —

The table below shows the message displayed during operation on the PLC switch screen.

No. Message Explanation Remedy E01

SETTING ERROR

A number outside the allowable setting range from 1 to 32 is specified in # ( ).

Specify a valid number within the range.

10.3.3 Signal Processing

When setting is done on the PLC switch screen, the input device X corresponding to the

specified switch number is turned on or off to switch over the switch state. When special relay E is turned on from the user PLC, its corresponding input device X and the

switch state are reversed. Special relay E is reset immediately after the CNC reverses the input device X and the switch state. It is turned on by one pulse (scan) only also in the user PLC. In either case, when output device Y is set to on based on the input device X state, the corresponding switch name is highlighted.

10. PLC Help Function

— 244 —

The following shows an example of operation of special relay E from the user PLC. (1) Two-point switch

(Example) When two opposite switches, chip conveyer manual and chip conveyer automatic, are provided;

1) When switch 15 (X14E) is on and switch 16 (X14F) is off, Y16E and M1 turn on. [Initial state]

2) When switch 16 (X14F) turns on

while being in state 1), Y16E turns off, E94 turns on, and M1 turns off.

3) Turning E94 on reverses X14E (to

off). 4) When X14E is off and X14F is on,

E94 turns off and Y16F and M2 turn on.

5) When switch 15 (X14E) turns on

while being in state 4), Y16F turns off, E95 turns on, and M2 turns off.

6) Turning E95 on reverses X14F (to

off). 7) When X14F is off and X14E is on,

E95 turns off and Y16E and M1 turn on again.

10. PLC Help Function

— 245 —

(2) Three-point switch

(Example) When three opposite switches 17, 18, and 19 are provided;

10. PLC Help Function

— 246 —

(3) External switch and PLC switch

(Example 1) When an external optional stop switch (X14) is provided;

Under sequence control in the above example, the switch marks on the PLC switch screen can

be operated from both external and PLC switches. (Example 2) When an external switch (XC) that inhibits a PLC switch handle interrupt is

provided;

Under sequence control in the above example, when the external switch (XC) is on, the PLC

switch for a handle interrupt cannot be turned on.

10. PLC Help Function

— 247 —

10.3.4 Switch Name Preparation Prepare PLC switch names by using PLC development software. Alphanumeric, kana, katakana, and Kanji characters can be used for the switch name. For details,

refer to the PLC Development Manual (Personal Computer Section).

10. PLC Help Function

— 248 —

10.4 Key Operation by User PLC (This cannot be used with the MELDASMAGIC 64 Series.)

The same operation as if the operator performed key operation can be performed by operating key

data by user PLC. 10.4.1 Key Data Flow

1) Key data is set in file registers R16 and R112 at the top of the user PLC main. 2) The user PLC refers to the key data and performs necessary processing. 3) The user PLC sets the key data matching the operation board being used in R112. 4) After user PLC main processing is performed, controller performs valid key data processing

according to the R16 and R112 contents. 10.4.2 Key Operations That Can Be Performed 1) When a key is pressed, it is ignored. The R16 contents are judged and NULL (00H) code is set in R112. 2) When R16 is NULL, that is, key operation is not performed, user PLC performs key operation

conforming to the operator. Key data matching the target operation is set in R112.

10. PLC Help Function

— 249 —

10.4.3 Key Data Processing Timing Key data is processed at the timing shown below. Set data in R112 only when it is necessary. Normal key operation by the operator is made

impossible.

Example)

10. PLC Help Function

— 250 —

10.4.4 Layout of Keys on Communication Terminal There are two types of layouts for the keys on the communication terminal used with this controller

as shown below. The layouts of the alphabetic keys differ.

(1) Key layout for communication terminal CT100 (This also applies to the separated type FCUA-CR10+KB10)

MITSUBISHI READY

MONI- TOR

TOOL PARAM

EDIT MDI

DIAGN IN/OUT

SFG F0

O A

N B

G C

X U

Y V

Z W

F E

D L

H I

P

Q J

R K

M (

S )

T [

?

7 8 9

4 5 6

1 2 3

0 SP

DELETE INS

CB CAN

SHIFT

INPUT CALC

RESET

— +

. ,

EOB ]

= #

/ *

READY LED Alphabetic character, numerical character, and symbol keys Setting keys Function selection keys

CRT/EL display

Page keys

Menu keys Reset key Cursor keys Data correction keys

Input key (calculation) Shift key

(2) Key layout for communication terminal CT120

MITSUBISHI READY

MONI- TOR

TOOL PARAM

EDIT MDI

DIAGN IN/OUT

SFG F0

O A

N B

G C

X U

Y V

Z W

F E

D L

H I

P

Q J

R K

M (

S )

T [

?

7 8 9

4 5 6

1 2 3

0 SP

DELETE INS

CB CAN

SHIFT

INPUT CALC

RESET

— +

. ,

EOB ]

= #

/ *

(Note 1) When inputting an alphabet or symbol on the lower right of the alphabet or symbol keys, press SHIFT , and then press the corresponding key.

(Example) When SHIFT O A are pressed, «A» will be input.

CRT display

10. PLC Help Function

— 251 —

10.4.5 List of Key Codes (1) For communication terminal CT100, KB10 (M series)

Key symbol Code (HEX) Key symbol Code

(HEX) Key symbol Code (HEX) Key symbol Code

(HEX) MONITOR 80 ( ) 0B(F8) (+) 2D(2B) O (A) 4F(41)

TOOL/PARAM 81 ( ) 0A(F7) (, ) 2E(2C) N (B) 4E(42)

EDIT/MDI 83 ( ) 08 (F5) EOB ( ] ) 3B (5D) G (C) 47 (43)

DIAGN IN/OUT 85 ( ) 09(F6) = (#) 3D(23) X (U) 58(55)

SFG 86 DELETE (INS) 7F(8C) / (*) 2F(2A) Y (V) 59(56)

F0 87 C.B.(CAN) 8E(18) Z (W) 5A(57)

SHIFT 88 0 (SP) 30(20) F (E) 46(45)

INPUT(CALC) 0D(F4) 1 31 D (L) 44(4C)

2 32 H ( ! ) 48(21)

3 33 P ( I ) 50 (49)

Previous page 90 Window key (?HELP) 89(F9) 4 34 Q (J) 51(4A)

Next page 9A Activ Wind (CTRL) 8A(8B) 5 35 R (K) 52(4B)

Menu 1 91 6 36 M ( ( ) 4D(28)

Menu 2 92 7 37 S ( ) ) 53(29)

Menu 3 93 8 38 T ( [ ) 54(5B)

Menu 4 94 9 ($) 39(24)

Menu 5 95

* The key signals and codes shown in parentheses are the shift IN side key signals. Shift is canceled by pressing another key after pressing the shift key, or by pressing the shift key

again. Example 1) SHIFT N

B 0 SP Key pressed

88 42 30 Code generated Example 2) SHIFT SHIFT 0

SP Key pressed 88 88 30 Code generated

10. PLC Help Function

— 252 —

(2) For communication terminal CT120 (L series)

Key symbol Code (HEX) Key symbol Code

(HEX) Key symbol Code (HEX) Key symbol Code

(HEX) MONITOR 80 ( ) 0B(F8) (+) 2D(2B) O (A) 4F(41)

TOOL/PARAM 81 ( ) 0A(F7) (, ) 2E(2C) N (B) 4E(42)

EDIT/MDI 83 ( ) 08 (F5) EOB ( ] ) 3B (5D) G (C) 47 (43)

DIAGN IN/OUT 85 ( ) 09(F6) = (#) 3D(23) X (U) 58(59)

SFG 86 DELETE (INS) 7F(8C) / (*) 2F(2A) Z (H) 5A(48)

F0 87 C.B.(CAN) 8E(18) F (E) 46(45)

SHIFT 88 0 (SP) 30(20) U (V) 55(56)

INPUT(CALC) 0D(F4) 1 31 W (P) 57(50)

2 32 M (Q) 4D(51)

3 33 I (J) 49 (4A)

Previous page 90 Window key (?HELP) 89(F9) 4 34 K (L) 4B(4C)

Next page 9A Activ Wind (CTRL) 8A(8B) 5 35 S ( ! ) 53(21)

Menu 1 91 6 36 R ( ( ) 52(28)

Menu 2 92 7 37 D ( ) ) 44(29)

Menu 3 93 8 38 T ( [ ) 54(5B)

Menu 4 94 9 ($) 39(24)

Menu 5 95

* The key signals and codes shown in parentheses are the shift IN side key signals. Shift is canceled by pressing another key after pressing the shift key, or by pressing the shift key

again. Example 1) SHIFT N

B 0 SP Key pressed

88 42 30 Code generated Example 2) SHIFT SHIFT 0

SP Key pressed 88 88 30 Code generated

10. PLC Help Function

— 253 —

10.5 Load Meter Display The load meter can be displayed by setting a value in the designated file register (R) with the ladder

program. The spindle load, Z axis load, etc. characters and scale are created with comments in the PLC development software message function.

10.5.1 Interface

10. PLC Help Function

— 254 —

File register (R) for load meter display

For $1 For $2 Numerical display R152 R352

Load meter 1 Bar graph display R153 R353 Numerical display R154 R354

Load meter 2 Bar graph display R155 R355

(Note 1) Use $1 for models not having a system.

Display example of 9-inch CRT setting and display unit (Note: This screen consists of 80 characters wide x 18 lines long.)

10. PLC Help Function

— 255 —

10.6 External Machine Coordinate System Compensation External machine coordinate system compensation is executed by setting compensation data

(absolute amount) in the PLC file register (R) for each axis. Thus, the compensation timing is when PLC rewrites file register (R) compensation data. Necessary

condition, timing, etc., are set by user PLC. The interface between user PLC and CNC is shown below.

File register Contents File

register Contents

R560 $1 Compensation data for the first axis

R568 $2 Compensation data for the first axis

R561 $1 Compensation data for the second axis

R569 $2 Compensation data for the second axis

R562 $1 Compensation data for the third axis

R570

R563 $1 Compensation data for the fourth axis

R571

R564 R572

R565 R573

R566 R574

R567 R575

(Note 1) Use $1 for models not having a system.

Data in file registers R560~R575 is not backed up. If it must be backed up, use back-up file

registers (R1900~R2799).

(Note 1) The maximum delay to compensation is (one user PLC scan + 15ms). However, smoothing time constant and servo follow delay are not contained.

10. PLC Help Function

— 256 —

10.7 User PLC Version Display The user PLC version can be displayed together with the controller software version on the

DIAGN/IN/OUT menu changeover configuration (menu) screen of the setting and display unit (communication terminal).

(Note) The user PLC must be controlled by the user. 10.7.1 Interface Data corresponding to the characters to be displayed on the corresponding file register (R) is set. (1) To display a 2-digit version code

Program example)

10. PLC Help Function

— 257 —

(2) To display a 3-digit version code

Program example)

11. PLC Axis Control

— 258 —

11. PLC Axis Control 11.1 Outline

This function allows an independent axis to be controlled with commands from the PLC, separately from the NC control axis.

11.2 Specifications 11.2.1 Basic Specifications

Item Details No. of control axes Max. 2 axes Simultaneous control axes

The PLC control axis is controlled independently of the NC control axis. Simultaneous start of multiple PLC axes is possible.

Command unit Min. command unit 0.001mm (0.0001 inch) 0.0001mm (0.00001 inch) (Same command unit as the NC control axis.)

Feedrate (Min. command unit 0.001mm) Rapid traverse 0 to 240000 mm/min. (0 to 24000 inch/min.) Cutting feed 0 to 240000 mm/min. (0 to 24000 inch/min.) (Min. command unit 0.0001mm) Rapid traverse 0 to 24000 mm/min. (0 to 2400 inch/min.) Cutting feed 0 to 24000 mm/min. (0 to 2400 inch/min.)

Movement commands Incremental value commands from the current position. Absolute value commands of the machine coordinate system. 0~99999999 (0.001mm/0.0001inch)

Operation modes Rapid traverse, cutting feed Jog feed (+), (-) Reference point return feed (+), (-) Handle feed

Acceleration/ deceleration

Rapid traverse, Jog feed Reference point return feed Exponential function acceleration/ exponential function deceleration Handle feed } Step

Backlash compensation Provided

Stroke end Not provided Soft limit Provided Rotation axis commands

Provided Absolute value commands Rotation amount within one rotation. (Rotates the remainder divided by 360.) Incremental commandsRotates the commanded rotation amount.

Inch/mm changeover Not provided Command to match the feedback unit.

Position detector Encoder (absolute position detection also possible)

Linear acceleration/linear deceleration

Cutting feed

11. PLC Axis Control

— 259 —

11.2.2 Other Restrictions

(1) There is no mirror image, external deceleration or machine lock function. (2) Rapid feed override, cutting override and dry run control are not possible. (3) Automatic operation start, automatic operation stop, reset and interlock NC controls are invalid for

PLC control axes. The same control can be realized using an interface dedicated for PLC control axes. (4) There is no dedicated emergency switch. The emergency stop is valid in the same manner as the

NC control axis.

11. PLC Axis Control

— 260 —

11.3 PLC Interface

The interface between the PLC and NC is carried out by setting the control information data in the R-register (*Note 1) with the PLC, and calling the DDBS function.

11.3.1 DDBS Function Command

When ACT is set to 1, the PLC axis control process is carried out with the control information data contents. Thus, ACT should be set to 1 during PLC axis control. Setting ACT to 0 causes a reset status. (Note 1) The following R-registers can be used. R500 to R549 (No battery backup) R1900 to R2799 (Battery backup)

*Note 1 ACT

DDBS Rn

11. PLC Axis Control

— 261 —

11.3.2 Control Information Data

Set the control information data in the R-register before calling the DDBS function command. The following is a list of control information data.

2 bytes Command 2 bytes Status 2 bytes Alarm details 2 bytes Control signal 2 bytes Axis designation 2 bytes Operation mode

4 bytes

Feedrate

4 bytes

Movement data

4 bytes

Machine position

4 bytes

Remaining distance

A max. of 2 axes can be controlled by the PLC. Each axis should have its own control information data.

Rn + 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

PLC CNC

CNC PLC

PLC CNC

CNC PLC

Rn2 + 0 Rn1 + 0 1st axis control information data

2nd axis control information data

11. PLC Axis Control

— 262 —

11.3.3 Control Information Data Details 11.3.3.1 Commands

Commands consist of main commands and sub-commands.

F 8 7 0 Rn + 0 Sub-commands Main commands

Main commands: The types of DBBS main commands are as follows.

1: Search 2: PLC axis control

Sub-commands: The PLC axis control sub-command is as follows.

0: Movement data output and control signal output

(Note 1) «Input» and «output» are the input/output looking from the PLC side.

11. PLC Axis Control

— 263 —

11.3.3.2 Status

The status is set by the NC to indicate the execution status of this function command and the status of the axis being controlled.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Rn + 1 bit 0: busy Command processing bit 8 : oper Option error 1: den Axis movement completed 9 : 2: move Axis moving A: 3: SA Servo ready B: 4: svon Servo ON C: 5: ZP Reference point reached D: 6: E: ALM2 Axis in control alarm 7: WAIT Axis movement wait F: ALM1 Control information data designation alarm

bit 0: busy Command processing This turns ON when the command is being processed. The next command is not received while this bit is ON. The next command to be issued is received while this bit is OFF.

bit 1: den Axis movement completed

This bit turns ON when the initialization and commanded movement are completed. This bit stays OFF during movement, even when an interlock is applied. This bit turns ON at reset or servo OFF, or when ACT = 0.

bit 2: move Axis moving

This bit turns ON when the machine is moving, and turns OFF when the machine is stopped. bit 3: SA Servo ready

This bit turns ON when the servo is ready. It turns OFF during emergency stops and servo alarms.

bit 4: svon Servo ON

This bit turns OFF when a servo OFF signal is output. It also turns OFF during emergency stops and servo alarms. Machine movement is possible when this signal is ON.

bit5: ZP Reference point reached

This bit turns ON when the reference point is reached after completion of a reference point return. It turns OFF when the machine moves.

bit7: WAIT Axis movement wait

This bit turns ON in the buffering mode when the axis movement of the previous block has been completed, and the machine is in a WAIT 5 status. It turns OFF when the previous block movement is completed and the movement of the next block begins.

11. PLC Axis Control

— 264 —

bit 8: oper Option error This bit turns ON when an attempt is made to execute PLC axis control when there is no PLC axis control option.

bit E: ALM2 Axis in control alarm

This bit turns ON when an alarm occurs (such as a servo alarm) during execution of axis control. Axis control cannot be executed while this bit is ON. After the cause of the alarm has been removed, turn the bit OFF by outputting a reset signal, setting ACT to 0, or turning the power OFF then ON again. (Note) When alarms occur during axis control, the same alarms appear in the CRT screen as

for NC control axes. Set the PLC 1st axis to «1», and the PLC 2nd axis to «2». Example: When a servo alarm occurs for the PLC 1st axis S03 Servo alarm 52 1 bit F: ALM:1 Control information data designation alarm

This bit turns ON when the designated details of the control information data are illegal. Thus, the PLC axis control process is not executed. Turn the bit OFF by correcting the data, outputting a reset signal, or setting ACT to 0.

PLC axis

11. PLC Axis Control

— 265 —

Timing chart (1) For rapid traverse and cutting feed mode

ACT

Start

busy den

move

Speed

(2) For jog feed mode

ACT

Start

busy den

move

Speed

(Note) The axis moves by jog feed only during start ON.

11. PLC Axis Control

— 266 —

(3) For reference point return feed mode (3-1) Dog-type reference point return

ACT

Start

busy den

move

ZP

Speed (G1 mode)

(Note 1) The axis moves by reference point return feed only during start ON. Turn the start OFF

after confirming that the reference point has been reached. (Note 2) The first reference point return after the power is turned ON is always dog-type. All returns

after that are high-speed reference point returns. (3-2) High-speed reference point return

ACT

Start

busy den

move

ZP

Speed (G1 mode)

11. PLC Axis Control

— 267 —

(4) For handle feed mode

ACT

Start

busy den

move

Handle

Speed

(Note) Handle feed is possible only during start ON.

11. PLC Axis Control

— 268 —

(5) When the interlock signal is ON (= 1)

ACT

Start

Interlock

busy den

move

Speed

(6) When the reset signal is ON (= 1)

ACT

Start

Reset

busy den

move

Speed

11. PLC Axis Control

— 269 —

(7) When the servo OFF signal is ON (= 1)

ACT

Start

Servo OFF

busy den

move svon

Speed

(8) When the ACT signal is OFF (= 0)

ACT

Start

busy den

move

Speed

11. PLC Axis Control

— 270 —

11.3.3.3 Alarm No.

The alarm Nos. of status ALM1 and ALM2 are set.

F 8 7 0 ALM1 Alarm No. ALM2 Alarm No.

The details of each alarm No. are shown below. (1) ALM1 (Control information data designation alarm)

Alarm No. Details

01 Control signal illegal (A signal other than a registered control signal has been commanded.)

02 Axis No. illegal

03 Operation mode illegal (0 to 6)

04 Movement data range exceeded -99999999 to +99999999

05

06

10 Zero point return not complete (absolute value command not possible)

11

12

(2) ALM2 (Axis in control alarm)

Alarm No. Details

0 Servo alarm (Alarm No. is displayed in the PLC axis monitor screen. Refer to the Drive Unit Maintenance Manual for details.)

1 Z-phase not passed

2 Soft limit (+)

3 Soft limit (-)

11. PLC Axis Control

— 271 —

11.3.3.4 Control Signals (PLC axis control information data)

Control signals such as start, interlock, reset, axis removal and axis removal 2 are designated for the PLC axis.

F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Rn + 3 bit 0: Start bit 8 : Absolute value command 1: Interlock 9: 2: Reset A: 3: Servo OFF B: 4: Axis removal C: 5: Axis removal 2 D: 6: E: 7: F:

bit 0: Start Starting begins at the at the rising edge (OFF -> ON) of the start signal, based on the control information data. The axis does not move during interlock, servo OFF, axis removal and axis removal 2. Movement starts after interlock, servo OFF, axis removal and axis removal 2 are canceled. Start is invalid during resetting.

bit 1: Interlock

The moving PLC axis executes a deceleration stop when the interlock signal turns ON. The stopped PLC axis will resume movement when the interlock signal turns OFF (is canceled).

bit 2: Reset

The PLC axis is reset when the reset signal turns ON. Moving PLC axes will execute a deceleration stop. Commands and controls are invalid during resetting. If the reset signal turns ON during an alarm occurrence, the alarm will be cleared.

bit 3: Servo OFF

The PLC axis will execute a deceleration stop and its servo will turn OFF when the servo OFF signal turns ON. Whether the PLC axis movement is compensated during servo OFF can be selected in the basic specification parameter «#1064 svof». A servo ON status will result when the power is turned ON.

bit4: Axis removal

The axis will execute a deceleration stop, and a servo OFF status will result, when the axis removal signal turns ON. A servo ON status will result and the stopped PLC axis will resume movement when the axis removal signal turns OFF (is canceled). Axis removal is validated when either this signal or machining parameter and axis parameter «#8201 Axis Removal» is validated. The zero point return will become incomplete when the axis is removed. Therefore, a dog-type reference point return must be completed again when starting with an absolute value command.

11. PLC Axis Control

— 272 —

bit 5: Axis removal 2 The axis will execute a deceleration stop, and a servo OFF/ready OFF status will result, when the axis removal 2 signal turns ON. A servo ON/ready ON status will result for the stopped PLC axis when the axis removal 2 signal turns OFF (is canceled). A restart must be executed to start the movement again. Position control cannot be carried out while the axis removal 2 signal is ON. However, position detection is possible so the position will not be lost.

bit 8: Absolute value command

Turn this bit ON when the movement data is commanded in absolute values. When this bit is OFF, the commands will be processed as incremental value commands.

11. PLC Axis Control

— 273 —

11.3.3.5 Axis Designation

The axis No. of the PLC axis is designated.

Rn + 4 0: 1st axis 1: 2nd axis 11.3.3.6 Operation Mode

The operation mode for the PLC axis is designated.

Rn + 5 0: Rapid traverse (G0) 1: Cutting feed (G1) 2: Jog feed (+) 3: Jog feed (-) 4: Reference point return (+) 5: Reference point return (-) 6: Handle feed

The axis movement will not be affected by changing the operation mode, even while the axis is moving. The new operation mode is validated at the next start.

Axis designation

Operation mode

11. PLC Axis Control

— 274 —

11.3.3.7 Feedrate

When the operation mode is cutting feed or jog feed (Rn + 5 = 1 to 3), the PLC axis feedrate is designated with a binary code.

Rn + 6 7

Designation value 1 to 240000 mm/min. (0.1 inch/min.) (Note 1) The feedrate designated in the parameters is used for the rapid traverse mode and

reference point return mode. (Note 2) The feedrate can be changed during axis movement. In that case, change using a direct

feedrate data (Rn + 6, 7) is possible. 11.3.3.8 Movement Data

When the operation mode is rapid traverse or cutting feed, the movement data is designated with a binary code.

Rn + 8 9

Designation value 0 to 99999999 (0.001mm/0.0001inch) (Note 1) The movement data is classified as follows by the absolute value command flag (bit 8) of

the command signal. Absolute value command flag = 0: Incremental value from the current position Absolute value command flag = 1: Absolute value of the machine coordinate system (Note 2) If the movement amount is changed during axis movement, the new movement amount will

be validated at the next start.

Feedrate

Movement data

11. PLC Axis Control

— 275 —

11.3.3.9 Machine Position

The machine position output to the machine system is expressed. The machine position becomes the rfp (reference point) when the reference point is reached.

Rn + 10 11

11.3.3.10 Remaining Distance

The remaining distance of the movement data output to the machine system is expressed.

Rn + 12 13

Machine position (input unit)

Remaining distance (input unit)

11. PLC Axis Control

— 276 —

11.3.4 Reference Point Return near Point Detection

Set the near point dog signal of the PLC axis reference point return for the following devices in the PLC.

Device No. Signal name

Y2E0 *PCD1 PLC axis Reference point return near point detection 1

Y2E1 *PCD2 PLC axis Reference point return near point detection 2

Y2E2 Y2E3 Y2E4 Y2E5 Y2E6 Y2E7

(Note) The responsiveness when the dog signal is set in PLC middle-speed processing is worse than when set in PLC high-speed processing.

11. PLC Axis Control

— 277 —

11.3.5 Handle Feed Axis Selection

The axis is designated for the following devices when handle feed is carried out with a PLC axis.

Device No. Signal name Y2E0 Y2E1 Y2E2 Y2E3 Y2E4 HS1P 1st handle PLC axis valid Y2E5 HS2P 2nd handle PLC axis valid Y2E6 Y2E7

When Y2E4 and Y2E5 are ON, each handle is PLC axis dedicated and not valid for NC axes. Y248 to Y24F and Y250 to Y257 are used for the axis selection of each handle.

(Note) 1. The handle feed magnification is also used for NC control axes.

12. Appendix

— 278 —

12. Appendix 12.1 Example of Faulty Circuit Wrong configurations of circuits are shown below. Correct the circuitry, if any.

Faulty circuit producing errors Correct circuit (1) Circuit containing OR

(2) Rounding circuit

Y11

Y10

X4X3

X2

X1

Whether or not the Y10 condition includes X3, X4 and X2 is unknown.

Necessity

Y11

Y10

X4X3X2

X1

X4X3

X2X1

(3) Modification of loopback circuit

0

0

0

1

1

0

(4) Presence of a contact before RET, FEND, or MCR circuit

RET

RET

Revision History

Sub-No. Date of revision Revision details

February 1998 First edition created.

1998 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

BNP-B2212*(ENG)

M60/60S Series

008-099

(0208)MEE

Specifications subject to change without notic

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the CNC Meldas 60 Mitsubishi Electric works, you can view and download the Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60, 60S Series Users Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the User’s Manual for Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60 as well as other Mitsubishi Electric manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The User’s Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60, 60S Series Users Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60, 60S Series Users Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60, 60S Series Users Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60, 60S Series Users Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mitsubishi Electric CNC Meldas 60, 60S Series Users Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.

CNC Manual/Mitsubishi CNC/Mitsubishi MELDAS 60 60S Series

Instruction Manual and User Guide for Mitsubishi MELDAS 60 60S Series. We have 3 Mitsubishi MELDAS 60 60S Series manuals for free PDF download.

Понравилась статья? Поделить с друзьями:
  • Инструкция line 6 pod hd pro
  • Wynns diesel system purge инструкция по применению
  • Фортран лекарство инструкция по применению взрослым
  • Читать на тему руководство
  • Остроглаз черника форте с лютеином инструкция по применению